The URL can be used to link to this page

Home My WebLink AboutPROJECT MANUAL - 17-00184 & 17-00185 - 359 W 4th S - The Landing17-00184 & 17-00185 The Landing - Bldg 1 - 26 units/Bldg 2 - 28 Units Project Manual Office Copy (1 of 1) •O r0 V SET NO. May 2017 LLC The Landing - Student Housing 359 W. 4th South, Rexburg, Idaho LICENSED ARCHITECT AR - 1572 1_ s-¢-107 Architects Project No. 1619 JENSEN•HAYES •SHROPSHIRE ARCHITECTS, P.A. 125 North Garfield - Pocatello, Idaho Phone (208) 232-1223 - Fax (208) 232-1226 PROJECT MANUAL THE LANDING - STUDENT HOUSING 359 W. 4`n SOUTH, REXBURG, IDAHO ARCHITECT'S PROJECT #1619 OWNER BALL VENTURES, LLC 901 Pier View Dr. #201 Idaho Falls, Idaho 83402 ARCHITECT JENSEN • HAYES • SHROPSHIRE ARCHITECTS 125 N. Garfield Avenue Pocatello, Idaho 83204 (208) 232-1223 f _ 1 GENERAL CONTRACTOR j HEADWATERS CONSTRUCTION 639 W. 9500 S., Suite 1 Victor, Idaho 83455 (866) 496-9868 MECHANICAL ENGINEER ENGINEERED SYSTEMS ASSOCIATES 1355 E. Center Street Pocatello, Idaho 83201 (208)233-0501 ELECTRICAL ENGINEER PAYNE ENGINEERING 1823 E. Center Street Pocatello, Idaho 83201 (208) 232-4439 STRUCTURAL ENGINEER TBSE, Inc. 233 N. 1250 W. #201 Centerville, Utah 84014 (801)298-8795 May 2017 15 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS #1619 May 2017 INDEX TO SPECIFICATIONS INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS (AIA - A701,1997 Edition)....................................................................IB 1 SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS........................................................................... S111-2 AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR, CM ADVISOR (AIA -A132,2009 Edition)..... AOC 1 SUPPLEMENTS TO AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR.............................SAOC 1 GENERAL CONDITIONS, CM ADVISOR (AIA -A232, 2009 Edition)...................................................GC 1 SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS...................................................................................SC 1-5 CONTRACTORS AFFIDAVIT CONCERNING TAXES.......................................................................... CA 1 DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 011000 SUMMARY ............................ .................................................................. .....................................1 ........................................ 1-3 054000 012000 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES.................................................................................... 1 METAL FABRICATIONS..........................................................................................................1-2 012600 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES........................................................................1-2 METAL STAIRS........................................................................................................................1-4 01 3000 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS......................................................................................1-5 066500 014000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS.....................................................................................................1-4 - 01 5000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS ..................................... .................................... 1-3 016000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS..................................................................................................1-3 016050 DIRECT PURCHASE ITEMS BY CM.......................................................................................1-3 017000 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS.................................................................1-7 01 7800 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS......................................................................................................1-3 DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE 03 3000 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE.................................................................................................1-9 03 5400 GYPSUM CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT...................................................................................1-3 DIVISION 4- MASONRY 042000 UNIT MASONRY......................................................................................................................1-6 DIVISION 5 - METALS 05 1200 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING .................................................... ........................................ 1-3 054000 COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING ..................................................... ................................... 1-2 05 5000 METAL FABRICATIONS..........................................................................................................1-2 055100 METAL STAIRS........................................................................................................................1-4 DIVISION 6 - WOODS. PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES 061000 ROUGH CARPENTRY.............................................................................................................1-6 061733 WOOD I-JOISTS.......................................................................................................................1-3 061800 GLUED -LAM VENEER STRUCTURAL UNITS........................................................................1-2 062000 FINISH CARPENTRY...............................................................................................................1-3 064100 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK.................................................................................1-4 066500 SOLID POLYMER FABRICATIONS...................................................... ................................... 1-2 INDEX TO SPECIFICATIONS Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS #1619 DIVISION 7 — THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION May 2017 071113 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING.............................................................................................1-2 072100 THERMAL INSULATION..........................................................................................................1-4 1-4 083326 072119 FOAMED -IN-PLACE INSULATION..........................................................................................1-2 084313 ALUMINUM -FRAMED STOREFRONTS..................................................................................1-4 072126 BLOWN INSULATION..............................................................................................................1-2 VINYL WINDOWS....................................................................................................................1-4 1 072500 WEATHER BARRIERS.............................................................................................................1-2 088000 074213 METAL WALL PANELS............................................................................................................1-3 220720 RAIN DRAIN INSULATION..........................................................................................................1 075400 THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING............................................................................1-7 i 076200 SHEET METAL FLASHING & TRIM.........................................................................................1-3 079005 JOINT SEALERS......................................................................................................................1-5 j DIVISION 8 — DOORS AND WINDOWS 081113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES..............................................................................1-3 081613 FIBERGLASS DOORS.............................................................................................................1-3 1-4 083326 OVERHEAD COILING GRILLES..............................................................................................1-2 084313 ALUMINUM -FRAMED STOREFRONTS..................................................................................1-4 085313 VINYL WINDOWS....................................................................................................................1-4 1 087100 HARDWARE SCHEDULE........................................................................................................1-5 088000 GLAZING..................................................................................................................................1-5 DIVISION 9 — FINISHES 092600 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES.............................................................................................1-4 096500 RESILIENT FLOORING ................................................... ......................................................... 1-4 096813 TILE CARPETING....................................................................................................................1-3 099113 EXTERIOR PAINTING..............................................................................................................1-4 099123 INTERIOR PAINTING...............................................................................................................1-6 1 DIVISION 14—CONVEING EQUIPMENT 142400 HYDRAULIC ELEVATOR.........................................................................................................1-9 DIVISION 21 — FIRE SUPRESSION 21 0500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPRESSION.........................................................1-6 21 1313 WET PIPE AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEM.....................................................................1-5 21 1330 STANDPIPE & FIRE HOSE SYSTEMS...................................................................................1-2 21 1400 DRY PIPE FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLERS.....................................................................1-6 DIVISION 22 — PLUMBING 220501 COMMON PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS...............................................................................1-5 220503 PIPE, PIPE FITTINGS, HANGERS & VALVES........................................................................1-4 220553 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQIPMENT..................................................1 220703 MECHANICAL INSULATION AND FIRE STOPPING.................................................................1 220705 UNDERGROUND PIPING INSULATION.................................................................................... 1 220710 POTABLE WATER PIPE INSULATION......................................................................................1 220711 HANDICAPPED FIXTURES INSULATION.................................................................................1 220720 RAIN DRAIN INSULATION..........................................................................................................1 INDEX TO SPECIFICATIONS Student Housing BVI I, LLC JHS #1619 May 2017 220800 FIRE STOPPING.........................................................................................................................1 221110 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING, HOT & COLD POTABLE WATER DIST............................ ...... 1-4 221123 NATURAL GAS SYSTEMS......................................................................................................1-2 1-4 221313 SOIL, WASTE & VENT PIPING SYSTEM................................................................................... 1 223420 GAS FIRED STORAGE TYPE WATER HEATERS.................................................................1-2 223600 WATER SOFTENER................................................................................................................1-2 1 224001 PLUMBING FIXTURES............................................................................................................1-2 DIVISION 23 — MECHANICAL 230501 COMMON HVAC REQUIREMENTS........................................................................................1-7 230553 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT....................................................1-2 230593 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC ........................... ............................. 1-4 230800 FIRE STOPPING.........................................................................................................................1 233114 LOW PRESSURE STEEL DUCTWORK..................................................................................1-4 233400 EXHAUST FANS......................................................................................................................... 1 233713 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS...................................................................................................1-2 237400 PACKAGED HVAC SYSTEM...................................................................................................1-3 238316 WALL HEATER............................................................................................................................1 DIVISION 26 — ELECTRICAL SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS END OF INDEX TO SPECIFICATIONS INDEX TO SPECIFICATIONS Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS #1619 May 2017 INDEX OF DRAWINGS TI TITLE, DRAWING INDEX, SYMBOLS & ABBREVIATIONS LANDSCAPE DRAWINGS L1 DESIGN -BUILD LANDSCAPE PLAa ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS A1.1 SITE LAYOUT PLAN A1.2 SITE DETAILS A2.0 FOUNDATION PLAN A2.1 GROUND FLOOR PLAN A2.2 SECOND FLOOR PLAN A2.3 THIRD FLOOR PLAN A2.4 FOURTH FLOOR PLAN A3.1 TYPICAL UNIT PLANS A3.2 TYPICAL UNIT PLANS A3.3 ENLARGED PLANS A4.1 ROOF PLAN AND ROOF DETAILS A4.2 ROOF DETAILS A5.1 BUILDING ELEVATIONS A5.2 BUILDING ELEVATIONS A6.1 BUILDING SECTION A6.2 BUILDING SECTION A6.3 BUILDING SECTIONS A7.1 WALL SECTIONS A7.2 WALL SECTIONS A7.3 WALL SECTIONS A7.4 WALL SECTIONS A7.5 WALL SECTIONS A8.1 DOOR AND WINDOW TYPES AND SCHEDULE A8.2 DOOR AND WINDOW DETAILS A8.3 DOOR AND WINDOW DETAILS A9.1 STAIR PLANS, SECTION AND DETAILS A10.1 FINISH SCHEDULE AND DETAILS A11.1 INTERIOR CASEWORK ELEVATIONS A11.2 INTERIOR CASEWORK ELEVATIONS A11.3 INTERIOR CASEWORK ELEVATIONS A11.4 CASEWORK SECTIONS AND DETAILS Al2.1 MISC. DETAILS Al2.2 MISC. DETAILS STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS S0.1 GENERAL NOTES S0.2 INSPECTIONS S0.3 SCHEDULES INDEX OF DRAWINGS Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS #1619 May 2017 50.4 SCHEDULES S1.1 FOUNDATION PLAN S1.2A LEVEL 2 AREA A S1.2B LEVEL 2 AREA B 51.3A LEVEL 3 AREA A S1.313 LEVEL 3 AREA B S1.4A LEVEL 4 AREA A S1.4B LEVEL 4 AREA B S1.5A ROOF AREA A S1.513 ROOF AREA B S2.1 ENLARGED PLANS S5.1 FOUNDATION DETAILS S5.2 FLOOR FRAMING DETAILS 55.3 ROOF FRAMING DETAILS S5.4 STAIR DETAILS MECHANICAL DRAWINGS M1.1 GROUND FLOOR MECHANICAL PLAN M1.2 SECOND FLOOR MECHANICAL PLAN M1.3 THIRD FLOOR MECHANICAL PLAN M1.4 FOURTH FLOOR MECHANICAL PLAN M2.0 LARGE SCALE TYPICAL APARTMENT MECHANICAL FLOOR PLAN M3.0 MECHANICAL DETAILS MECHANICAL SCHEDULES PLUMBING DRAWINGS P1.0 FOUNDATION PLUMBING PLAN P1.1 GROUND FLOOR PLUMBING PLAN P1.2 SECOND FLOOR PLUMBING PLAN P1.3 THIRD FLOOR PLUMBING PLAN P1.4 FOURTH FLOOR PLUMBING PLAN P2.0 TYPICAL APT. PLUMBING PLANS P2.1 TYPICAL APT. & MECH. ROOM PLUMBING PLANS P3.0 PLUMBING DETAILS ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS E1.0 ELECTRICAL NOTES, DETAILS AND SCHEDULES E1.1 ELECTRICAL ELEVATIONS E2.0 GROUND LEVEL ELECTRICAL E2.1 SECOND LEVEL ELECTRICAL E2.2 THIRD LEVEL ELECTRICAL E2.3 FOURTH LEVEL ELECTRICAL E2.4 ROOF PLAN ELECTRICAL E3.0 TYPICAL APARTMENTS ELECTRICAL E3.1 TYPICAL APARTMENTS ELECTRICAL E4.0 POWER RISERS AND CALCULATIONS END OF INDEX OF DRAWINGS INDEX OF DRAWINGS Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS #1619 May 2017 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS AIA Doc. A701,1997 Edition This page represents AIA Document A701 — 1997 Instructions to Bidders in its entirety. The actual document can be obtained from the office of the Architect, 125 N. Garfield, Pocatello, Idaho 83204, (208) 232-1223. A completed and executed copy will be prepared for the successful General Contractor. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS IB -1 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS #1619 May 2017 SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS The following supplements modify, change, delete from or add to the Instructions to Bidders, AIA Document A701, 1997. Where any Article of the Instructions to Bidders is modified or any Paragraph, Subparagraph or Clause thereof is modified or deleted by the Supplementary Instructions to Bidders, the unaltered provisions of that Article, Paragraph, Subparagraph or Clause shall remain in effect. ARTICLE 4; BIDDING PROCEDURE Add to Article 4, the following: 4.2.1.1 To be considered, proposals must be accompanied by an acceptable security, in an amount not less than five (5) percent of the total amount of the bid including additive alternates. The security may be in the form of a bond, or a certified or cashier's check. 4.2.3.1 The bidder's security will be returned promptly after the owner and the accepted bidder have executed a contract, or, if no award has been made within 30 days after the opening of bids; upon demand of the bidder at any time thereafter, so long as he has not been notified of the acceptance of his bid. 4.3.1.1 The mailing envelope containing the bid shall be addressed as follows: c/o Headwaters Construction 639 W. 9500 S., Suite 1 Victor, Idaho 83455 BID DOCUMENTS ENCLOSED ARTICLE 5; CONSIDERATION OF BIDS Add to Article 5, the following: 5.4 NAMING OF SUBCONTRACTORS 5.4.1 Section 67-2310, Idaho Code, requires general (prime) contractors to include in their bid the name of the subcontractors who shall, in the event the contractor secures the contract, subcontract the plumbing, heating and air conditioning, and the electrical work under the general (prime) contract. Failure to name subcontractors as required by this section shall render any bid submitted by a general (prime) contractor unresponsive and void. Subcontractors named in accordance with the provisions of this section must possess an appropriate license or certificate of competency issued by the State of Idaho covering the contractor work classification in which the subcontractor is named. ARTICLE 7; PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND Add to Article 7 the following: 7.1.1.1 In conformance to Idaho Code, 54-1926, performance bond and labor and material payment bond are required for this project; each in the amount of 100% of the contract amount, and by a surety company authorized to do business in Idaho. These bonds must be in a form acceptable to the Owner or acceptable government obligations. SUPPLEMENTRY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS SI -1 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS #1619 May 2017 In addition to the 100% performance and labor and material bonds required by Idaho Code 54-1926 and the additional bonds required by the Owner, the contractor may furnish, at his option, a single performance bond and single labor and material payment bond on AIA Document A312, 1984 edition, each in the amount of 100% of the contract amount. This bond will be considered sufficient to meet the requirements of Idaho Code 54-1926 and the additional requirements of the Owner. Should the contractor elect to furnish both bonds separately, any claimant may file against either bond or both to the limit of each. Should claims against either type of bond exceed the limit of the bond, the other bond shall be considered supplementary to it to provide to it to provide coverage to 100% of the contract amount. END OF SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS SUPPLEMENTRY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS SI -2 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS #1619 May 2017 AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR, CONSTRUCTION MANAGER AS ADVISOR AIA A132,2009 Edition This page represents AIA Document A132 — 2009 Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor, Construction Manager as Advisor Edition in its entirety. The actual document can be obtained from the office of the Architect, 125 N. Garfield, Pocatello, Idaho 83204, (208) 232-1223. A completed and executed copy will be prepared for the successful General Contractor. AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR AOC -1 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS #1619 May 2017 SUPPLEMENTS TO AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR AIA Document A132, 2009 Edition, Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor, CM Advisor will be used as the agreement for this project. ARTICLE 3; DATE OF COMMENCEMENT AND SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 3.1 and 3.2 These dates will be fixed by issuance of a "Notice of Intend to Award" and a "Notice to Proceed." 3.2 Liquidated damages will be included as provided in the Supplementary General Conditions. ARTICLE 5; PROGRESS PAYMENTS 5.1.3 Thirty days will be allowed for payments by the Owner after payment request is signed by JHS Architects and delivered to the Owner. 5.1.6 Retainage will be 5% for work completed and materials suitably stored. 5.1.8 No reduction in retainage will be allowed prior to final completion without written approval of the Owner. 5.1.9 A condition will be included forbidding more retainage from a subcontractor or supplier than retained from their portion of work. AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR SAOC-1 w Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS #1619 May 2017 i GENERAL CONDTIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION, CONSTRUCTION MANAGER AS ADVISOR AIA A232,2009 Edition This page represents AIA Document A232 — 2009 General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Construction Manager as Advisor in its entirety. The actual document can be obtained from the office of the Architect, 125 N. Garfield, Pocatello, Idaho 83204, (208) 232-1223. A completed and executed copy will be prepared for the successful General Contractor. GENERAL CONDITIONS GC -1 Student Housing BVI I, LLC JHS #1619 May 2017 SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS The following supplements modify the "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, CM Advisor." AIA Document A232, 2009. Where a portion of the General Conditions is modified or deleted by these Supplementary Conditions, the unaltered portions of the Article, Paragraph, Sub -Paragraph or Clause shall remain in effect. ARTICLE 1; GENERAL PROVISIONS 1.1 Basic Definitions Add to 1.1 the following: 1.1.4.1 The entire Project shall be considered as one "portion" unless separate areas of phases are designated in the Contract Documents for separate completion times of separate areas of completion and occupancy. This definition is for use in determining release of retainage. ARTICLE 3; CONTRACTOR 3.4 Labor and Materials Add the following Subparagraphs 3.4.2a1, 3.4.2a2 and 3.4.2a3 to 3.4: 3.4.2a After the Contract has been executed, the Owner and the Architect will consider a formal request for the substitution of products in place of those specified only under the following conditions: .1 Required product cannot be supplied in time for compliance with Contract time requirements. .2 Required product is not acceptable to governing authority, or determined to be non- compatible, or cannot be properly coordinated, warranted or insured, or has other recognized disability as certified by Contractor. .3 Substantial advantage is offered to Owner after deducting offsetting disadvantages including delays, additional compensation to Architect/Engineer for redesign, investigation, evaluation and other necessary services, and similar considerations. 3.4.2b By making requests for substitutions based on Clause 3.4.2a above, the Contractor: .1 represents that he has personally investigated the proposed substitute product and determined that it is equal or superior in all respects to that specified; .2 represents that he will provide the same warranty for the substitution that he would for that specified; .3 certifies that the cost data presented is complete and includes all related costs under separate contracts, but excludes the Architect's redesign costs, and waives all claims for additional costs related to the substitution which subsequently become apparent; and .4 will coordinate the installation of the accepted substitute, making such changes as may be required for the Work to be complete in all respects. SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS SC -1 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS #1619 May 2017 ARTICLE 4; ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 4.3 Arbitration Add the following paragraph: 4.3.1 The Contractor and the Owner shall not be obligated to resolve any claim or dispute related to the contract by arbitration. Any reference herein to arbitration is deemed void and has no force or effect. ARTICLE 7; CHANGES IN THE WORK 7.2 Change Orders 7.2.1.2 For Purposes of determination of Contract Sum Changes, the allowance for combined overhead, profit, bonds and insurance shall be limited as follows, unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents: .1 For total changes of $10,000 or less in direct cost, the amount of overhead, profit, bonds and insurance for the Contractor and all subcontractors of any tier combined shall be negotiated and shall not exceed twenty percent (20%) of direct costs; .2 For total changes exceeding $10,000 in direct cost, the amount allowed for overhead, profit, bonds and insurance for the Contractor and all subcontractors of any tier combined shall be negotiated and shall not exceed fifteen percent (15%) of direct costs; or .3 The Contractor will determine the apportionment between the Contractor and its subcontractors of allowable amounts of overhead, profit, bonds and insurance. Add new paragraph 7.2.2 7.2.2 Agreement on any Change Order shall constitute a final settlement of all matters relating to the change in the Work which is the subject of the Change Order, including, but not limited to, all direct and indirect costs associated with such change and any and all adjustments to the Contract Sum and the construction schedule. In the event a Change Order increased the Contract Sum, the Contractor shall include the Work covered by such Change Order in Application for Payment as if such Work were originally part of the Project and Contract Documents. ARTICLE 8; TIME 8.1 Definitions Add to paragraph 8.1.1 the following: 8.1.1.1 The Contractor shall substantially complete the work as defined by paragraph 9.8.1 within 180 consecutive calendar days after the Notice to Proceed as defined by Paragraph 8.1.2. 8.3 Delays and Extensions of Time In subparagraph 8.3.1, in the first sentence, delete the words "mediation and arbitration" and substitute the word 'litigation." Delete subparagraph 8.3.3 and substitute the following: SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS SC- 2 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS #1619 May 2017 8.3.3 Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in the Contracts Documents, an extension in the Contract Time, to the extent permitted under Paragraph 8.3.1, shall be the sole remedy of the Contractor for any of the following: 1 delay in the commencement, prosecution or completion of the Work; .2 hindrance or obstruction in the performance of the Work; .3 loss of productivity; or .4 other similar claims (collectively referred to in this subparagraph 8.3.3 as Delays). This will be the remedy whether or not such Delays are foreseeable, unless a Delay is caused by acts of the Owner constituting active inference with the Contractor's performance of the Work, and only to the extent such acts continue after the Contractor furnishes the Owner with written notice of such interference. In no event shall the Contractor be entitled to any compensation or recovery of damages, in connection with any Delay, including, without limitation, consequential damages, lost opportunity costs, impact damages, or other similar remuneration. The Owner's exercise of any of its rights or remedies under the Contract Documents including, without limitation, ordering changes in the Work, and regardless of the extent or frequency of the Owner's exercise of such rights or remedies, shall not be construed as active interference with the Contractor's performance of the Work. Add the following paragraph as Article 8.3.4 and 8.3.5 8.3.4 If the Contractor submits a progress report indicating, or otherwise expressing an intention to achieve completion of the Work prior to any completion date required by the Contract Documents or expiration of the Contract Time, no liability of the Owner to the Contractor for any failure of the Contractor to so complete the Work shall be created or implied. 8.3.5 Contractor shall not request additional time to complete the project because of delay occurring on Sundays, holidays or days off due to local seasonal hunting. Neither shall he request additional time for Saturday delays except and unless he can show proof of normally working on Saturdays in order to complete the work on time. ARTICLE 9; PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION Add to 9.10.1 the following: The final retainage shall become due and payable to the Contractor in not more than thirty (30) days after issuance of the final Certificate for Payment by the Architect, provided that the conditions of subparagraph 9.10.2 are fully satisfied. Add to Article 9 the following 9.11 Liquidated Damages 9.11.1 The Owner will suffer financial loss if the Project is not Substantially Complete on the date set forth in the Contract Documents. The Contractor (and his Surety) shall be liable for and shall pay to the Owner the sums hereinafter stipulated as fixed, agreed and liquidated damages for each calendar day of delay until the Work is substantially completed: Three Hundred Dollars ($300.00) SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS SC -3 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS #1619 May 2017 ARTICLE 11; INSURANCE AND BONDS Add to 11.1.2 the following: 11.1.2.1 The insurance required by Subparagraph 11.1.1 shall be written for not less than the following limits: 1. Workers' Compensation: (a) State: Statutory (b) Employer's Liability: $100,000 per Accident $500,000 Disease, Policy Limit $100,000 Disease, Each Employee 2. Comprehensive or commercial general liability including premises operation; owners and contractors protective liability, products and completed operations liability, personal injury liability (including employee acts), broad form property damage liability and blanket contractual liability: (a) For any claim for bodily injury, property damage or due to a contractual liability, limits of not less than $1 million per occurrence. (b) For products and completed operations coverage, coverage is to be maintained for a period of two (2) years following final payment. (c) For the hazard of explosion, collapse, and underground, commonly referred to as XCU, coverage shall be required if the exposures exist. This coverage may be provided by the subcontractor if the State and prime contractor are named as additional insureds. (d) For personal injury liability, limits of not less than $100,000 per occurrence. 3. Business auto liability (including owned, non -owned and hired vehicles) in an amount of not less than $1 million combined single limit. 4. If the General Liability coverages are provided by a Commercial Liability policy, the: (a) General Aggregate shall be not less than $2,000,000. (b) Fire legal liability shall be provided in an amount not less than $50,000 per occurrence. 5. Umbrella Excess Liability: An umbrella policy may be used in combination with other policies to provide a minimum Coverage of $1,000,000. 11.1.2.2 The Contractor shall require all subcontractors of any tier to provide Comprehensive General Liability Insurance with combined single limits for bodily injury and property damage of at least $1,000,000 per occurrence, and Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance for all owned, non -owned, and hired vehicles with combined single limits for bodily injury and property damage of at least $1,000,000 per occurrence. Add to 11.1.3 the following: 11.1.3.1 If this insurance is written on the Comprehensive General Liability policy form, the Certificates shall be AIA Document G705, Certificate of Insurance or ACORD form 25. If this SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS SC- 4 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS #1619 May 2017 insurance is written on a Commercial General Liability policy form, ACORD form 25S will be acceptable. Add to Article 11 the following: 11.5 Indemnity 11.5.1 The Contractor shall indemnify, defend and save harmless the Owner, the Architect, and the Architect's Consultants from and against all claims, damages, costs, legal fees, expenses, actions and suits whatsoever including injury or death of others or any employee of the Contractor, subcontractors, or the sub -subcontractors, agents or employees, caused by failure to comply fully with any term or condition of the contract, or caused by damage to or loss of use of property, directly or indirectly, by the carrying out of the work, or caused by any matter or thing r - done, permitted or omitted to be done by the Contractor, his agents, subcontractors or employees f and occasioned by the negligence of the Contractor, his agents, subcontractors or employees. ARTICLE 13; MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS Add to Article 13 the following: 13.5 Tests and Inspections 13.5.1 Revise Article 13.5.1 to read as follows: Tests, inspections and approvals of portions of the Work shall be made as required by the Contract Documents and by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations or lawful orders of public authorities unless otherwise provided, the Contractor shall make arrangements for such tests, inspections and approvals with an independent testing laboratory or entity acceptable to the Owner, or with the appropriate public authority. The Contractor shall give the Architect timely notice of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so that the Architect may be present for such procedures. The Owner shall bear costs of tests, inspections or approvals that are required and inspections or approvals deemed necessary by the Architect. 13.8 EQUAL OPPORTUNITY 13.8.1 The Contractor shall maintain policies of employment as follows: 13.8.1.1 The Contractor and the Contractor's Subcontractors shall not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, religion, color, sex, age or national origin. The Contractor shall take affirmative action to insure that applicants are employed, and that employees are treated during employment without regard to their race, religion, color, sex, age, or national origin. Such action shall include, but not be limited to, the following: employment, upgrading, demotion, or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; layoff or termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training, including apprenticeship. The Contractor agrees to post in conspicuous places, available to employees and applicants for employment, notices setting forth the policies of non-discrimination. END OF SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS SC- 5 i " Student Housing BVI I, LLC JHS #1619 May 2017 CONTRACTOR'S AFFIDAVIT CONCERNING TAXES STATE OF COUNTY OF Pursuant to the Idaho Code, Title 63, Chapter 15, I, the undersigned, being duly sworn, deposes and certify that all taxes, excises and license fees due to the State or its taxing units, for which I or my property is liable then due or delinquent, has been paid, or arrangements have been made, before entering into a contract for construction of any public works in the State of Idaho. Name of Contractor Address City and State By: (Signature) Subscribed and sworn to before me this day of Commission expires: NOTARY PUBLIC, residing at CONTRACTORS AFFIDAVIT CA - 1 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 SECTION 01 1000 SUMMARY PART1 GENERAL 1.01 PROJECT A. Project Name: Student Housing BVH II, LLC. B. Owner Name: Ball Ventures, LLC. C. Architect's Name: JHS Architects, PA. (JHS) D. The Project consists of the construction of two similar four (4) story buildings with apartments for single students. Associated site work is included in the project. 1.02 CONTRACT DESCRIPTION A. Contract Type: Multiple prime contracts each based on a Stipulated Price as described in Document 00 5200 - Agreement Form. B. The work of each separate sub - contract is identified in Bid Packages contained herein and on the Drawings. 1.03 WORK BY OWNER A. Items noted NIC (Not in Contract) will be supplied and installed by Owner before Substantial Completion. Some items include: 1. Vending Machines. 2. Furnishings. 3. Appliances 4. Small equipment. 5. Rugs. 6. Artwork. 1.04 CONTRACTOR USE OF SITE AND PREMISES A. Construction Operations: Limited to construction activities and storage of materials to used within a rolling 45 calendar days. 1. Contractor shall take appropriate precautions to protect existing portions of the site designated to remain. Contractors shall protect the adjacent property owners improvements. B. Provide access to and from site as required bylaw and by Owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION SUMMARY 01 1000-1 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 SECTION 01 2000 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Procedures for preparation and submittal of applications for progress payments. 1.02 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Electronic media printout including equivalent information will be considered in lieu of standard form specified; submit draft to Architect for approval. B. Forms filled out by hand will not be accepted. C. Submit a printed schedule on AIA Form G703 - Application and Certificate for Payment Continuation Sheet. Contractor's standard form or electronic media printout will be considered. 1.03 APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS A. Payment Period: Submit at intervals stipulated in the Agreement. B. Electronic media printout including equivalent information will be considered in lieu of standard form specified; submit sample to Architect for approval. C. Forms filled out by hand will not be accepted. D. Present required information in typewritten form. E. Form: AIA G702 Application and Certificate for Payment and AIA G703 - Continuation Sheet including continuation sheets when required. F. Execute certification by signature of authorized officer. G. Submit three copies of each Application for Payment. I PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION PRICE AND PAYMENT 012000-1 PROCEDURES Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 SECTION 01 2600 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 013000 - Administrative Procedures for handling requests for substitutions made after the Contract award. 1.03 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK A. Design Professional will issue supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. Contractor shall respond, in --- writing, within 21 calendar days of issuance of these supplemental instructions with notice of I potential cost and/or time impact. Otherwise, no adjustment requested from the Contractor to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time will be considered. I 1.04 PROPOSAL REQUESTS A. Owner -Initiated Proposal Requests: Design Professional will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract j Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications. 1. Work Change Proposal Requests issued by Design Professional are not instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change. 2. Within 10 days, when not otherwise specified, after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change. a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. c. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. d. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. e. Include all information as reasonably requested from the Owner and Design Professional. CONTRACT MODIFICATION 01 2600-1 PROCEDURES Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 B. Contractor -Initiated Proposals: If latent or changed conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may initiate a claim by submitting a request for a change to the Design Professional. 1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time. 2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. 3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. 4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. 5. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. 6. Comply with requirements in Section 01 6000 "Product Requirements, Part 3.01 - Substitution Procedures" if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified. 7. Include all information as reasonably requested from the Owner and Design Professional. 1.05 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES A. On Owner's approval of a Work Changes Proposal Request or Contractor -Initiated Proposals, Design Professional will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor. 1.06 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE (CCD) A. Construction Change Directive: Design Professional may issue a Construction Change Directive. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, upon signature of Owner, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. 1. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construction Change Directive if required. 1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract if required. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION CONTRACT MODIFICATION 012600-2 PROCEDURES Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 SECTION 01 3000 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Preconstruction meeting. B. Site mobilization meeting. C. Progress meetings. D. Construction progress schedule. E. Coordination drawings. F. Submittals for review, information, and project closeout. G. Number of copies of submittals. H. Submittal procedures. 1.02 PROJECT COORDINATION A. Project Architect: Keeven Shropshire, AIA, JHS Architects. B. Cooperate with the Architect in allocation of mobilization areas of site; for field offices and sheds, for Contractor access, traffic, and parking facilities. C. During construction, coordinate use of site and facilities through the Architect. D. Comply with Architect's procedures for intra -project communications; submittals, reports and records, schedules, coordination drawings, and recommendations; and resolution of ambiguities and conflicts. E. Comply with instructions of the Architect for use of temporary utilities and construction facilities. F. Coordinate field engineering and layout work under instructions of the Project Architect. G. Make the following types of submittals to the Architect . 1. Requests for interpretation. 2. Requests for substitution. 3. Shop drawings, product data, and samples. 4. Test and inspection reports. 5. Manufacturer's instructions and field reports. 6. Applications for payment and change order requests. 7. Progress schedules. 8. Coordination drawings. 9. Closeout submittals. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING A. Schedule meeting after Notice of Award. ADMINISTRATIVE 01 3000-1 REQUIREMENTS Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 B. Attendance Required: 1. Owner. 2. Architect. 3. Consulting Engineers. 4. Construction Manager. 5. Sub- Contractors. C. Agenda: 1. Execution of Owner -Construction Manager Agreement. 2. Submission of executed bonds and insurance certificates. 3. Distribution of Contract Documents. 4. Submission of list of Subcontractors, list of Products, schedule of values, and progress schedule. 5. Designation of personnel representing the parties to Contract, Owner and Architect. 6. Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, substitutions, applications for payments, proposal request, Change Orders, and Contract closeout procedures. 7. Scheduling. 8. Use of premises by Owner and Construction Manager. 9. Owner's requirements. 10. Construction facilities and controls provided by Owner. 11. Temporary utilities provided by Owner. 12. Security and housekeeping procedures. 13. Schedules. 14. Application for payment procedures. 15. Procedures for testing. 16. Procedures for maintaining record documents. 17. Requirements for start-up of equipment. 18. Inspection and acceptance of equipment put into service during construction period. 19. Scheduling activities of a Geotechnical Engineer. D. JHS will record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with two copies to Architect, Owner, Contractor, participants, and those affected by decisions made. 3.02 SITE MOBILIZATION MEETING A. Owner will schedule meeting at the Project site prior to Construction Manager occupancy. B. Attendance Required: 1. Construction Manager. 2. Owner. 3. Architect. 4. Construction Manager's Superintendent. 5. Major Subcontractors. C. Agenda: 1. Use of premises by Owner and Construction Manager. 2. Owner's requirements . 3. Construction facilities and controls provided by Owner. 4. Temporary utilities provided by Owner. 5. Survey and building layout. 6. Security and housekeeping procedures. 7. Schedules. 8. Application for payment procedures. 9. Procedures for testing. 10. Procedures for maintaining record documents. 11. Requirements for start-up of equipment. 12. Inspection and acceptance of equipment put into service during construction period. ADMINISTRATIVE 013000-2 REQUIREMENTS Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 D. JHS will record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with two copies to Contractor, Architect, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made. 3.03 PROGRESS MEETINGS A. JHS Architects will schedule and administer meetings throughout progress of the Work at maximum monthly intervals. B. JHS will make arrangements for meetings, prepare agenda with copies for participants, preside at meetings. s' C. Attendance Required: Job superintendent, major Subcontractors and suppliers, Owner, j Architect, as appropriate to agenda topics for each meeting. 1. Construction Manager. i 2. Owner. 3. Architect. D. Agenda: 1. Review minutes of previous meetings. 2. Review of Work progress. 3. Field observations, problems, and decisions. j 4. Identification of problems that impede, or will impede, planned progress. i 5. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals. I 6. Review of off-site fabrication and delivery schedules. I 7. Maintenance of progress schedule. E 8. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules. 4 9. Planned progress during succeeding work period. I 10. Coordination of projected progress. 11. Maintenance of quality and work standards. 12. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination. I 13. Other business relating to Work. E. JHS will record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with f one copy to Architect, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made. � 3.04 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE A. Within 10 days after date established in Notice to Proceed, submit preliminary schedule defining j planned operations for the first 60 days of Work, with a general outline for remainder of Work. B. If preliminary schedule requires revision after review, submit revised schedule within 10 days. C. See Supplementary Conditions Section 3.10 for requirements of CPM Schedule. D. Within 20 days after review of preliminary schedule, submit draft of proposed complete schedule for review. 1. Include written certification that major contractors have reviewed and accepted proposed schedule. E. Within 10 days after joint review, submit complete schedule. F. Submit updated schedule with each Application for Payment. 3.05 COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. Provide information required by Architect for preparation of coordination drawings. B. Review drawings prior to submission to Architect. 3.06 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for review: 1. Product data. 2. Shop drawings. 3. Samples for selection. 4. Samples for verification. ADMINISTRATIVE 01 3000-3 REQUIREMENTS Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 B. Submit to Architect for review for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents. C. Allow two weeks for initial review. D. Samples will be reviewed only for aesthetic, color, or finish selection. E. After review, provide copies and distribute in accordance with SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES article below and for record documents purposes described in Section 017800 - Closeout Submittals. 3.07 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for information: 1. Design data. } 2. Certificates. 3. Test reports. 4. Inspection reports. 3 5. Manufacturer's instructions. j 6. Manufacturer's field reports. 7. Other types indicated. B. Submit for JHS Architects knowledge as contract administrator. No action will be taken. 3.08 SUBMITTALS FOR PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Submit Correction Punch List for Substantial Completion. B. Submit Final Correction Punch List for Substantial Completion. C. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them at project closeout: 1. Project record documents. 2. Operation and maintenance data. 3. Warranties. 4. Bonds. 5. Other types as indicated. 3.09 NUMBER OF COPIES OF SUBMITTALS A. Documents for Review: 1. Small Size Sheets, Not Larger Than 8-1/2 x 11 inches: Submit one copy; the Construction Manager shall make his own copies from original returned by the Architect after making his own file copy. 2. Larger Sheets, Not Larger Than 36 x 48 inches: Submit one reproducible transparency and one opaque reproduction. B. Documents for Information: Submit six. C. Documents for Project Closeout: Make three reproduction of submittal originally reviewed. Submit one extra of submittals for information. D. Samples: Submit the number specified in individual specification sections; one of which will be retained by Architect. 1. Retained samples will not be returned to Construction Manager unless specifically so stated. 3.10 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Shop Drawing Procedures: 1. Prepare accurate, drawn -to -scale, original shop drawing documentation by interpreting the Contract Documents and coordinating related Work. 2. Generic, non -project specific information submitted as shop drawings do not meet the requirements for shop drawings. B. Transmit each submittal with a copy of approved submittal form. C. Transmit each submittal with approved form. ADMINISTRATIVE 01 3000-4 REQUIREMENTS Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 D. Sequentially number the transmittal form. Revise submittals with original number and a sequential alphabetic suffix. E. Identify Project, Construction Manager, Subcontractor or supplier; pertinent drawing and detail number, and specification section number, as appropriate on each copy. F. Apply Construction Manager's stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, approval, verification of Products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction Work, and coordination of information is in accordance with the requirements of the Work and Contract Documents. G. Deliver submittals to Architect at 125 N. Garfield Ave., Pocatello. H. Schedule submittals to expedite the Project, and coordinate submission of related items. I. For each submittal for review, allow 15 days excluding delivery time to and from the Construction Manager. J. Identify variations from Contract Documents and Product or system limitations that may be detrimental to successful performance of the completed Work. K. Provide space for Construction Manager and Architect review stamps. L. When revised for resubmission, identify all changes made since previous submission. M. Distribute reviewed submittals as appropriate. Instruct parties to promptly report any inability to complywith requirements. N. Submittals not requested will not be recognized or processed. END OF SECTION ADMINISTRATIVE 01 3000-5 REQUIREMENTS Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 SECTION 01 4000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Submittals. B. References and standards. C. Mock-ups. D. Control of installation. E. Tolerances. F. Testing and inspection agencies and services. G. Control of installation. H. Mock-ups. I. Tolerances. J. Manufacturers' field services. K. Defect Assessment. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Testing Agency Qualifications: 1. Prior to start of Work, submit agency name, address, and telephone number, and names of full time registered Engineer and responsible officer. 2. Submit copy of report of laboratory facilities inspection made by NIST Construction Materials Reference Laboratory during most recent inspection, with memorandum of remedies of any deficiencies reported by the inspection. C. Design Data: Submit for Architect's knowledge as contract administrator for the limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents, or for Owner's information. D. Test Reports: After each test/inspection, promptly submit two copies of report to Architect and to Construction Manager. 1. Include: a. Date issued. b. Project title and number. c. Name of inspector. d. Date and time of sampling or inspection. e. Identification of product and specifications section. f. Location in the Project. g. Type of test/inspection. h. Date of test/inspection. i. Results of test/inspection. j. Conformance with Contract Documents. k. When requested by Architect, provide interpretation of results. E. Certificates: When specified in individual specification sections, submit certification by the manufacturer and Construction Manager or installation/application subcontractor to Architect, in quantities specified for Product Data. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 4000-1 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 1. Indicate material or product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate. 2. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or product, but must be acceptable to Architect. F. Manufacturer's Instructions: When specified in individual specification sections, submit printed instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing. Owner Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention, and special environmental criteria required for application or installation. G. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Submit reports for JHS Architects benefit as contract administrator. 1. Submit report in duplicate within 30 days of observation to Architect for information. 2. Submit for information for the limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents. H. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Submit reports for Architect's benefit as contract administrator or for Owner. 1. Submit report in duplicate within 30 days of observation to Architect for information. 2. Submit for information for the limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents. I. Erection Drawings: Submit drawings for Architect's benefit as contract administrator or for Owner. 1. Submit for information for the limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents. 2. Data indicating inappropriate or unacceptable Work may be subject to action by Architect or Owner. 1.03 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS A. For products and workmanship specified by reference to a document or documents not included in the Project Manual, also referred to as reference standards, comply with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes. B. Conform to reference standard of date of issue current on date of Contract Documents, except where a specific date is established by applicable code. C. Obtain copies of standards where required by product specification sections. D. Maintain copy at project site during submittals, planning, and progress of the specific work, until Substantial Completion. E. Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding. F. Neither the contractual relationships, duties, or responsibilities of the parties in Contract nor those of Architect shall be altered from the Contract Documents by mention or inference otherwise in any reference document. 1.04 TESTING AND INSPECTION AGENCIES AND SERVICES A. Owner will employ and pay for services of an independent testing agency to perform other specified testing. B. Construction Manager shall employ and pay for services of an independent testing agency to perform other specified testing. C. As indicated in individual specification sections, Owner or Construction Manager shall employ and pay for services of an independent testing agency to perform other specified testing. D. Employment of agency in no way relieves Construction Manager of obligation to perform Work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 4000-2 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CONTROL OF INSTALLATION A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality. B. Comply with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence. C. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding. D. Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the Work except where more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship. E. Have Work performed by persons qualified to produce required and specified quality. F. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings or as instructed by the manufacturer. G. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion, and disfigurement. 3.02 MOCK-UPS A. Tests shall be performed under provisions identified in this section and identified in the respective product specification sections. B. Assemble and erect specified items with specified attachment and anchorage devices, flashings, seals, and finishes. C. Accepted mock-ups shall be a comparison standard for the remaining Work. D. Where mock-up has been accepted by Architect and is specified in product specification sections to be removed, protect mock-up throughout construction, remove mock-up and clear area when directed to do so by Architect. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Monitor fabrication and installation tolerance control of products to produce acceptable Work. Do not permit tolerances to accumulate. B. Comply with manufacturers' tolerances. Should manufacturers' tolerances conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding. C. Adjust products to appropriate dimensions; position before securing products in place. 3.04 TESTING AND INSPECTION A. Testing Agency Duties: 1. Provide qualified personnel at site. Cooperate with Architect and Construction Manager in performance of services. 2. Perform specified sampling and testing of products in accordance with specified standards. 3. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents. 4. Promptly notify Architect and Construction Manager of observed irregularities or non-conformance of Work or products. 5. Perform additional tests and inspections required by Architect. 6. Submit reports of all tests/inspections specified. B. Limits on Testing/Inspection Agency Authority: 1. Agency may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents. 2. Agency may not approve or accept any portion of the Work. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000-3 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 3. Agency may not assume any duties of Construction Manager. 4. Agency has no authority to stop the Work. C. Construction Manager Responsibilities: 1. Deliver to agency at designated location, adequate samples of materials proposed to be used that require testing, along with proposed mix designs. 2. Cooperate with laboratory personnel, and provide access to the Work and to manufacturers' facilities. 3. Provide incidental labor and facilities: a. To provide access to Work to be tested/inspected. b. To obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of Products to be tested/inspected. c. To facilitate tests/inspections. d. To provide storage and curing of test samples. 4. Notify Architect and laboratory 24 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring testing/inspection services. 5. Employ services of an independent qualified testing laboratory and pay for additional samples, tests, and inspections required by Construction Manager beyond specified requirements. 6. Arrange with the Testing Agency and pay for additional samples, tests, and inspections required by Contractor beyond specified requirements. D. Re -testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be performed by the same agency on instructions by Architect. E. Re -testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be paid for by If Construction Manager. F. Owner's Responsibilities: 1. Provide Payment for services of independent testing agency to I provide testing as specified or as directed by JHS Architects. 3.06 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES A. When specified in individual specification sections, require material or product suppliers or manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, start-up of equipment, test, adjust and balance of equipment as applicable, and to initiate instructions when necessary. B. Report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturers' written instructions. 3.06 DEFECT ASSESSMENT A. Replace Work or portions of the Work not conforming to specified requirements. B. If, in the opinion of the Architect, it is not practical to remove and replace the Work, the Architect will direct an appropriate remedy or adjust payment. END OF SECTION QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 4000-4 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 SECTION 01 5000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Temporary telecommunications services. B. Temporary telephone and facsimile service. C. Temporary sanitary facilities. D. Temporary Controls: Barriers, enclosures, and fencing. E. Security requirements. F. Vehicular access and parking. G. Waste removal facilities and services. 1.02 TEMPORARY UTILITIES A. Provide and pay for all electrical power, lighting, water, heating and cooling, and ventilation required for construction purposes. B. Use trigger -operated nozzles for water hoses, to avoid waste of water. 1.03 TELECOMMUNICATIONS SERVICES A. Provide, maintain, and pay for telecommunications services to field office at time of project mobilization. B. Telecommunications services shall include: C. Provide, maintain and pay for facsimile service to field office at time of project mobilization. 1.04 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES A. Provide and maintain required facilities and enclosures. Provide at time of project mobilization. 1. Provide a portable toilet unit within 180 feet of each building which is under construction. 2. Provide additional portable toilet unit if number of workers at a particular building area exceed 25 persons. B. Maintain daily in clean and sanitary condition. 1.05 BARRIERS A. Provide barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas, to prevent access to areas that could be hazardous to workers or the public, to allow for owner's use of site and to protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage from construction operations and demolition. B. Provide protection for plants designated to remain. Replace damaged plants. C. Protect non -owned vehicular traffic, stored materials, site, and structures from damage. 1.06 FENCING A. Construction: Construction Manager's option. 1. Provision of fencing is entirely the contractors decision as Contractor deems appropriate to protect his/her interests. 2. If fencing of the site is opted, Contractor shall provide chain link, plastic mesh, hog wire (6x6 mesh wire), or other approved material. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND 01 5000-1 CONTROLS Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 1.07 EXTERIOR ENCLOSURES 5/4/2017 A. Provide temporary insulated weather tight closure of exterior openings to accommodate acceptable working conditions and protection for Products, to allow for temporary heating and maintenance of required ambient temperatures identified in individual specification sections, and to prevent entry of unauthorized persons. Provide access doors with self-closing hardware and locks. 1.08 SECURITY A. Provide level of security deemed necessary to protect the interests of the Contractor at the option of the contractor. B. Take measures to protect the Work from unauthorized entry, vandalism, or theft. C. Coordinate with Owner's security program. 1.09 VEHICULAR ACCESS AND PARKING A. Coordinate access and haul routes with governing authorities and Owner. B. Provide and maintain access to fire hydrants, free of obstructions. C. Provide means of removing mud from vehicle wheels before entering streets. D. Provide temporary parking areas to accommodate construction personnel. When site space is not adequate, provide additional off-site parking. 1.10 WASTE REMOVAL A. Provide waste removal facilities and services as required to maintain the site in clean and orderly condition. B. Provide containers with lids. Remove trash from site periodically. C. If materials to be recycled or re -used on the project must be stored on-site, provide suitable non-combustible containers; locate containers holding flammable material outside the structure unless otherwise approved by the authorities having jurisdiction. 1.11 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION A. Provide project identification sign of design and construction indicated on Drawings. B. Erect on site at location established by Architect. 'r C. No other signs are allowed without Owner permission except those required bylaw. 1.12 FIELD OFFICES A. Office: Weathertight, with lighting, electrical outlets, heating, cooling and ventilating equipment, and equipped with sturdy furniture, drawing rackand drawing display table. i B. Provide space for Project meetings, with table and chairs to accommodate 6 persons. — C. Locate offices a minimum distance of 30 feet from existing and new structures. l 1.13 REMOVAL OF UTILITIES, FACILITIES, AND CONTROLS A. Remove temporary utilities, equipment, facilities, materials, prior to Date of Substantial Completion inspection. B. Remove underground installations to a minimum depth of 2 feet. Grade site as indicated. C. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work. D. Restore existing facilities used during construction to original condition. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND 01 5000-2 CONTROLS Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 PART PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND 01 5000-3 CONTROLS Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 SECTION 01 6000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. General product requirements. B. Transportation, handling, storage and protection. C. Product option requirements. D. Substitution limitations and procedures. E. Procedures for Owner -supplied products. F. Maintenance materials, including extra materials, spare parts, tools, and software. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data Submittals: Submit manufacturer's standard published data. Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement manufacturers' standard data to provide information specific to this Project. B. Shop Drawing Submittals: Prepared specifically for this Project; indicate utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances. C. Sample Submittals: Illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of the product, with integral parts and attachment devices. Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing work. 1. For selection from standard finishes, submit samples of the full range of the manufacturer's standard colors, textures, and patterns. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 NEW PRODUCTS A. Provide new products unless specifically required or permitted by the Contract Documents. 2.02 PRODUCT OPTIONS A. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Use any product meeting those standards or description. B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers: Use a product of one of the manufacturers named and meeting specifications, no options or substitutions allowed unless pre-bid approved as an EQUAL. C. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with a Provision for "OR EQUAL": Use any Product or Manufacturer which is fully equal to that specified and comply with all submittal requirements. 2.03 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials, spare parts, tools, and software of types and in quantities specified in individual specification sections. B. Deliver to Project site; obtain receipt prior to final payment. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000-1 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES A. Instructions to Bidders specify time restrictions for submitting requests for substitutions (requests for equals) during the bidding period. Comply with requirements specified in this section. B. Substitutions: Requests for changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction required by Contract Documents proposed by the Contractor after award of the Contract are considered requests for "substitutions". The following are not considered substitutions: 1. Substitutions requested during the bidding period, and accepted prior to award of contract are refered to as "requests for approval as Equals". 2. Revisions to Contract Documents requested by the Owner or Architect. 3. Specified options of products and construction methods included in Contract Documents. 4. Compliance with governing regulations and orders issued by governing authorities. C. Substitutions may be considered when a product becomes unavailable through no fault of the Construction Manager. D. A Contractors substitution request will be recieved and considered by JHS when one or more of the following conditions are satisfied, as determined by JHS; otherwise requests will be returned without action except to record noncompliance with these requirements. 1. Extensive revisions to Contract documents are not required. 2. Proposed charges are in keeping with the general intent of contract documents. 3. The request is not directly related to an "or equal' clause in the Contract Documents. 4. The request is timely, fully documented and properly submitted. 5. The specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time. The request will not be considered if the product or method cannot be provided as a result of failure to pursue the Work promptly or coordinate activities properly. 6. The specified product or method of construction cannot receive necessary approval by a governing authority, and the requested substitution can be approved. 7. A substantial advantage is offered the Owner, in terms of cost, time, energy conservation or other considerations of merit, after deducting offsetting responsibilities the Owner may be required to bear. Additional responsibilities for the Owner may include additional compensation to the Architect for redesign and evaluation sevices, increased cost of other construction by the Owner or separate contractors, and similar considerations. 8. The specified product or method of construction cannot be provided in a manner that is compatible with other materials, and where the Contractor certifies that the proposed substitution will overcome the incompatibility. 9. The specified product or method of construction cannot be coordinated with other materials, and where the Contractor certifies that the proposed substitution will overcome the incompatibility. 10. The specified product or method of construction cannot provide a warranty required by the contract documents, and where the Contractor certifies that the proposed substitution will provide the required warranty. E. A request for substitution constitutes a representation that the submitter: 1. Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality level of the specified product. 2. Agrees to provide the same warranty for the substitution as for the specified product. 3. Agrees to coordinate installation and make changes to other Work that may be required for the Work to be complete with no additional cost to Owner. 4. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension that may subsequently become apparent. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 6000-2 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 F. Substitution Submittal Procedure (after contract award): 1. Submit three copies of request for substitution for consideration. Limit each request to one proposed substitution. 2. Submit shop drawings, product data, and certified test results attesting to the proposed product equivalence. Burden of proof is on proposer. 3. Architect will notify Construction Manager in writing of decision to accept or reject request. 3.02 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING A. Package products for shipment in manner to prevent damage; for equipment, package to avoid loss of factory calibration. B. If special precautions are required, attach instructions prominently and legibly on outside of packaging. C. Coordinate schedule of product delivery to designated prepared areas in order to minimize site storage time and potential damage to stored materials. D. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. E. Transport materials in covered trucks to prevent contamination of product and littering of surrounding areas. F. Promptly inspect shipments to ensure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and products are undamaged. G. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage, and to minimize handling. H. Arrange for the return of packing materials, such as wood pallets, where economically feasible. 3.03 STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. Designate receiving/storage areas for incoming products so that they are delivered according to installation schedule and placed convenient to work area in order to minimize waste due to excessive materials handling and misapplication. B. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. C. Store with seals and labels intact and legible. D. Store sensitive products in weather tight, climate controlled, enclosures in an environment favorable to product. E. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports above ground. F. Provide bonded off-site storage and protection when site does not permit on-site storage or protection. G. Protect products from damage or deterioration due to construction operations, weather, precipitation, humidity, temperature, sunlight and ultraviolet light, dirt, dust, and other contaminants. H. Comply with manufacturer's warranty conditions, if any. I. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to prevent condensation and degradation of products. J. Prevent contact with material that may cause corrosion, discoloration, or staining. K. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. L. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to verify products are undamaged and are maintained in acceptable condition. END OF SECTION PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000-3 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 SECTION 01 6050 DIRECT PURCHASE ITEMS BY C.M. PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Single, specific items to be purchased and installed by Headwaters Construction, Construction Manager.. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturers data if required by the CM for verification of order and coordination of installation. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate shop drawings if requested by the CM or Architect. 1.03 WARRANTY A. See Section 01780 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Correct defective Work within a one year period after Date of Substantial Completion. C. Provide manufacturers standard warranty, if applicable, to the Owner for each specific item included in this Section. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ROOF ACCESS LADDERS A. Manufacturer: Nall & Company, Inc. 424 Harriet St. San Francisco, CA 94103 Phone: 415.865.9700 Phone: 877.495.5894 SteelAccess Ladde rs. com 1. Provide two (2) roof access ladders Model: S10 Access Ladder (Confirm length required prior to ordering.) Install with (6) 1/2" x 3" lag bolts 2x blocking in the stud wall. 2. Provide two (2) steel safety post (safety yellow). Model: SPY Install to top 2 rungs with clamps furnished by the manufacturer. 2.02 ROOF HATCHES A. Manufacturer: The Bilco Company 3400 Jim Granger Road Zanesville, OH 43701 704.455.9020 DIRECT PURCHASE ITEMS BY 01 6050-1 C. M. Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 B. Dealer: CANNON SALES. Inc 762 North 1250 West Centerville, Utah 84014 801.299.0800 brucepowell@cannonsales.com C. Provide two (2) roof top hatches. Model: Thermally Broken Roof Hatch; Type E -50T; 36" x 36'; Ladder Access. Install following manufacturer instructions and roofing contractor procedures. 2.03 BATH & TOILET ACCESSORIES A. Manufacturer & Items: See Schedules below unit enlarged Plan on Drawings A 3.1 & A 3.2 Install in each unit as located. 2.04 BIKE RACKS A. Manufacturer: Velodome Shelters 32 Ann Street Clifton New Jersey, 07013 www.velodomeshelters.com 888-995-8090 B. MaxRack Wall Bracket bike racks: 1. Provide two (2) four bike Wall Brackets at Elevator Equipment wall: Part# MRWB-4 Size (each): 66-1/2" x 20-1/4" width x 55-1/2" height 5/4/2017 C. Spacemaker bike rack. 1. Provide four (4) six bike racks made up of Part A and Part B: Part # SM-3-LHL Part A - four (4) each Part # SM-3-HLH Part B - four (4) each Size (each): 45" x 31-1/2" width x 34-1/2" height 2.05 INDIVIDUAL POSTAL MAILBOXES A. Manufacturer: 2B Global Inc. 895 Dove Street, Suite 300 Newport Beach, CA 92660 Direct Phone: 801.808.1118 General Line: 800.650.2606 1. Provide three (3) horizontal mailbox clustersequal to D20 to equal of 60 individual boxes. 2. Install Units in Furred Wall in Project Office. 2.06 GAS GRILL INSERT @ COMMON COURTYARD A. Stainless Steel Gas Grill Insert equal to built -In LEX 605 with infrared bottom and rear burners by Napoleon. 1. Manufacturer: Napoleon Grills, 214 Bayview Drive, Barrie, Ontario, Canada L4N4Y8, (866)820-8686. DIRECT PURCHASE ITEMS BY 016050-2 C.M. Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 2. Dealer: Alpine Heating & Air Conditioning, Inc 170 N Eastern Ave. Idaho Falls, ID 83402 3. On -Line: www.napoleongrills.com/buy-online PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION DIRECT PURCHASE ITEMS BY 016050-3 C.M. r Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 SECTION 01 7000 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Examination, preparation, and general installation procedures. B. Requirements for alterations work, including selective demolition, except removal, disposal, and/or remediation of hazardous materials and toxic substances. C. Pre -installation meetings. D. Cutting and patching. E. Surveying for laying out the work. F. Cleaning and protection. G. Starting of systems and equipment. H. Demonstration and instruction of Owner personnel. I. Closeout procedures, including Construction Manager's Correction Punch List, except payment procedures. J. General requirements for maintenance service. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Survey work: Submit name, address, and telephone number of Surveyor before starting survey work. 1. On request, submit documentation verifying accuracy of survey work. 2. Submit a copy of site drawing signed by the Land Surveyor, that the elevations and locations of the work are in conformance with Contract Documents. 3. Submit surveys and survey logs for the project record. C. Cutting and Patching: Submit written request in advance of cuffing or alteration that affects: 1. Structural integrity of any element of Project. 2. Integrity of weather exposed or moisture resistant element. 3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of any operational element. 4. Visual qualities of sight exposed elements. 1.03 QUALIFICATIONS A. For survey work employ a land surveyor registered in the State in which the Project is located and acceptable to Architect. 1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Grade site to drain. Maintain excavations free of water. Provide, operate, and maintain pumping equipment. B. Protect site from puddling or running water. Do not allow water to pool around foundations, footings, or within building area. Provide water barriers as required to protect site from soil erosion. C. Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases. EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT 017000-1 REQUIREMENTS Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 D. Dust Control: Execute work by methods to minimize raising dust from construction operations. Provide positive means to prevent air -borne dust from dispersing into atmosphere and over adjacent property. E. Erosion and Sediment Control: Plan and execute work by methods to control surface drainage from cuts and fills, from borrow and waste disposal areas. Prevent erosion and sedimentation. 1. Minimize amount of bare soil exposed at one time. 2. Periodically inspect earthwork to detect evidence of erosion and sedimentation; promptly apply corrective measures. F. Rodent Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent rodents from accessing or invading premises. 1.05 COORDINATION A. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and work of the various sections of the Project Manual to ensure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements, with provisions for accommodating items installed later. B. Notify affected utility companies and comply with their requirements. C. Verify that utility requirements and characteristics of new operating equipment are compatible with building utilities. Coordinate work of various sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment. D. Coordinate space requirements, supports, and installation of mechanical and electrical work that are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes, ducts, and conduit, as closely as practicable; place runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs. E. In finished areas except as otherwise indicated, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within the construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements. F. Coordinate completion and clean-up of Work of separate sections in preparation for Substantial Completion. G. After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site for correction of defective work and work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of Owner's activities. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 PATCHING MATERIALS A. New Materials: As specified in product sections; match existing products and work for patching and extending work. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that existing site conditions and substrate surfaces are acceptable for subsequent work. Start of work means acceptance of existing conditions. B. Verify that existing substrate is capable of structural support or attachment of new work being applied or attached. C. Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification sections. D. Take field measurements before confirming product orders or beginning fabrication, to minimize waste due to over -ordering or misfabrication. EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT 01 7000-2 REQUIREMENTS Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 E. Verify that utility services are available, of the correct characteristics, and in the correct locations. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance. B. Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance. C. Apply manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner prior to applying any new material or substance in contact or bond. 3.03 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. When required in individual specification sections, convene a preinstallation meeting at the site prior to commencing work of the section. B. Require attendance of parties directly affecting, or affected by, work of the specific section. C. Notify Architect four days in advance of meeting date. D. Prepare agenda and preside at meeting: 1. Review conditions of examination, preparation and installation procedures. 2. Review coordination with related work. E. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with two copies to Architect, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made. 3.04 LAYING OUT THE WORK A. Verify locations of survey control points prior to starting work. B. Promptly notify Architect of any discrepancies discovered. C. Construction Manager shall locate and protect survey control and reference points. D. Control datum for survey is that indicated on Drawings. E. Protect survey control points prior to starting site work; preserve permanent reference points during construction. F. Promptly report to Architect the loss or destruction of any reference point or relocation required because of changes in grades or other reasons. G. Replace dislocated survey control points based on original survey control. Make no changes without prior written notice to Architect. H. Utilize recognized engineering survey practices. I. Establish elevations, lines and levels. Locate and lay out by instrumentation and similar appropriate means: 1. Site improvements including pavements; stakes for grading, fill and topsoil placement; utility locations, slopes, and invert elevations. 2. Grid or axis for structures. 3. Building foundation, column locations, ground floor elevations. J. Periodically verify layouts by same means. 3.05 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Install products as specified in individual sections, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, and so as to avoid waste due to necessity for replacement. B. Make vertical elements plumb and horizontal elements level, unless otherwise indicated. C. Install equipment and fittings plumb and level, neatly aligned with adjacent vertical and horizontal lines, unless otherwise indicated. D. Make consistent texture on surfaces, with seamless transitions, unless otherwise indicated. E. Make neat transitions between different surfaces, maintaining texture and appearance. EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT 017000-3 REQUIREMENTS Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 3.06 ALTERATIONS A. Drawings showing existing construction and utilities are based on casual field observation and existing record documents only. 1. Verity that construction and utility arrangements are as shown. 2. Report discrepancies to Architect before disturbing existing installation. 3. Beginning of alterations work constitutes acceptance of existing conditions. B. Remove existing work as indicated and as required to accomplish new work. 1. Remove items indicated on drawings. 2. Relocate items indicated on drawings. 3. Where new surface finishes are to be applied to existing work, perform removals, patch, and prepare existing surfaces as required to receive new finish; remove existing finish if necessary for successful application of new finish. 4. Where new surface finishes are not specified or indicated, patch holes and damaged surfaces to match adjacent finished surfaces as closely as possible. C. Services (Including but not limited to HVAC, Plumbing, Fire Protection, Electrical, and Telecommunications): Remove, relocate, and extend existing systems to accommodate new construction. 1. Maintain existing active systems that are to remain in operation; maintain access to equipment and operational components; if necessary, modify installation to allow access or provide access panel. 2. Where existing systems or equipment are not active and Contract Documents require reactivation, put back into operational condition; repair supply, distribution, and equipment as required. 3. Where existing active systems serve occupied facilities but are to be replaced with new services, maintain existing systems in service until new systems are complete and ready for service. a. Disable existing systems only to make switchovers and connections; minimize duration of outages. b. Provide temporary connections as required to maintain existing systems in service. 4. Verify that abandoned services serve only abandoned facilities. 5. Remove abandoned pipe, ducts, conduits, and equipment, including those above accessible ceilings; remove back to source of supply where possible, otherwise cap stub and tag with identification; patch holes left by removal using materials specified for new construction. D. Protect existing work to remain. 1. Prevent movement of structure; provide shoring and bracing if necessary. 2. Perform cutting to accomplish removals neatly and as specified for cutting new work. 3. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during removal work. E. Adapt existing work to fit new work: Make as neat and smooth transition as possible. F. Patching: Where the existing surface is not indicated to be refinished, patch to match the surface finish that existed prior to cutting. Where the surface is indicated to be refinished, patch so that the substrate is ready for the new finish. G. Refinish existing surfaces as indicated: H. Where rooms or spaces are indicated to be refinished, refinish all visible existing surfaces to remain to the specified condition for each material, with a neat transition to adjacent finishes. I. If mechanical or electrical work is exposed accidentally during the work, re-cover and refinish to match. J. Clean existing systems and equipment. K. Remove demolition debris and abandoned items from alterations areas and dispose of off-site; do not burn or bury. L. Do not begin new construction in alterations areas before demolition is complete. EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT 01 7000-4 REQUIREMENTS Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 M. Comply with all other applicable requirements of this section. 3.07 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Whenever possible, execute the work by methods that avoid cutting or patching. B. Perform whatever cutting and patching is necessary to: 1. Complete the work. 2. Fit products together to integrate with other work. 3. Provide openings for penetration of mechanical, electrical, and other services. 4. Match work that has been cut to adjacent work. 5. Repair areas adjacent to cuts to required condition. 6. Repair new work damaged by subsequent work. 7. Remove samples of installed work for testing when requested. 8. Remove and replace defective and non -conforming work. C. Execute work by methods that avoid damage to other work and that will provide appropriate surfaces to receive patching and finishing. D. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. Pneumatic tools not allowed without prior approval. E. Restore work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. F. Fit work air tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces. G. Patching: 1. Finish patched surfaces to match finish that existed prior to patching. On continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection or natural break. For an assembly, refinish entire unit. 2. Match color, texture, and appearance. 3. Repair patched surfaces that are damaged, lifted, discolored, or showing other imperfections due to patching work. If defects are due to condition of substrate, repair substrate prior to repairing finish. 3.08 PROGRESS CLEANING A. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly condition. B. Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue cleaning to eliminate dust. C. Collect and remove waste materials, debris, and trash/rubbish from site weekly and dispose off-site; do not burn or bury. 3.09 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK A. Protect installed work from damage by construction operations. B. Provide special protection where specified in individual specification sections. C. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed products. Control activity in immediate work area to prevent damage. D. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffits of openings. E. Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or movement of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials. F. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If traffic or activity is necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material manufacturer. G. Prohibit traffic from landscaped areas. H. Remove protective coverings when no longer needed; reuse or recycle coverings if possible. EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT 017000-5 REQUIREMENTS Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 3.10 SYSTEM STARTUP A. Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems. B. Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive rotation, belt tension, control sequence, and for conditions that may cause damage. C. Verify tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by the equipment or system manufacturer. D. Verify that wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested. E. Execute start-up under supervision of applicable Construction Manager personnel and manufacturer's representative in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. F. Submit a written report that equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioning correctly. 3.11 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTION A. Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble -shooting, servicing, maintenance, and shutdown of each item of equipment at scheduled time, at equipment location. B. Provide a qualified person who is knowledgeable about the Project to perform demonstration and instruction of owner personnel. 3.12 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation. 3.13 FINAL CLEANING A. Use cleaning materials that are nonhazardous. B. Clean interior and exterior glass, surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains and foreign substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces, vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces. C. Remove all labels that are not permanent. Do not paint or otherwise cover fire test labels or nameplates on mechanical and electrical equipment. D. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition with cleaning materials appropriate to the surface and material being cleaned. E. Clean filters of operating equipment. F. Clean debris from roofs, overflow drains, area drains, and drainage systems. G. Clean site; sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces. H. Remove waste, surplus materials, trash/rubbish, and construction facilities from the site; dispose of in legal manner; do not burn or bury. 3.14 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES A. Make submittals that are required by governing or other authorities. B. Accompany Project Coordinator on preliminary inspection to determine items to be listed for completion or correction in the Construction Manager's Correction Punch List for Construction Manager's Notice of Substantial Completion. C. Notify Architect when work is considered ready for Architect's Substantial Completion inspection. D. Submit written certification containing Construction Manager's Correction Punch List, that Contract Documents have been reviewed, work has been inspected, and that work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for Architect's Substantial Completion inspection. E. Conduct Substantial Completion inspection and create Final Correction Punch List containing Architect's and Construction Manager's comprehensive list of items identified to be completed or corrected and submit to Architect. EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT 01 7000-6 REQUIREMENTS Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 F. Correct items of work listed in Final Correction Punch List and comply with requirements for access to Owner -occupied areas. G. Notify Architect when work is considered finally complete and ready for Architect's Substantial Completion final inspection. H. Complete items of work determined by Architect listed in executed Certificate of Substantial Completion. 3.15 MAINTENANCE A. Provide service and maintenance of components indicated in specification sections. B. Maintenance Period: As indicated in specification sections or, if not indicated, not less than one year from the Date of Substantial Completion or the length of the specified warranty, whichever is longer. C. Examine system components at a frequency consistent with reliable operation. Clean, adjust, and lubricate as required. D. Include systematic examination, adjustment, and lubrication of components. Repair or replace parts whenever required. Use parts produced by the manufacturer of the original component. E. Maintenance service shall not be assigned or transferred to any agent or subcontractor without prior written consent of the Owner. END OF SECTION EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT 01 7000-7 REQUIREMENTS Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 SECTION 01 7800 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Project Record Documents. B. Operation and Maintenance Data. C. Warranties and bonds. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements: Submittals procedures, shop drawings, product data, and samples. B. Individual Product Sections: Specific requirements for operation and maintenance data. C. Individual Product Sections: Warranties required for specific products or Work. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents: Submit documents to Architect with claim for final Application for Payment. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: 1. Submit two copies of preliminary draft or proposed formats and outlines of contents before start of Work. Architect will review draft and return one copy with comments. 2. For equipment, or component parts of equipment put into service during construction and operated by Owner, submit completed documents within ten days after acceptance. 3. Submit one copy of completed documents 15 days prior to final inspection. This copy will be reviewed and returned after final inspection, with Architect comments. Revise content of all document sets as required prior to final submission. 4. Submit two sets of revised final documents in final form within 10 days after final inspection. C. Warranties and Bonds: 1. For equipment or component parts of equipment put into service during construction with Owner's permission, submit documents within 10 days after acceptance. 2. Make other submittals within 10 days after Date of Substantial Completion, prior to final Application for Payment. 3. For items of Work for which acceptance is delayed beyond Date of Substantial Completion, submit within 10 days after acceptance, listing the date of acceptance as the beginning of the warranty period. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Maintain on site one set of the following record documents; record actual revisions to the Work: 1. Drawings. 2. Addenda. 3. Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract. CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 01 7800-1 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 B. Ensure entries are complete and accurate, enabling future reference by Owner. C. Store record documents separate from documents used for construction. D. Record information concurrent with construction progress. E. Record Drawings : Legibly mark each item to record actual construction including: 1. Field changes of dimension and detail. 2. Details not on original Contract drawings. 3.02 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Source Data: For each product or system, list names, addresses and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers, including local source of supplies and replacement parts. B. Product Data: Mark each sheet to clearly identify specific products and component parts, and data applicable to installation. Delete inapplicable information. C. Drawings: Supplement product data to illustrate relations of component parts of equipment and systems, to show control and flow diagrams. Do not use Project Record Documents as maintenance drawings. D. Typed Text: As required to supplement product data. Provide logical sequence of instructions for each procedure, incorporating manufacturer's instructions. 3.03 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES A. For Each Product, Applied Material, and Finish: B. Instructions for Care and Maintenance: Manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning agents and methods, precautions against detrimental cleaning agents and methods, and recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance. C. Where additional instructions are required, beyond the manufacturer's standard printed instructions, have instructions prepared by personnel experienced in the operation and maintenance of the specific products. 3.04 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS A. For Each Item of Equipment and Each System: 1. Description of unit or system, and component parts. 2. Identify function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. 3. Include performance curves, with engineering data and tests. 4. Complete nomenclature and model number of replaceable parts. B. Where additional instructions are required, beyond the manufacturer's standard printed instructions, have instructions prepared by personnel experienced in the operation and maintenance of the specific products. C. Operating Procedures: Include start-up, break-in, and routine normal operating instructions and sequences. Include regulation, control, stopping, shut -down, and emergency instructions. Include summer, winter, and any special operating instructions. D. Maintenance Requirements: Include routine procedures and guide for preventative maintenance and trouble shooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly instructions; and alignment, adjusting, balancing, and checking instructions. E. Provide servicing and lubrication schedule, and list of lubricants required. F. Include manufacturer's printed operation and maintenance instructions. G. Include sequence of operation by controls manufacturer. H. Provide original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and diagrams required for maintenance. I. Additional Requirements: As specified in individual product specification sections. CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 01 7800-2 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 3.06 ASSEMBLY OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Assemble operation and maintenance data into durable manuals for Owner's personnel use, with data arranged in the same sequence as, and identified by, the specification sections. B. Where systems involve more than one specification section, provide separate tabbed divider for each system. C. Binders: Commercial quality, 8-1/2 by 11 inch three D side ring binders with durable plastic covers; 2 inch maximum ring size. When multiple binders are used, correlate data into related consistent groupings. D. Cover: Identify each binder with typed or printed title OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS; identify title of Project; identify subject matter of contents. E. Project Directory: Title and address of Project; names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Architect, Consultants, Construction Managerand subcontractors, with names of responsible parties. F. Tables of Contents: List every item separated by a divider, using the same identification as on the divider tab; where multiple volumes are required, include all volumes Tables of Contents in each volume, with the current volume clearly identified. G. Dividers: Provide tabbed dividers for each separate product and system; identify the contents on the divider tab; immediately following the divider tab include a description of product and major component parts of equipment. H. Text: Manufacturer's printed data, or typewritten data on 20 pound paper. I. Drawings: Provide with reinforced punched binder tab. Bind in with text; fold larger drawings to size of text pages. J. Arrangement of Contents: Organize each volume in parts as follows: 1. Project Directory. 2. Table of Contents, of all volumes, and of this volume. 3. Operation and Maintenance Data: Arranged by system, then by product category. a. Source data. b. Operation and maintenance data. c. Field quality control data. d. Photocopies of warranties and bonds. 4. Design Data: To allow for addition of design data furnished by Architect or others, provide a tab labeled "Design Data" and provide a binder large enough to allow for insertion of at least 20 pages of typed text. 3.06 WARRANTIES AND BONDS A. Obtain warranties and bonds, executed in duplicate by responsible Subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers, within 10 days after completion of the applicable item of work. Except for items put into use with Owner's permission, leave date of beginning of time of warranty until Date of Substantial completion is determined. B. Verify that documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized. C. Co -execute submittals when required. D. Retain warranties and bonds until time specified for submittal. CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 017800-3 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/1/2017 SECTION 03 3000 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Concrete formwork. B. Concrete footings. C. Concrete foundation walls and footing. D. Floors and slabs on grade. E. Control joints on Floor slabs and exterior flatwork. F. Vapor Retarder below slab. G. Concrete reinforcement. H. Exterior Flatwork as shown on Architectural or Structural drawings. I. Joint devices associated with concrete work. J. Miscellaneous concrete elements, including equipment pads. K. Concrete curing. L. Specification on Structural Drawings S 0.1 & S 0.2 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 079005 Joint Sealants: Products and installation for sealants for saw cut joints and isolation joints in slabs. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete; 2010 (Errata 2012). B. ACI 302.1 R - Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction; 2004 (Errata 2007). C. ACI 304R - Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete; 2000. D. ACI 305R - Hot Weather Concreting; 2010. E. ACI 306R - Cold Weather Concreting; 2010. F. ACI 308R - Guide to Curing Concrete; 2001 (Reapproved 2008). G. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; 2011. H. ACI 347R - Guide to Formwork for Concrete; 2014. I. ASTM A185/A185M - Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for Concrete; 2007. J. ASTM A1064/A1064M - Standard Specification for Carbon -Steel Wire and Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed, for Concrete; 2015. K. ASTM C33/C33M - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates; 2013. L. ASTM C39/C39M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens; 2015a. CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-1 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/11/2017 M. ASTM C94/C94M - Standard Specification for Ready -Mixed Concrete; 2015. N. ASTM C309 - Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane -Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete; 2011. O. ASTM C494/C494M - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete; 2013. P. ASTM E1643 - Standard Practice for Selection, Design, Installation and Inspection of Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs; 2011. Q. ASTM E1745 - Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Soil or Granular Fill under Concrete Slabs; 2011. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturers' data on manufactured products showing compliance with specified requirements and installation instructions. 1. For curing compounds, provide data on method of removal in the event of incompatibility with floor covering adhesives. C. Design Mixes for review and approval. D. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing, and supports for concrete reinforcement. E. Samples: Submit samples of underslab vapor retarder to be used. F. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of embedded utilities and components that will be concealed from view upon completion of concrete work. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work of this section in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 318. 1. Maintain one copy of each document on site. B. Follow recommendations of ACI 305R when concreting during hot weather. C. Follow recommendations of ACI 306R when concreting during cold weather. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FORMWORK A. Form Materials: Construction Manager's choice of standard products with sufficient strength to withstand hydrostatic head without distortion in excess of permitted tolerances. 1. Form Facing for Exposed Finish Concrete: Construction Manager's choice of materials that will provide smooth, stain -free final appearance. 2. Form Coating: Release agent that will not adversely affect concrete or interfere with application of coatings. 3. Form Ties: Cone snap type that will leave no metal within 1-1/2 inches of concrete surface. 2.02 REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 60 (60,000 psi). 1. Type: Deformed billet -steel bars. 2. Finish: Unfinished, unless otherwise indicated. B. Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, plain type. C. Reinforcement Accessories: 1. Tie Wire: Annealed, minimum 16 gage, 0.0508 inch. CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-2 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/1/2017 2. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers: Sized and shaped for adequate support of reinforcement during concrete placement. 3. Provide stainless steel, galvanized, plastic, or plastic coated steel components for placement within 1-1/2 inches of weathering surfaces. 2.03 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cement: ASTM C1501C150M, Type I - Normal Portland type. 1. Acquire all cement for entire project from same source. B. Fine and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C 33. 1. Acquire all aggregates for entire project from same source. C. Fly Ash: ASTM C618, Class C or F. D. Calcined Pozzolan: ASTM C618, Class N. E. Water: Clean and not detrimental to concrete. 2.04 ADMIXTURES A. Do not use chemicals that will result in soluble chloride ions in excess of 0.1 percent by weight of cement. B. Air Entrainment Admixture: ASTM C260/C260M. C. Water Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M Type D. 2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Slab edge expansion joints: Polyroam # PF -H50, 6 inch x 1/2" with a pre -scored, removable top piece for slab to wall sealant application. Product by Superior Profiles or equal. B. Cold or Construction Joints: Keyway # 21 -KW- 10, re -usable polyethylene keyway strip. Product by Superior Profiles or equal. C. Control Joints: Zipstrip # 21-1 1/2 x 10, rigid polystyrene "T" shaped strip for forming straight control joints from wall to wall. After initial set, remove horizontal portion of the "T" and tool edges for sealant application. Product by Superior Profiles or equal. D. For uses not otherwise indicated: Expansion- and Isolation -Joint -Filler Strips: ASTM 0 175 1 , asphalt -saturated cellulosic fiber. Construct isolation joints in slabs -on -grade at points of contact between slabs -on -grade and vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations as indicated. E. Backer Rod: Closed Cell Backer Rod to for a non-absorbent compressible backup for sealant joint backup. Sizes 1/4" to 4" as required. Product by Superior Profiles or equal. F. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type II, non-redispersable, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene. G. Underslab Vapor Retarder: Multi -layer, fabric-, cord-, grid-, or aluminum -reinforced polyethylene or equivalent, complying with ASTM E1745, Class A; stated by manufacturer as suitable for installation in contact with soil or granular fill under concrete slabs. The use of single ply polyethylene is prohibited. 1. Installation: Complywith ASTM E1643. 2. Accessory Products: Vapor retarder manufacturer's recommended tape, adhesive, mastic, prefabricated boots, etc., for sealing seams and penetrations in vapor retarder. 3. Manufacturers: a. Fortifiber Building Systems Group; Moistop Ultra 15: www.fortifiber.com/sle. b. Insulation Solutions, Inc; Viper VaporCheck II 15 -mil (Class A): www.insulationsolutions.com. c. W.R. Meadows, Inc.; PERMINATOR Class A - 15 mils: www.wrmeadows.com/sle. 2.06 FORM MATERIALS A. Form Materials: At the discretion of the Construction Manager. CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-3 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/1/2017 2.07 FORMWORK ACCESSORIES i A. Form Ties: Snap -off type, galvanized metal, fixed length, cone type, with waterproofing washer, 1.5 inch back break dimension, free of defects that could leave holes larger than 1 inch in concrete surface. F B. Form Release Agent: Capable of releasing forms from hardened concrete without staining or discoloring concrete or forming bugholes and other surface defects, compatible with concrete and form materials, and not requiring removal for satisfactory bonding of coatings to be applied. 1. Composition: Colorless reactive, mineral oil-based, soy -based, or vegetable -oil based compound. 2. Do not use materials containing diesel oil or petroleum-based compounds. C. Filler Strips for Chamfered Corners: Rigid plastic type; 1 by 1 inch size; maximum possible lengths. 2.08 REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 60 (60,000 psi). 1. Deformed billet -steel bars. 2. Unfinished. B. Stirrup Steel: ASTM Al064/A1064M steel wire, unfinished. C. Reinforcement Accessories: 1. Tie Wire: Annealed, minimum 16 gage, 0.0508 inch. 2. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers: Sized and shaped for adequate support of reinforcement during concrete placement. 3. Provide stainless steel components for placement within 1-1/2 inches of weathering surfaces. 2.09 REPAIR MATERIALS A. Repair Underlayment: Cement -based, polymer -modified, self -leveling product that can be \. applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations. 1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 2 19. 2. Primer: Product of underlayment manuf. recommended for substrate, conditions, and application. 3. Aggregate: Well -graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand per manufacturer. 4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 4 100 psi at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M. 2.10 BONDING AND JOINTING PRODUCTS A. Latex Bonding Agent: Non-redispersable acrylic latex, complying with ASTM C1059/C1059M, Type II. 1. Manufacturers: a. W.R. Meadows, Inc.; ACRY-LOK-: www.wrmeadows.com/sle. B. Slab Isolation Joint Filler: 1/2 inch thick, height equal to slab thickness, with removable top section that will form 1/2 Inch deep sealant pocket after removal. C. Slab Construction Joint Devices: Combination keyed joint form and screed, galvanized steel, with minimum 1 inch diameter holes for conduit or rebars to pass through at 6 inches on center; ribbed steel stakes for setting. 2.11 CURING MATERIALS A. Curing Compound, Non -dissipating: Liquid, membrane -forming, clear, non -yellowing acrylic; complying with ASTM C309. 1. Application: Use at all slabs; inside & exterior. 2. Vehicle: Water-based. 3. Gloss: High. CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-4 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/1/2017 4. Solids by Mass: 18 percent, minimum. 5. VOC Content: OTC compliant. 6. Manufacturers: a. BRICKFORM; BRICKFORM Gem Cure and Seal 309 - 100 VOC: www.brickform.com/sle. b. Dayton Superior Corporation; Cure & Seal 30% J23UV: www.daytonsuperior.com. c. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc., a subsidiary of Laticrete International, Inc.; Dress & Seal: www.Imcc.com. d. The QUIKRETE Companies; QUIKRETE® Acrylic Concrete Cure & Seal: www.quikrete.com. e. SpecChem, LLC; Cure and Seal WB: www.specchemllc.com/sle. 2.12 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN A. Proportioning Normal Weight Concrete: Comply with ACI 211.1 recommendations. 1. Replace as much Portland cement as possible with fly ash, ground granulated blast furnace slag, silica fume, or rice hull ash as is consistent with ACI recommendations. B. Concrete Strength: Establish required average strength for each type of concrete on the basis of field experience or trial mixtures, as specified in ACI 301. 1. For trial mixtures method, employ independent testing agency acceptable to Architect for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs. C. Admixtures: Add acceptable admixtures as recommended in ACI 211.1 and at rates recommended or required by manufacturer. D. Normal Weight Concrete: 1. Compressive Strength, when tested in accordance with ASTM C39/C39M at 28 days: 4,000 pounds per square inch at Footings & Slabs: 4500 pounds per square inch at Walls, exterior Balcony Walkways and Exterior flatwork. 2. Fly Ash Content: Maximum 15 percent of cementitious materials by weight. 3. Calcined Pozzolan Content: Maximum 10 percent of cementitious materials by weight. 4. Cement Content: Minimum 504 lb per cubic yard. 5. Water -Cement Ratio: Maximum 45 percent by weight. 6. Total Air Content: 3 percent, determined in accordance with ASTM C173/C173M. 7. Maximum Slump: 4 inches. 8. Maximum Aggregate Size: 5/8 inch. 2.13 MIXING A. Transit Mixers: Comply with ASTM C94/C94M. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify lines, levels, and dimensions before proceeding with work of this section. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Verify that forms are clean and free of rust before applying release agent. B. Coordinate placement of embedded items with erection of concrete formwork and placement of form accessories. C. Where new concrete is to be bonded to previously placed concrete, prepare existing surface by cleaning with steel brush and applying bonding agent in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1. Use latex bonding agent only for non -load-bearing applications. CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-5 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/1/2017 D. Where new concrete with integral waterproofing is to be bonded to previously placed concrete, prepare surfaces to be treated in accordance with waterproofing manufacturer's instructions, Saturate cold joint surface with clean water, and remove excess water before application of coat of waterproofing admixture slurry. Apply slurry coat uniformly with semi -stiff bristle brush at rate recommended bywaterproofing manufacturer. E. In locations where new concrete is doweled to existing work, drill holes in existing concrete, insert steel dowels and pack solid with non -shrink grout. F. Interior Slabs on Grade: Install vapor retarder under interior slabs on grade. Lap joints minimum 6 inches. Seal joints, seams and penetrations watertight with manufacturer's recommended products and follow manufacturer's written instructions. Repair damaged vapor retarder before covering. 3.03 ERECTION - FORMWORK A. Erect formwork, shoring and bracing to achieve design requirements, in accordance with requirements of ACI 301. B. Provide bracing to ensure stability of formwork. Shore or strengthen formwork subject to overstressing by construction loads. C. Arrange and assemble formwork to permit dismantling and stripping. Do not damage concrete during stripping. Permit removal of remaining principal shores. D. Align joints and make watertight. Keep form joints to a minimum. E. Obtain approval before framing openings in structural members that are not indicated on drawings. F. Install void forms in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Protect forms from moisture or crushing. G. Coordinate this section with other sections of work that require attachment of components to t formwork. \. H. If formwork is placed after reinforcement, resulting in insufficient concrete cover over reinforcement, request instructions from Architect before proceeding. 3.04 FORMWORK ACCESSORIES A. Form Ties: Removable type, galvanized metal, fixed length, cone type, with waterproofing washer, 1.25 inch back break dimension, free of defects that could leave holes larger than 1 inch in concrete surface. B. Form Release Agent: Capable of releasing forms from hardened concrete without staining or discoloring concrete or forming bugholes and other surface defects, compatible with concrete and form materials, and not requiring removal for satisfactory bonding of coatings to be applied. 1. Composition: Colorless reactive, mineral oil-based, soy -based, or vegetable -oil based compound. 2. Do not use materials containing diesel oil or petroleum-based compounds. 3. VOC Content: In compliance with applicable local, State, and federal regulations. C. Filler Strips for Chamfered Corners: Rigid plastic type; 1 by 1 inch size; maximum possible lengths. 3.05 INSTALLING REINFORCEMENT AND OTHER EMBEDDED ITEMS A. Comply with requirements of ACI 301. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, and accurately position, support, and secure in place to achieve not less than minimum concrete coverage required for protection. B. Install welded wire reinforcement in maximum possible lengths, and offset end laps in both directions. Splice laps with tie wire. C. Verify that anchors, seats, plates, reinforcement and other items to be cast into concrete are accurately placed, positioned securely, and will not interfere with concrete placement. CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-6 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/1/2017 3.06 REINFORCEMENT PLACEMENT A. Place, support and secure reinforcement against displacement. Do not deviate from required position. B. Do not displace or damage vapor barrier. C. Accommodate placement of formed openings. D. Maintain concrete cover around reinforcing as follows: 1. Walls (exposed to weather or backfill): 1.5 inch. 2. Footings and Concrete Formed Against Earth: 3 inch. 3. Slabs on Fill: 1.5 inch. E. Conform to applicable code for concrete cover over reinforcement. 3.07 PLACING CONCRETE A. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 304R. B. Place concrete for floor slabs in accordance with ACI 302.1 R. C. Install under slab Vapor Barrier below all floors on grade. D. Notify Architect not less than 24 hours prior to commencement of placement operations. E. Maintain records of concrete placement. Record date, location, quantity, air temperature, and test samples taken. F. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts, and formed construction joint devices will not be disturbed during concrete placement. G. Place concrete continuously without construction (cold) joints wherever possible; where construction joints are necessary, before next placement prepare joint surface by removing laitance and exposing the sand and sound surface mortar, by sandblasting or high-pressure water jetting. H. Finish floors level and flat, unless otherwise indicated, within the tolerances specified below. 3.08 SLAB JOINTING A. Locate joints as indicated on the drawings. B. Anchor joint fillers and devices to prevent movement during concrete placement. C. Isolation Joints: Use preformed joint filler with removable top section for joint sealant, total height equal to thickness of slab, set flush with top of slab. D. Construction Joints: Where not otherwise indicated, use metal combination screed and key form, with removable top section for joint sealant. 3.09 FLOOR FLATNESS AND LEVELNESS TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation of Surface Flatness: 1. Exposed Concrete Floors: 1/4 inch in 10 feet. 2. Under Seamless Resilient Flooring: 1/4 inch in 10 feet. 3. Under Carpeting: 1/4 inch in 10 feet. B. Correct the slab surface If tolerances are less than specified. C. Correct defects by grinding or by removal and replacement of the defective work. Areas requiring corrective work will be identified. Re -measure corrected areas by the same process. CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-7 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/1/2017 3.10 CONCRETE FINISHING A. Repair surface defects, immediately after removing formwork. B. Unexposed Form Finish: Rub down or chip off fins or other raised areas 1/4 inch or more in height. C. Exposed Form Finish: Rub down or chip off and smooth fins or other raised areas 1/4 inch or more in height. Provide finish as follows: 1. Smooth Rubbed Finish: Wet concrete and rub with carborundum brick or other abrasive, not more than 24 hours after form removal. D. Concrete Slabs: Finish to requirements of ACI 302.1 R, and as follows: 1. Surfaces to Receive Thick Floor Coverings: "Wood float" as described in ACI 302.1 R; thick floor coverings include ceramic tile with full bed setting system. 2. Surfaces to Receive Thin Floor Coverings: "Steel trowel" as described in ACI 302.1 R; thin floor coverings include resilient flooring and thin set ceramic tile. 3. Other Surfaces to Be Left Exposed: Trowel as described in ACI 302.1 R, minimizing burnish marks and other appearance defects. E. In areas with floor drains, maintain floor elevation at walls; pitch surfaces uniformly to drains at 1:100 nominal. 3.11 CURING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with requirements of ACI 308R. Immediately after placement, protect concrete from premature drying, excessively hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury. B. Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for period necessary for hydration of cement and hardening of concrete. 1. Normal concrete: Not less than 7 days. C. Formed Surfaces: Cure by moist curing with forms in place for full curing period. { j D. Surfaces Not in Contact with Forms: 1. Slabs and Floors To Receive Adhesive -Applied Flooring: Curing compounds and other surface coatings are usually considered unacceptable by flooring and adhesive manufacturers. If such materials must be used, either obtain the approval of the flooring and adhesive manufacturers prior to use or remove the surface coating after curing to flooring manufacturer's satisfaction. 2. Initial Curing: Start as soon as free water has disappeared and before surface is dry. Keep continuously moist for not less than three days by water ponding, water -saturated sand, water -fog spray, or saturated burlap. a. Ponding: Maintain 100 percent coverage of water over floor slab areas, continuously for 4 days. b. Spraying: Spray water over floor slab areas and maintain wet. c. Saturated Burlap: Saturate burlap -polyethylene and place burlap -side down over floor slab areas, lapping ends and sides; maintain in place. 3. Final Curing: Begin after initial curing but before surface is dry. a. Moisture -Retaining Sheet: Lap strips not less than 3 inches and seal with waterproof tape or adhesive; secure at edges. b. Curing Compound: Apply in two coats at right angles, using application rate recommended by manufacturer. CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-8 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/1/2017 3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements. B. Provide free access to concrete operations at project site and cooperate with appointed firm. C. Submit proposed mix design of each class of concrete to inspection and testing firm for review prior to commencement of concrete operations. D. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C39IC39M. For each test, mold and cure three concrete test cylinders. Obtain test samples for every 100 cubic yards or less of each class of concrete placed. E. Take one additional test cylinder during cold weather concreting, cured on job site under same conditions as concrete it represents. 3.13 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE A. Test Results: The testing agency shall report test results in writing to Architect and Construction Manager within 24 hours of test. B. Defective Concrete: Concrete not conforming to required lines, details, dimensions, tolerances or specified requirements. C. Repair or replacement of defective concrete will be determined by the Architect. The cost of additional testing shall be borne by Construction Manager when defective concrete is identified. D. Do not patch, fill, touch-up, repair, or replace exposed concrete except upon express direction of Architect for each individual area. 3.14 PROTECTION A. Do not permit traffic over unprotected concrete floor surface until fully cured. END OF SECTION CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-9 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 4/19/2017 SECTION 03 5400 GYPSUM CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit Gyp -Crete 2000/3.2K sales sheet, Acousti-Mat Ultimate Sound Control Systems, Procedures for Attaching Finished Floor Goods to Maxxon Underlayments, and Maxxon's Building Conditions Guide with project materials clearly identified for each required product or system. B. UL Directory Fire Resistance Volume 1 - Rating Underwriters Laboratory File Number a. 1 Hr Fire Rating L589 C. Acoustical Data: Submit sound tests according to IBC code criteria ASTM E492 (IIC) and ASTM E90 (STC) or ASTM El 007 (F-IIC) and E336 (F -11C). D. Code Approvals: See www.maxxon.com <http://www.maxxon.com> for the current list of code approvals. 1.02 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS A. Performance Requirements: 1. Gyp -Crete 2000/3.2K Floor Underlayment (Always a "Green" building material) a. Compressive strength 2,000 to 3,200 psi (14 to 22 MPa) b. Density 115 pounds per cubic foot (1,840 kg/m3) 2. Sound Control — 2009 International Building Code: Section 1207.2 &.3 a. Minimum Sound Transmission Class, 50 STC (45 if field tested) — Section 1207.2 ASTM E90 and E336 b. Minimum Impact Insulation Class, 50 IIC (45 if field tested)—Section 1207.3 c. ASTM E492 and E1007 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Performance Standards: 1. All materials, unless otherwise indicated, shall be manufactured by Maxxon Corporation and shall be installed in accordance with its current printed directions and by a Maxxon Corporation Authorized Applicator. 2. Underlayment mix shall be tested for a slump using a 2" (i.d.) x 4" (50 mm x 101 mm) cylinder resulting in a patty size of 8 1/2" (216 mm) plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm) diameter. 3. Compressive strength tested in accordance with ASTM C 472M. PART 2GENERAL 2.01 PRODUCTS AND MANUFACTURERS A. MANUFACTURER: MAXXON CORPORATION, HAMEL, MN. TELEPHONE: (800) 356-7887 1. Proprietary products/systems: Poured flooring underlayment and topping products, including the following: Gyp -Crete 2000I3.21K Floor Underlayment GYPSUM CEMENT 035400-1 UNDERLAYMENT Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 4/19/2017 E 2.02 MATERIALS A. Gyp -Crete: 2000/3.2K Floor Underlayment B. Floor Primer: Material Standard: Comply with specifications outlined in manufacturer's Design and Installation Guide for wood. C. Mix Water: Material Standard: Potable, free from impurities and from a domestic source. D. Material Standard: Potable, free from impurities and from a domestic source. E. Sand Aggregate: Sand shall meet Maxxon Sand Specification 101. F. MAXXON® Overspray Primer Sealer: Seal all areas that receive glue down floor goods with Maxxon® Overspray according to manufacturer's specifications. G. MAXXON® Acrylic Primer Sealer (ALTERNATE TO OVERSPRAY): Seal all areas that receive glue down floor goods with Maxxon® Acrylic according to manufacturer's specifications. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Site Verification of Conditions: 1. Installation shall not begin until the building is enclosed, including roof, windows, doors, and any other apertures. 2. Wood substrate shall be structurally sound, properly fastened, and dry. Contractor shall clean subfloor to remove mud, oil, grease, and other contaminating factors before arrival of the authorized applicator. 3. Wood substrate: a. The wood subfloor must be adequate to withstand live and dead loads with a deflection limitation of L/360. 1) Wood should be agency approved 23/32"(1.8 cm) T & G subfloor sheathing. 3.02 PREPARATION REQUIREMENTS A. Leak Prevention: 1. Fill cracks and voids in subfloor where leakage of slurry could occur. 2. Priming subfloor: a. Prime substrate according to manufacturer's recommendations. 3. Application: a. Install in accordance with reference standards and manufacturer's instructions. 3.03 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Mixing Proportions: 1. General Requirements: Mix proportions and methods shall be in strict accordance with product manufacturer recommendations. 2. Application: a. Pour floor topping to recommended thickness. Immediately spread and screed product to a smooth surface. Expansion joints in all types of work shall be brought through the underlayment. 1) Minimum Maxxon Underlayment Depth: 1" 3. Drying: The General Contractor shall maintain correct environmental conditions to keep the building clean and dry, and protect against infestation of moisture from a variety of potential suources. a. The General Contractor must supply mechanical ventilation, and heat if necessary, to remove moisture from the area until the Gyp -Crete is dry. b. During construction, place temporary wood planking over Gyp -Crete wherever it will be subject to heavy wheeled or concentrated loads. GYPSUM CEMENT 035400-2 UNDERLAYMENT Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 4/19/2017 3.04 PREPARATION FOR INSTALLATION OF GLUE DOWN FLOOR GOODS A. Sealing: 1. Seal all areas that receive glue down floor goods with Maxxon Overspray or Maxxon Acrylic according to the Maxxon Corporation's specifications. Any floor areas where the surface has been damaged shall be cleaned and sealed regardless of floor covering to be used. Where floor goods manufacturers require special adhesive or installation systems, their requirements supersede these recommendations. 2. Maxxon UWR can be used over Maxxon underlayments in low traffic areas such as utility rooms, storage rooms and closets, as a protective surface. 3. Moisture Testing: a. Follow the respective floor goods manufacturers' recommendations for relative humidity requirements. When manufacturer does not have a relative humidity requirement, refer to Maxxon's Procedures for Attaching Finished Floor Goods to Maxxon Underlayments brochure. 4. Finished Floor Goods: a. There are many reference standards for the installation procedures and recommendations for finished flooring applications over gypsum underlayments. These include instructions of the manufacturers of the finished flooring, adhesives and thin -set as well as national agency reference standards. The national standards are listed below: B. Flooring Type Reference Standard C. Resilient ASTM F2419 D. Ceramic Tile TCNA F180 E. NWFA Instructions 1. See Maxxon Corporation's Procedures for Attaching Finished Floor Goods to Maxxon Underlayments brochure for guidelines for installing finished floor goods. This procedure is not a warranty and is to be used as a guideline only. END OF SECTION GYPSUM CEMENT 035400-3 UNDERLAYMENT Student Housing BVII, LLC PART1 GENERAL JHS 1619 :y:101Eel Kill rr r UNIT MASONRY 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Concrete Block for Elevator Shafts, Equipment Rm. and Storage Rm. B. Split Face (with intergal color) Concrete Block for trash enclosre. C. Common Brick. D. Brick base around Grill station located at the common Courtyard. E. Reinforcement and Anchorage: Brick -tie plates and fasteners prior to laying brick. F. Flashings. G. Lintels. H. Accessories. I. Structural Specs on Drawing S 0.1 or S 0.2 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 05 5000 - Metal Fabrications: Loose steel lintels. B. Section 07 9000 - Joint Sealants: Sealing control and expansion joints. 5/4/2017 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data for masonry units. C. Samples: Submit four samples of facing brick units to illustrate color, texture, and extremes of color range. D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that masonry units meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with provisions of ACI 530/530.1/ERTA, except where exceeded by requirements of the contract documents. 1.05 MOCK-UP A. Construct a masonry wall as a mock-up panel sized 8 feet long by 6 feet high; include mortar, accessories, structural backup, and flashings (with lap joint, corner, and end dam) in mock-up. B. Locate where directed. C. Mock-up may remain as part of the Work. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, handle, and store masonry units by means that will prevent mechanical damage and contamination by other materials. 1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to minimum 40 degrees F prior to, during, and 48 hours after completion of masonry work. B. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to maximum 90 degrees F prior to, during, and 48 hours after completion of masonry work. UNIT MASONRY 042000-1 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A. Concrete Block: Comply with referenced standards and as follows: 1. Size: Standard units with nominal face dimensions of 16 by 8 inches and nominal depth of 8 inches. 2. Load -Bearing Units: ASTM C90, medium weight. a. Hollow block, as indicated. b. Type I - Moisture -controlled; medium weight. c. Exposed Faces: Manufacturer's standard color and texture where indicated. 1) Colors: 1 color to be selected from manufacturers standard colors & textures. 2) Exposed Face of CMU: (a) Split Face Block with integral color 1, as selected. d. Pattern: Split Face ( no ribbing or honing). 2.02 BRICK UNITS A. Building (Common) Brick: ASTM C62, Grade SW; solid units. 1. Actual size: Modular Brick. 2. Color and texture: To be selected from Manufacturer's standard offerrings. 2.03 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS A. Masonry Cement: ASTM C91/C91M, Type N. 1. Color: Natural Gray. B. Portland Cement: ASTM C150/C150M, Type I; color as required to produce approved color sample. 1. Not more than 0.60 percent alkali. 2. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S. 3. Mortar Aggregate: ASTM C144. 4. Grout Aggregate: ASTM C404. C. Water: Clean and potable. D. Accelerating Admixture: Nonchloride type for use in cold weather. E. Moisture -Resistant Admixture: Water repellent compound designed to reduce capillarity. 2.04 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A 615/A 615M Grade 60 (420) deformed billet bars; uncoated, sized as indicated on the drawings. B. Joint Reinforcement: Use ladder type joint reinforcement where vertical reinforcement is involved and truss type elsewhere, unless otherwise indicated. C. Ties for Brick Veneer over wood studs - HB -Thermal 2 -Seal Wing Nut Anchor. 1. Veneer Anchors at 16" vertically & 16" horizontal. 2. Offset Length 1 inches to accommodate insulation thickness. 3. Provide WingNut above with Washer to restrain insulation board. D. Ties for Brick Veneer over Conc. Masonry Units -Equal to HB -CWT Corragated Wall Tie 1. Veneer Anchors at 16" vertically & 16" horizontal. 2. Note: No insulation in this CMU/Brick system. 2.05 FLASHINGS A. Plastic Flashings: Sheet polyvinyl chloride; 40 mil thick. 1. Manufacturers: a. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc; Textroflash: www.h-b.com. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2. Termination Bar: 1" Stainless Steel at top edge of wall flashing. UNIT MASONRY 042000-2 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 2.06 ACCESSORIES A. Cavity Mortar Control: Semi-rigid polyethylene or polyester mesh panels, sized to thickness of wall cavity, and designed to prevent mortar droppings from clogging weeps and cavity vents and F allow proper cavity drainage. 1. Mortar Diverter: Semi-rigid mesh designed for installation at flashing locations. a. Manufacturers: 1) Advanced Building Products Inc: www.advancedflashing.com. j 2) Mortar Net Solutions: www.mortarnet.com. jl 3) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc; Mortar Trap: www.h-b.com. (a) Design Standard: Mortar Trap by H&B, 1" thick.. 4) Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2. Cavity Vents: Polyester mesh. a. Manufacturers: 1) Blok-Lok Limited: www.blok-lok.com. 2) CavClear/Archovations, Inc: www.cavclear.com. 3) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc; Design Standard: QV- Quadro-Vent: www.h-b.com. } (a) 3/8" thick x 3 5/8" x 2 1/2" tall Honeycomb tubing. 4) Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements. B. Cleaning Solution: Non -acidic, not harmful to masonry work or adjacent materials. 2.07 LINTELS A. Steel angles as shown in the drawings, furnished by Section 05 5000. 2.08 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES A. Mortar for Unit Masonry: ASTM C270, using the Proportion Specification. 1. Exterior, loadbearing masonry: Type N. B. Grout: ASTM C476; consistency required to fill completely volumes indicated for grouting; fine grout for spaces with smallest horizontal dimension of 2 inches or less; coarse grout for spaces with smallest horizontal dimension greater than 2 inches. C. Admixtures: Add to grout mixture at manufacturer's recommended rate and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions; mix uniformly. D. Mixing: Use mechanical batch mixer and comply with referenced standards. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive masonry. B. Verify that related items provided under other sections are properly sized and located. C. Verify that built-in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into masonry work. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Direct and coordinate placement of metal anchors supplied for installation under other sections. B. Provide temporary bracing during installation of masonry work. Maintain in place until building structure provides permanent bracing. 3.03 COLD AND HOT WEATHER REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to minimum 40 degrees F prior to, during, and 48 hours after completion of masonry work. B. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to maximum 90 degrees F prior to, during, and 48 hours after completion of masonry work. UNIT MASONRY 042000-3 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 3.04 COURSING A. Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement. B. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form vertical and horizontal joints of uniform thickness. C. Concrete Masonry Units: 1. Bond: Running. 2. Coursing: One unit and one mortar joint to equal 8 inches. 3. Mortar Joints: Concave. D. Brick Units: 1. Bond: Running. 2. Coursing: Three units and three mortarjoints to equal 8 inches. 3. Mortar Joints: Concave. 3.05 PLACING AND BONDING A. Lay solid masonry units in full bed of mortar, with full head joints, uniformly jointed with other work. B. Lay hollow masonry units with face shell bedding on head and bed joints. C. Buttering corners of joints or excessive furrowing of mortar joints is not permitted. D. Remove excess mortar and mortar smears as work progresses. E. Remove excess mortar with water repellent admixture promptly. Do not use acids, sandblasting or high pressure cleaning methods. F. Interlock intersections and external corners. G. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has achieved initial set. Where adjustment must be made, remove mortar and replace. H. Perform job site cutting of masonry units with proper tools to provide straight, clean, unchipped edges. Prevent broken masonry unit corners or edges. 3.06 WEEPS/CAVITY VENTS A. Install weeps in cavity walls at 24 inches on center horizontally at bottom of walls. B. Install cavity vents in veneer and cavity walls at 32 inches on center horizontally below shelf angles and lintels and near top of walls. C. Install weeps in veneer walls at 24 inches (600 mm) oc horizontally above through -wall flashing. 3.07 CAVITY MORTAR CONTROL A. Do not permit mortar to drop or accumulate into cavity air space or to plug weep/cavity vents. B. Install cavity mortar diverter at base of cavity and at other flashing locations as recommended by manufacturer to prevent mortar droppings from blocking weep/cavity vents. 3.08 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE -GENERAL A. Unless otherwise indicated on drawings or specified under specific wall type, install horizontal joint reinforcement 16 inches on center. B. Place masonry joint reinforcement in first and second horizontal joints above and below openings. Extend minimum 16 inches each side of opening. C. Place continuous joint reinforcement in first and second joint below top of walls. D. Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6 inches. E. Reinforce joint corners and intersections with strap anchors 16 inches on center. F. Fasten anchors to structural framing and embed in masonry joints as masonry is laid. Unless otherwise indicated on drawings or closer spacing is indicated under specific wall type, space anchors at maximum of 36 inches horizontally and 24 inches vertically. UNIT MASONRY 042000-4 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 3.09 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE -SINGLE WYTHE MASONRY A. Install horizontal joint reinforcement 8 inches on center. B. Place masonry joint reinforcement in first and second horizontal joints above and below openings. Extend minimum 16 inches each side of opening. C. Place continuous joint reinforcement in first and second joint below top of walls. D. Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6 inches. E. Reinforce stack bonded unit joint corners and intersections with strap anchors 16 inches on center. 3.10 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE -MASONRY VENEER A. Install horizontal joint reinforcement 16 inches on center. B. Place masonry joint reinforcement in first and second horizontal joints above and below openings. Extend minimum 16 inches each side of opening. C. Place continuous joint reinforcement in first and second joint below top of walls. D. Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6 inches. E. Masonry Back -Up: Embed anchors to bond veneer at maximum 16 inches on center vertically and 16 inches on center horizontally. Place additional anchors at perimeter of openings and ends of panels, so maximum spacing of anchors is 8 inches on center. F. Stud Back -Up: Secure veneer anchors to stud framed back-up and embed into masonry veneer at maximum 16 inches on center vertically and 16 inches on center horizontally. Place additional anchors at perimeter of openings and ends of panels, so maximum spacing of anchors is 8 inches on center. 3.11 MASONRY FLASHINGS A. Whether or not specifically indicated, install masonry flashing to divert water to exterior at all locations where downward flow of water will be interrupted. 1. Extend flashings full width at such interruptions and at least 6 inches into adjacent masonry or turn up at least 8 inches to form watertight pan at non -masonry construction. 2. Remove or cover protrusions or sharp edges that could puncture flashings. B. Extend metal flashings through exterior face of masonry and turn down to form drip. Install joint sealer below drip edge to prevent moisture migration under flashing. C. Extend plastic flashings to within 1/4 inch of exterior face of masonry. D. Lap end joints of flashings at least 6 inches and seal watertight with flashing sealant/adhesive. 3.12 LINTELS A. Install loose steel lintels over openings. B. Install reinforced unit masonry lintels over openings reinforced as detailed. See Structural Plans. 1. Do not splice reinforcing bars. 2. Place and consolidate grout fill without displacing reinforcing. 3. Allow masonry lintels to attain specified strength before removing temporary supports. C. Maintain minimum 8 inch bearing on each side of opening. 3.13 GROUTED COMPONENTS A. Lap splices minimum 24 bar diameters. B. Support and secure reinforcing bars from displacement. Maintain position within 1/2 inch of dimensioned position. C. Place and consolidate grout fill without displacing reinforcing. D. At bearing locations, fill masonry cores with grout for a minimum 12 inches either side of opening. UNIT MASONRY 042000-5 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 3.14 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS A. Form control joint with a sheet building paper bond breaker fitted to one side of the hollow contour end of the block unit. Fill the resultant core with grout fill. Rake joint at exposed unit faces for placement of backer rod and sealant. B. Size control joints as indicated on drawings; if not shown, 3/4 inch wide and deep. C. Form expansion joint as detailed on drawings. i 3.15 BUILT-IN WORK A. As work progresses, install built-in metal door frames and other items to be built into the work and furnished under other sections. B. Install built-in items plumb, level, and true to line. C. Bed anchors of metal door and glazed frames in adjacent mortar joints. Fill frame voids solid with grout. 1. Fill adjacent masonry cores with grout minimum 12 inches from framed openings. f D. Do not build into masonry construction organic materials that are subject to deterioration. 3.16 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from Plane of Wall: 1/4 inch in 10 it and 1/2 inch in 20 ft or more. B. Maximum Variation from Level Coursing: 1/8 inch in 3 ft and 1/4 inch in 10 ft; 1/2 inch in 30 ft. C. Maximum Variation of Mortar Joint Thickness: Head joint, minus 1/4 inch, plus 3/8 inch. D. Maximum Variation from Cross Sectional Thickness of Walls: 1/4 inch. 3.17 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Clay Masonry Unit Tests: Test each variety of clay masonry in accordance with ASTM C67 requirements, sampling 5 randomly chosen units for each 50,000 installed. i B. Concrete Masonry Unit Tests: Test each variety of concrete unit masonry in accordance with ASTM C140/C140M for conformance to requirements of this specification. 1 C. Mortar Tests: Test each type of mortar in accordance with ASTM C780, testing with same frequency as masonry samples. 3.18 CLEANING A. Remove excess mortar and mortar droppings. B. Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work. C. Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution. D. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations. 3.19 PROTECTION A. Without damaging completed work, provide protective boards at exposed external corners that are subject to damage by construction activities. END OF SECTION UNIT MASONRY 042000-6 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 SECTION 05 1200 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING PART? GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Structural steel framing members, support members at balconies.. B. Base plates, shear stud connectors and expansion joint plates. C. Grouting under base plates. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 05 4000 - Cold -Formed Metal Framing. B. Section 05 5000 - Metal Fabrications: Steel fabrications affecting structural steel work. C. Section 05 5100 - Metal Stairs: Steel fabricated stair systems as detailed. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AISC (MAN) - Steel Construction Manual; 2011. B. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2014. C. ASTM A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts, Studs, and Threaded Rod 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength; 2014. D. AWS D1.1/D1.1 M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; 2015. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate profiles, sizes, spacing, locations of structural members, openings, attachments, and fasteners. 2. Indicate welded connections with AWS A2.4 welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths. C. Welders Certificates: Certify welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12 months. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricate structural steel members in accordance with AISC "Steel Construction Manual." B. Fabricator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 7 years of documented experience. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Steel Angles and Plates: ASTM A36/A36M. B. Rolled Steel Structural Shapes: ASTM A992/A992M. C. Steel Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 242/A 242M high-strength, corrosion -resistant structural steel. D. Cold -Formed Structural Tubing: ASTM A500/A500M, Grade B. STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200-1 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 E. Hot -Formed Structural Tubing: ASTM A501, seamless or welded. F. Structural Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, ASTM A307, Grade A galvanized to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C. G. Headed Anchor Rods: ASTM A 307, Grade C, plain. H. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1/D1.1M; type required for materials being welded. I. Grout: ASTM C1107/C1107M; Non -shrink; premixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate, cement, water reducing and plasticizing agents. 1. Minimum Compressive Strength at 48 Hours: 2,000 pounds per square inch. 2. Minimum Compressive Strength at 28 Days: 7,000 pounds per square inch. J. Grout: Non -shrink, non-metallic aggregate type, complying with 1 and capable of developing a minimum compressive strength of 5000 psi at 28 days. K. Shop and Touch -Up Primer: Fabricator's standard, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Shop fabricate to greatest extent possible. B. Continuously seal joined members by continuous welds. Grind exposed welds smooth. C. Fabricate connections for bolt, nut, and washer connectors. 2.03 FINISH A. Shop prime structural steel members. Do not prime surfaces that will be fireproofed, field welded, in contact with concrete, or high strength bolted. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that conditions are appropriate for erection of structural steel and that the work may properly proceed. 3.02 ERECTION A. Erect structural steel in compliance with AISC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges". B. Allow for erection loads, and provide sufficient temporary bracing to maintain structure in safe condition, plumb, and in true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing. C. Field weld components and shear studs indicated on shop drawings. D. Use carbon steel bolts only for temporary bracing during construction, unless otherwise specifically permitted on drawings. Install high-strength bolts in accordance with RCSC "Specification for Structural Joints Using High -Strength Bolts". E. Do not field cut or alter structural members without approval of Architect. F. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed, except surfaces to be in contact with concrete. G. Grout solidly between column plates and bearing surfaces, complying with manufacturer's instructions for nonshrink grout. Trowel grouted surfaces smooth, splaying neatly to 45 degrees. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch per story, non -cumulative. B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch. STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200-2 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Section 01 4000. B. High -Strength Bolts: Provide testing and verification of field -bolted connections in accordance with RCSC "Specification for Structural Joints Using High -Strength Bolts", testing at least 10 percent of bolts at each connection. END OF SECTION STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200-3 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 SECTION 05 4000 COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Formed steel stud for exterior Gas Grille unit. 1. Stainless Steel countertop for Gas Grille is specified in Misc Metal. 2. Cement Board substrate for Gas Grille is specified with Gypsum Assemblies Sections. B. Formed metal "Z" studs to install exterior insulation at typical walls. (May assign this product to prefinished Metal Wall Panels.) C. Formed metal suspension of gyp. board fur downs interior to the apartments (typically provided by gypsum board sub -contractors). This metal product will be specified in Gypsum Assemblies Section. D. Resilent channels for ceiling to achieve fire rating. ( May assign this product to Drywall Contractors.) E. Misc. light gauge steel furring and accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on standard framing members; describe materials and finish, product criteria, limitations . C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, conditions requiring special attention . 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the types of products specified in this section, and with minimum three years of documented experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three years documented experience and approved by manufacturer. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: 1. AMERICAN STUDCO; 2525 North 27th Avenue, P.O. Box 6633, Phoenix AZ 85009; Telephone (800) 877-8823. 2. Allied Structural Industries, Inc. 3. Bostwick Steel Framing Co. 4. Milcor Division, Inryco co. 5. Dale Industries, Inc. 6. Marine Industries. 7. SCAFCO Steel Stud Mfg. Co. (509) 343-9000 www.SCAFCO.com 8. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. 9. Supply all products specified in this section from a single manufacturer. COLD -FORMED METAL 054000-1 FRAMING Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 B. Metal Framing: 1. Clarkwestern Dietrich Building Systems LLC: www.clarkdietrich.com. 2. Marino: www.marinoware.com. 3. The Steel Network, Inc: www.SteelNetwork.com. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Material Specs: See detailing for specifics. 1. Gas Grille Counter - located in the courtyard between the two buildings. 2. "Z" Studs - for support for exterior insulation and attachment of finished metal siding. 3. Gas Counter - Stainless Steel counter specified in Misc Metal Section. 2.03 FRAMING MATERIALS A. Studs and Track: ASTM C955; studs formed to channel, "C", or "Sigma" shape with punched web; U-shaped track in matching nominal width and compatible height. 1. Gage and Depth: As indicated on the drawings. 2. Galvanized in accordance with ASTM A653/A653M, G60/Z180 coating. 3. Provide components fabricated from ASTM A1008/A1008M, Designation SS steel. B. "Z: Channels: (for exterior insulation board installation 1 1/2" Deep running horizontally, spaced at 24" oc. Equal to Scafco Supreme 0.0295" thick metal for install of foam over wood sheeting (attached to studs). C. Framing Connectors: Factory -made, formed steel sheet. 1. Material: ASTM A653/A653M SS Grade 33 and 40 (minimum), with G90/Z275 hot dipped galvanized coating for base metal thickness less than 10 gage, 0.1345 inch, and factory punched holes and slots. 2. Structural Performance: Maintain load and movement capacity required by applicable code, when evaluated in accordance with AISI S100-12. 3. Movement Connections: Provide mechanical anchorage devices that accommodate movement using slotted holes, shouldered screws or screws and anti -friction or stepped bushings, while maintaining structural performance of framing. Provide movement connections where indicated on drawings. 4. Fixed Connections: Provide non -movement connections for tie -down to foundation, floor -to -floor tie -down, roof -to -wall tie -down, joist hangers, gusset plates, and stiffeners. 2.04 FASTENERS A. Self -Drilling, Self -Tapping Screws, Bolts, Nuts and Washers: Hot dip galvanized per ASTM A153/A153M. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF Z'S. A. Install components in accordance with manufacturers' instructions and ASTM C1007 requirements. B. Place "Z" at 24" running horizontal across studs below. Fasten into studs at 16" oc with a 2" x 3/16" self tab screw with threads for wood material. C. Lap Z's at inside and outside corner and fasten the horizontal face of the Z together. END OF SECTION COLD -FORMED METAL 054000-2 FRAMING Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 SECTION 05 5000 METAL FABRICATIONS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Shop fabricated steel and miscellaneous metal items. 1. Bollards. 2. Short Elevator Pit Rung Ladder. 3. Lintels for Masonry. 4. Other Misc Steel fabrications shown or implied in drawings. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories. Include erection drawings, elevations, and details where applicable. C. Fabricator's Qualification Statement: Provide documentation showing steel fabricator is accredited under AS AC172. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS - STEEL A. Steel Tubing: ASTM A500/A500M, Grade B cold -formed structural tubing. B. Plates: ASTM A283. C. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A325 (ASTM A325M), Type 1, galvanized to ASTM A153/A153M where connecting galvanized components. D. Shop and Touch -Up Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Fit and shop assemble items in largest practical sections, for delivery to site. B. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured. C. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius. D. Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related components of same material and finish as fabrication, except where specifically noted otherwise. 2.03 FABRICATED ITEMS A. Bollards: Steel pipe, concrete filled, crowned cap, as detailed; prime paint finish. B. Final Painting to be accomplished on site by Section 09 9000. C. Ledge Angles, Shelf Angles, Channels, and Plates Not Attached to Structural Framing: For support of metal decking; prime paint finish. D. Lintels: As detailed; prime paint finish. METAL FABRICATIONS 055000-1 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 2.04 FABRICATED LADDERS A. Fabricated Ladder: Welded metal unit complying with ANSI A14.3; factory fabricated to greatest degree practical and in the largest components possible. 1. Elevator Pit Ladder: 4 feet pit. Extend hand rails 42 inches above floor level. 2. Components: Manufacturer's standard rails, rungs, treads, handrails. returns, platforms and safety devices complying with the requirements of the MATERIALS article of this section. 2.05 FINISHES -STEEL A. Prime paint steel items. B. Prepare surfaces to be primed in accordance with SSPC-SP2. C. Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to finishing. D. Prime Painting: Two coats. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is required. B. Supply setting templates to the appropriate entities for steel items required to be cast into concrete or embedded in masonry. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects. B. Provide for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments. C. Field weld components as indicated on drawings. D. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D11.101.1M. E. Obtain approval prior to site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled. F. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed or galvanized, except surfaces to be in contact with concrete. 3.04 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch per story, non -cumulative. B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch. C. Maximum Out -of -Position: 1/4 inch. END OF SECTION METAL FABRICATIONS 055000-2 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 SECTION 05 5100 METAL STAIRS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Stairs with grating treads. B. Structural steel stair framing and supports. C. Handrails and guards. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AISC 201 - AISC Certification Program for Structural Steel Fabricators, Standard for Steel Building Structures; 2006. B. ASTM A325 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength; 2014. C. AWS D1.1/D1.1 M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; 2015. D. NAAMM AMP 510 - Metal Stairs Manual; 1992, Fifth Edition. E. NAAMM MBG 531 - Metal Bar Grating Manual; 2009. F. NAAMM MBG 532 - Heavy Duty Metal Bar Grating Manual; 2009. G. SSPC-Paint 15 - Steel Joist Shop Primer/Metal Building Primer; 1999 (Ed. 2004). H. SSPC-SP 2 - Hand Tool Cleaning; 1982 (Ed. 2004). 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories. 1. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.4 welding symbols. Indicate net weld f lengths. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Structural Designer Qualifications: Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed in Idaho, or personnel under direct supervision of such an engineer. B. Fabricator Qualifications: 1. A qualified steel fabricator that is certified by the American Institute for Steel Construction (AISC) under AISC 201. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 METAL STAIRS -GENERAL A. Metal Stairs: Provide stairs of the design specified, complete with landing platforms, vertical and horizontal supports, railings, and guards, fabricated accurately for anchorage to each other and to building structure. 1. Regulatory Requirements: Provide stairs and railings complying with the most stringent requirements of local, state, and federal regulations; where requirements of the contract documents exceed those of regulations, comply with the contract documents. METAL STAIRS 05 5100 -1 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 2. Handrails: Comply with applicable accessibility requirements of ADA Standards. 3. Structural Design: Provide complete stair and railing assemblies complying with the applicable local code. a. Stair Capacity: Uniform live load of 100 Ib/sq ft and a concentrated load of 300 Ib with deflection of stringer or landing framing not to exceed 1/360 of span. b. Railing Assemblies: Comply with ASTM E985. 4. At exit stairwells, provide unit stair towers designed for stacking to height of building as a self-supporting structure. 5. Dimensions: As indicated on drawings. 6. Shop assemble components; disassemble into largest practical sections suitable for transport and access to site. 7. No sharp or rough areas on exposed travel surfaces and surfaces accessible to touch. 8. Separate dissimilar metals using paint or permanent tape. B. Metal Jointing and Finish Quality Levels: 1. Architectural: All joints as inconspicuous as possible, whether welded or mechanical. a. Welded Joints: Continuously welded and ground smooth and flush. Mechanical Joints: Butted tight, flush, and hairline; concealed fastenings only. b. Exposed Edges and Corners: Eased to small uniform radius. c. Metal Surfaces to be Painted: Sanded or ground smooth, suitable for highest quality gloss finish. 2. Commercial: Exposed joints as inconspicuous as possible, whether welded or mechanical; underside of stair not covered by soffit IS considered exposed to view. a. Welded Joints: Intermittently welded on back side, filled with body putty, and sanded smooth and flush. b. Welds Exposed to View: Ground smooth and flush. c. Mechanical Joints: Butted tight, flush, and hairline. d. Bolts Exposed to View: Countersunk flat or oval head bolts; no exposed nuts. e. Exposed Edges and Corners: Eased to small uniform radius. f. Metal Surfaces to be Painted: Sanded or ground smooth, suitable for satin or matte finish. 3. Service: Exposed joints tight with face surfaces aligned; underside of stair not covered by soffit is not considered exposed to view. a. Welded Joints: Welded on back side wherever possible. b. Welds Exposed to View: Ground smooth; not required to be flush. c. Bolts Exposed to View: Countersunk flat or oval head bolts; no exposed nuts or screw threads. d. Metal Surfaces to be Painted: Sanded smooth, suitable for satin or matte finish. C. Fasteners: Same material or compatible with materials being fastened; type consistent with design and specified quality level. D. Anchors and Related Components: Same material and finish as item to be anchored, except where specifically indicated otherwise; provide all anchors and fasteners required. 2.02 METAL STAIRS WITH GRATING TREADS A. Steel Grating Stair Treads: Equal to McNichols - Model SGW with bar steel diamond plate nosing. See Structural Drawings for tread loads. Los Alamitos, CA 1-800-321-4314 B. Jointing and Finish Quality Level: Commercial, as defined above. C. Risers: Open. METAL STAIRS 055100-2 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 D. Treads: Steel bar grating. 1. Grating Type: Welded. 2. Bearing Bar Depth: 1 3/16 inch, minimum. 3. Top Surface: Standard. 4. Nosing: Cast Abrasive. 5. Nosing Width: 1-1/4 inch, minimum. 6. Anchorage to Stringers: End plates welded to grating, bolted to stringers. E. Stringers: Rolled steel channels. 1. Stringer Depth: 10 inches. 2. End Closure: Sheet steel of same thickness as risers welded across ends. F. Landings: Same construction as treads, supported and reinforced as required to achieve design load capacity. G. Railings: Steel pipe railings. H. Finish: Shop- or factory -prime painted. 2.03 HANDRAILS AND GUARDS A. Wall -Mounted Rails: Round pipe or tube rails unless otherwise indicated. 1. Outside Diameter: 1-1/4 inch, minimum, to 1-1/2 inches, maximum. B. Guards: 1. Top Rails: Round pipe or tube rails unless otherwise indicated. a. Outside Diameter: 1-1/4 inch, minimum, to 1-1/2 inches, maximum. 2. Infill at Pipe Railings: Pipe or tube rails sloped parallel to stair. a. Outside Diameter: 1 inch. b. Material: Steel pipe or tube, round. c. Vertical Spacing: Maximum 4 inches on center. d. Jointing: Welded and ground smooth and flush. 3. End and Intermediate Posts: Same material and size as top rails. a. Horizontal Spacing: As indicated on drawings. b. Mounting: Welded to top surface of stringer. 2.04 MATERIALS A. Steel Sections: ASTM A36/A36M. B. Steel Tubing: ASTM A500/A500M or ASTM A501/A501 M structural tubing, round and shapes as indicated. C. Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Grade B Schedule 40, galvanized finish. D. Gratings: Bar gratings complying with NAAMM MBG 531 or NAAMM MBG 532, whichever applies based on bar sizes. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Steel Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A325 (ASTM A325M), Type 1, and galvanized to ASTM A153/A153M where connecting galvanized components. B. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1/D1.1M; type required for materials being welded. C. Shop and Touch -Up Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction. METAL STAIRS 055100-3 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 2.06 SHOP FINISHING A. Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to finishing. B. Do not prime surfaces in direct contact with concrete or where field welding is required. C. Prime Painting: Use specified shop- and touch-up primer. 1. Preparation of Steel: In accordance with SSPC-SP 2, Hand Tool Cleaning. 2. Number of Coats: One. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work. 3.02 PREPARATION A. When field welding is required, clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal. B. Supply items required to be cast into concrete and embedded in masonry with setting templates. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install components plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects. B. Provide anchors, plates, angles, hangers, and struts required for connecting stairs to structure. C. Allow for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments. D. Provide welded field joints where specifically indicated on drawings. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D 1.1 /D 1.1 M. E. Other field joints may be either welded or bolted provided the result complies with the limitations specified for jointing quality levels. F. Obtain approval prior to site cutting or creating adjustments not scheduled. G. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed or galvanized, except surfaces to be in contact with concrete. 3.04 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch per story, non -cumulative. B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch. END OF SECTION METAL STAIRS 055100-4 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 SECTION 06 1000 ROUGH CARPENTRY PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Structural dimension lumber framing. B. Exterior lumber framing and interior lumber framing. C. Roof Sheathing. D. Communications and electrical room mounting boards. E. Concealed wood blocking for support of all accessories; such as, shelving, handrails, grab bars & fire extinguishers. F. Blocking shown for wall corners and intersection walls. G. Installation of Windows including flashing & sealing steps forwindowjambs, head & sills. 1. Coordinate specific unit sizes and final framed opening sizes. 2. Coordinate installation of Air and Vapor Barrier integral with window framing flange. 3. Sealing required around wall penetrations for gas main and horizontal flues. 4. Miscellaneous wood nailers, furring, and grounds. H. Structural Specifications: Reference both Sections included herein and Structural Drawings S 0.1 & S 0.2. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 03 3123 - Cast -in-place Concrete: Setting hold downs in concrete. B. Section 05 1200 - Structural Steel Framing: Prefabricated beams and columns for support of wood framing. C. Section 05 5000 - Metal Fabrications: Miscellaneous steel connectors and support angles for wood framing. D. Section 06 1733 - Wood I -Joists. E. Section 061800 -Laminated Veneer Lumber Beams. F. Section 06 1803 - Glu -Lam Structural Beams. G. Section 06 4100 -Architectural Wood Casework H. Section 07 6200 - SHEET METAL FLASHING, & TRIM: Sill flashings. I. Section 08 5200 - Windows: Coordination of unit sizes and framed openings. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI A208.1 - American National Standard for Particleboard; 2009. B. AFPA (WFCM) - Wood Frame Construction Manual for One- and Two -Family Dwellings; American Forest and Paper Association; 2012. C. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2009. D. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2015a. E. AWPA U1 - Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood; 2012. F. PS 1 - Structural Plywood; 2009. ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000-1 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 G. PS 2 -Performance Standard for Wood -Based Structural -Use Panels; 2010. H. PS 20 -American Softwood Lumber Standard; 2010. WCLIB (GR) - Standard Grading Rules for West Coast Lumber No. 17; 2004, and supplements. WWPA G-5 - Western Lumber Grading Rules; 2011. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide technical data on wood preservative materials and application instructions. C. Structural Composite Lumber: Submit manufacturer's published structural data including span tables, marked to indicate which sizes and grades are being used; if structural composite lumber is being substituted for dimension lumber or timbers, submit grading agency structural tables marked for comparison. D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that wood products supplied for rough carpentry meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Lumber: Comply with PS 20 and approved grading rules and inspection agencies. 1. Acceptable Lumber Inspection Agencies: Any agency with rules approved by American Lumber Standards Committee. 2. Lumber of other species or grades, or graded by other agencies, is acceptable provided structural and appearance characteristics are equivalent to or better than products specified. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. General: Cover wood products to protect against moisture. Support stacked products to prevent deformation and to allow air circulation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Dimension Lumber: Comply with PS 20 and requirements of specified grading agencies. 1. Species: Studs - Douglas Fir -Larch # 2 or better, unless otherwise indicated. Columns and Posts - Douglas Fir -Larch # 1, unless otherwise indicated. Joist, Beams or Headers - Douglas Fir -Larch # 2, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Grading Agency: Any grading agency whose rules are approved by the Board of Review, American Lumber Standard Committee (www.aisc.org) and who provides grading service for the species and grade specified; provide lumber stamped with grade mark unless otherwise indicated. 2.02 DIMENSION LUMBER A. Grading Agency: Western Wood Products Association; WWPA G-5. B. Sizes: Nominal sizes as indicated on drawings, S4S. C. Moisture Content: S-dryor MC19. D. Stud Framing (2 x 2 through 2 x 6 ): 2 x 4 studs 1. Species: Douglas Fir -Larch. 2. Grade: No. 2. ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000-2 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 E. Stud Framing (2 by 2 through 2 by 6 ): 2 x 6 studs 1. Species: Douglas Fir -Larch. 2. Grade: No. 2. F. Joist, Rafter, and Small Beam Framing (2 by 6 through 4 by 16 ): j 1. Species: Douglas Fir -Larch. I 2. Grade: No. 2 or btr. G. Columns or Posts: (4 x 4 or larger) 1. Species: Douglas Fir -Larch. 2. Grade: No 1. H. Miscellaneous Framing, Blocking, Nailers, Grounds, and Furring: f 1. Lumber: S4S, No. 2 or Standard Grade. 2. Boards: Standard or No. 3. I. Miscellaneous Blocking, Furring, and Nailers: 1. Lumber: S4S, No. 2 or Standard Grade. 2. Boards: Standard or No. 3. 2.03 STRUCTURAL COMPOSITE LUMBER A. At Construction Manager's option, structural composite lumber may be substituted for concealed dimension lumber and timbers. B. Structural Composite Lumber: Factory fabricated beams, headers, and columns, of sizes and types indicated on drawings; structural capacity as published by manufacturer. 1. Columns: Use laminated veneer lumber, laminated strand lumber, or parallel strand lumber with manufacturer's published E (modulus of elasticity): 1,800,000 psi, minimum. 2. Beams: Use laminated veneer lumber, laminated strand lumber, or parallel strand lumber with manufacturer's published E (modulus of elasticity): 1,800,000 psi, minimum. 3. Headers Not Longer Than 48 inches: Use laminated veneer lumber, laminated strand lumber, or parallel strand lumber. 4. Manufacturers: a. Weyerhaeuser: www.weyerhaeuser.com. b. Boise Cascade: www.bc.com. c. Georgia-Pacific Corp.: www.buildgp.com. d. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements. 2.04 CONSTRUCTION PANELS A. Subfloor/Underlayment Combination: APA Rated wood structural panel; PS 2, rated Single Floor. 1. Performance Category: 23/32 PERF CAT. (3/411) 2. Span Rating: 24. 3. Edges: Square. 4. Exposure Time: Sheathing will not delaminate or require sanding due to moisture absorption from exposure to weather for up to 200 days. 5. Provide fastening guide on top panel surface with separate markings indicating fastener spacing for 16 inches, 19.2 inches and 24 inches on center, respectively. B. Roof Sheathing: APA PRP -108, Structural I Rated Sheathing, Exposure 1 or better, and as follows: 1. Structural 1. 2. Thickness: 19/ 32" ( 5/8" ). 3. Span Rating: 40/20. 4. Edges: Square. 5. Exposure Time: Sheathing undamaged after exposure to weather for up to 180 days. 6. Provide fastening guide on top panel surface with separate markings indicating fastner spacing for 16 inches and 24 inches on center, repectively. ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000-3 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 C. Wall Sheathing: APA PRP -108, Structural I Rated Sheathing, Exterior Exposure Class, and as follows: 1. Thickness: 15/32" ( 1/2" ). 2. Span Rating: 32/16. 3. See Structural Drawings for wall nailing, shear panels, etc. D. Communications and Electrical Room Mounting Boards: PS 1 A -D plywood, or medium density fiberboard; 3/4 inch thick; flame spread index of 25 or less, smoke developed index of 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. E. Other Applications: 1. Plywood Concealed From View But Located Within Exterior Enclosure: PS 1, C -C Plugged or better, Exterior grade. 2. Resilient Flooring Underlayment: 1/4" Luaan Plywood. 3. Plywood Exposed to View But Not Exposed to Weather: PS 1, A -D, or better. 4. Other Locations: PS 1, C -D Plugged or better. 5. Electrical Component Mounting: APA rated sheathing, fire retardant treated. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners and Anchors: 1. Metal and Finish: Hot -dipped galvanized steel complying with ASTM Al53/A153M for high humidity and preservative -treated wood locations, unfinished steel elsewhere. B. Die -Stamped Connectors: Hot dipped galvanized steel, sized to suit framing conditions. C. Seismic Hold Down anchors and Hurricane framing anchors by Simpson or approved equal. D. Joist Hangers: Hot dipped galvanized steel, sized to suit framing conditions. E. Sill Gasket on Top of Foundation Wall: 1/4 inch thick, plate width, closed cell plastic foam from continuous rolls. F. Sill Flashing: As specified in Section 07 6200. G. Water -Resistive Barrier: As specified in Section 07 2500. 2.06 FACTORY WOOD TREATMENT A. Treated Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements of AWPA U1 - Use Category System for wood treatments determined by use categories, expected service conditions, and specific applications. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Where wood framing bears on cementitious foundations, install full width sill flashing continuous over top of foundation, lap ends of flashing minimum of 4 inches and seal. B. Install sill gasket under sill plate of framed walls bearing on foundations; puncture gasket cleanly to fit tightly around protruding anchor bolts. C. Coordinate installation of rough carpentry members specified in other sections. D. Coordinate Window unit sizes prior to framing exterior walls. 3.02 INSTALLATION -GENERAL A. Select material sizes to minimize waste. B. Reuse scrap to the greatest extent possible; clearly separate scrap for use on site as accessory components, including: shims, bracing, and blocking. C. Where treated wood is used on interior, provide temporary ventilation during and immediately after installation sufficient to remove indoor air contaminants. ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000-4 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 3.03 FRAMING INSTALLATION A. Set structural members level, plumb, and true to line. Discard pieces with defects that would lower required strength or result in unacceptable appearance of exposed members. B. Make provisions for temporary construction loads, and provide temporary bracing sufficient to maintain structure in true alignment and safe condition until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing. C. Install structural members full length without splices unless otherwise specifically detailed. D. Comply with member sizes, spacing, and configurations indicated, and fastener size and spacing indicated, but not less than required by applicable codes and AFPA (WFCM) Wood Frame Construction Manual. E. Construct double joist headers at floor and ceiling openings and under wall stud partitions that are parallel to floor joists; use metal joist hangers unless otherwise detailed. F. Frame wall openings with two or more studs at each jamb; support headers on cripple studs. 3.04 BLOCKING, NAILERS, AND SUPPORTS A. Provide framing and blocking members as indicated or as required to support finishes, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. B. In framed assemblies that have concealed spaces, provide solid wood fireblocking as required by applicable local code, to close concealed draft openings between floors and between top story and roof/attic space; other material acceptable to code authorities may be used in lieu of solid wood blocking. C. In walls, provide blocking attached to studs as backing and support for wall -mounted items, unless item can be securely fastened to two or more studs or other method of support is explicitly indicated. D. Where ceiling -mounting is indicated, provide blocking and supplementary supports above ceiling, unless other method of support is explicitly indicated. E. Provide the following specific non-structural framing and blocking: 1. Cabinets and shelf supports. 2. Wall brackets for shelving. 3. Handrails. 4. Grab bars. 5. Clothes rods. 6. Shower curtain rods. 7. Towel and bath accessories. 8. Wall -mounted door stops. 9. Wall paneling and trim. 10. Joints of rigid wall coverings that occur between studs. 3.05 ROOF -RELATED CARPENTRY A. Coordinate installation of roofing carpentry with deck construction, framing of roof openings, and roofing assembly installation. B. Provide miscellaneous members as indicated or as required to support finishes, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. 3.06 INSTALLATION OF ACCESSORIES AND MISCELLANEOUS WOOD A. Place full width continuous sill flashings under framed walls on cementitious foundations. Lap flashing joints 4 inches and seal. B. Place sill gasket directly on cementitious foundation. Puncture gasket cleanly and fit tightly to protruding foundation anchor bolts. C. Coordinate installation of plywood web joists. ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000-5 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 3.07 INSTALLATION OF CONSTRUCTION PANELS A. Subflooring/Underlayment Combination: Glue and nail to framing; staples are not permitted. B. Apply with face grain perpendicular to supports. 1. All panel edges shall be blocked. 2. Attach with 10d common nails at 4" o.c. at all panel edges, drag struts, boundaries and/or shear walls. Attach in field, use 10d common nails at 12" o.c. C. Roof Sheathing: Nail to framing; staples are not permitted. 1. Secure panels with long dimension perpendicular to framing members, with ends staggered and over firm bearing. 2. At long edges use sheathing clips where joints occur between roof framing members. 3. Attach with 10d common nails at 6" o.c. at all supported panel edges, drag struts, boundaries and/or shear walls. Attach in field, use 10d common nails at 12" o.c. D. Wall Sheathing: Secure with long dimension perpendicular to wall studs, with ends over firm bearing and staggered, using nails, screws, or staples. 1. Note requirements on structural drawings for sheathing to span continuous sheathing to parapet wall shall extend from the top of wall to well below the bearing plates - See Structural detail. E. Communications and Electrical Room Mounting Boards: Secure with screws to studs with edges over firm bearing; space fasteners at maximum 24 inches on center on all edges and into studs in field of board. 1. At fire -rated walls, install board over wall board indicated as part of the fire -rated assembly. 2. Where boards are indicated as full floor -to -ceiling height, install with long edge of board parallel to studs. 3. Install adjacent boards without gaps. 4. Size: 48 by 96 inches, installed horizontally at ceiling height. 3.08 TOLERANCES A. Framing Members: 1/4 inch from true position, maximum. B. Surface Flatness of Floor: 1/8 inch in 10 feet maximum, and 1/4 inch in 30 feet maximum. C. Variation from Plane (Other than Floors): 1/4 inch in 10 feet maximum, and 1/4 inch in 30 feet maximum. 3.09 CLEANING A. Waste Disposal: Comply with the requirements of Section 017419 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal. 1. Comply with applicable regulations. 2. Do not burn scrap on project site. 3. Do not burn scraps that have been pressure treated. 4. Do not send materials treated with pentachlorophenol, CCA, or ACA to co -generation facilities or "waste -to -energy" facilities. B. Do not leave any wood, shavings, sawdust, etc. on the ground or buried in fill. C. Prevent sawdust and wood shavings from entering the storm drainage system. END OF SECTION ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000-6 Student Housing BVII, LLC PART1 GENERAL JHS 1619 SECTION 06 1733 WOOD I -JOISTS 5/4/2017 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Wood I -joists for roof and floor framing. B. Tapered Wood 1 -joists for roof framing. C. Bridging, bracing, and anchorage. D. Framing for openings. E. Structural Specifications: Reference both Sections inluded herein and Structural Drawings S 0.1 & S 0.2. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 1000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY: Installation requirements for miscellaneous framing. B. Section 06 1000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY: Material requirements for blocking, plates, and miscellaneous framing. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM D5055 - Standard Specification for Establishing and Monitoring Structural Capacities of Prefabricated Wood I -Joists; 2013. B. PS 2 -Performance Standard for Wood -Based Structural -Use Panels; 2010. 1.04 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Design Floor Live and dead Load: 52 lbs/sq ft with deflection limited to 1/360 of span. B. Minimum Joist Depth To Accommodate Mechanical Ducts: nominal 12" inch. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's literature describing materials, dimensions, allowable spans and spacings, bearing and anchor details, bridging and bracing requirements, and installation instructions; identify independent inspection agency. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate sizes and spacing of joists, bracing and bridging, bearing stiffeners, holes to be cut (if any), and framed openings between joists. D. Certificate: Certification by joist manufacturer that products delivered are of the same design and construction as those evaluated by the independent inspection agency. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience. WOOD I -JOISTS 061733-1 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site in manufacturer's original packaging with manufacturer's name and product identification intact and legible. B. Protect products from damage due to weather and breakage. C. Protect joists from warping or other distortion by stacking in upright position, braced to resist movement, with air circulation under coverings and around stacks. D. Handle individual joists in the upright position. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Wood I -Joists: 1. RedBuilt: Product - Red -I Joists, www.redbuilt.com, Boise, Id. 2. Georgia-Pacific Corporation: www.buildgp.com. 3. LP Building Products: www.ipcorp.com. 4. Weyerhaeuser: www.woodbywy.com. 5. BCI , by Boise Cascade 6. TJ MacMillan, Boise, Idaho 866-859-6757, 200 E. Mallard Drive, B. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Wood I -Joists: Solid lumber top and bottom flanges and oriented strand board (OSB) webs bonded together with structural adhesive, with published span rating to meet project requirements. 1. Span Rating: Established and monitored in accordance with ASTM D5055 by independent inspection agency. 2. Oriented Strand Board: Comply with PS 2. 3. Adhesive: Tested for wettexterior service in accordance with ASTM D2559. 4. Fabrication Tolerances: a. Flange Width: Plus/minus 1/32 inch. b. Flange Thickness: Minus 1/16 inch. c. Joist Depth: Plus 0, minus 1/8 inch. 5. Marking: Mark each piece with depth, joist spacing, and allowable span for joist spacing. 6. Provide bearing stiffeners if required by span rating or joist hanger manufacturer. B. Flanges: Single top and bottom chord of laminated veneer lumber, any species and adhesives conforming to the provisions of NES Report No. NER-206. C. Plywood Web: Webs may be laminated constructs complying with the provisions of NES Report No. NER-206. D. Joist Bridging: Type, size and spacing recommended by joist manufacturer. E. Wood Blocking, Plates, and Miscellaneous Framing: Softwood lumber, any species, construction grade, maximum moisture content of 19 percent. F. Wood Blocking, Plates, and Miscellaneous Framing: As specified in Section 06 1000. G. Fasteners: Electrogalvanized steel, type to suit application. WOOD I -JOISTS 061733-2 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that supports and openings are ready to receive joists. B. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Coordinate placement of bearing items. 3.03 ERECTION A. Install joists in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Set structural members level and plumb, in correct position. C. Make provisions for erection loads and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain structure plumb and in true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing. D. Dc not field cut or alter structural members without approval of Architect. E. Install permanent bridging and bracing. F. Install headers and supports to frame openings required. G. Frame openings between joists with lumber in accordance with Section 06 1000. H. Coordinate installation of sheathing/decking with work of this section. 3.04 TOLERANCES A. Framing Members: 1/2 inch maximum, from true position. END OF SECTION WOOD I -JOISTS 061733-3 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 SECTION 06 1800 GLUED -LAM VENEER STRUCTURAL UNITS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Glue laminated veneer lumber beams. B. Steel hardware and attachment brackets. C. Structural Specifications: Reference both Sections inluded herein and Structural Drawings S 0.1 & S 0.2. 1.02 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Design and laminate members in accordance with AITC 117. B. Design and laminate members in accordance with standard engineering practice and meet requirements of National Design Specification for Wood ,198413ullnosed . Design shall be under the supervision of a registered professional engineer. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide technical data on wood preservative materials, application technique and resultant performance information. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Glued -Laminated Structural Units: 1. Western Wood Structures, Inc.: www.westernwoodstructures.com. 2. Georgia-Pacific Corporation: www.gp.com, 3. Louisiana-Pacific Corp: www.lpcorp.com. 4. Trus Joist/Weyerhaeuser; Product as shown in drawings: www.tjm.com. 5. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 GLUED -LAMINATED UNITS A. Glued -Laminated Units: Fabricate in accordance with AITC 117 Industrial grade. 1. Verify dimensions and site conditions prior to fabrication. 2. Cut and fit members accurately to length to achieve tight joint fit. 3. Fabricate member with camber built in. 4. Do not splice or join members in locations other than those indicated without permission. 5. After end trimming, seal with penetrating sealer in accordance with AITC requirements. GLUED -LAM VENEER 061800-1 STRUCTURAL UNITS Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 2.03 MATERIALS A. Vertical Lamination Members (such as Microllam) : 1. Lumber: Softwood lumber conforming to RIS grading rules with 12 percent maximum moisture content before fabrication. Design for the following values: a. Bending (Fb): 2600 psi. b. Compression Parallel to Grain (Fc): 2460 psi. c. Compression Perpendicular to Grain Bottom (Fc1): 750 psi. d. Horizontal Shear (Fv): 285 psi. e. Modulus of Elasticity (G): 112,500 psi. f. Modulus of Elasticity (E): 1,800,000 psi. B. Horizontal Lamination Members (such as Parallam) : 1. Lumber: Softwood lumber conforming to RIS (GR) grading rules with 12 percent maximum moisture content before fabrication. Design for the following values: a. Bending (Fb): 2900 psi. b. Compression Parallel to Grain (Fc): 2900 psi. c. Compression Perpendicular to Grain Bottom (Fc1): 650 psi. d. Horizontal Shear (Fv): 290 psi. e. Modulus of Elasticity (G): 125,000 psi. f. Modulus of Elasticity (E): 2,000,000 psi. C. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A325 (ASTM A325M) Type 1 heavy hex high strength bolts and ASTM A563 (ASTM A563M) nuts; hot -dip galvanized to meet requirements of ASTM A153/A153M, matching washers. 2.04 FABRICATION A. Fabricate glue laminated structural members in accordance with Industrial standards & grades. B. Verify dimensions and site conditions prior to fabrication. C. Cut and fit members accurately to length to achieve tight joint fit. D. Fabricate member with camber built in. E. After end trimming, seal with penetrating sealer in accordance with AITC requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that supports are ready to receive units. B. Verify sufficient end bearing area. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Coordinate placement of bearing items. 3.03 ERECTION A. Lift members using protective straps to prevent visible damage. B. Set structural members level and plumb, in correct positions or sloped where indicated. C. Provide temporary bracing and anchorage to hold members in place until permanently secured. D. Fit members together accurately without trimming, cutting, splicing, or other unauthorized modification. E. Swab and seal the interior wood surfaces of field drilled holes in members with primer. END OF SECTION GLUED -LAM VENEER 061800-2 STRUCTURAL UNITS Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 SECTION 06 2000 FINISH CARPENTRY PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Finish carpentry items. B. Wood casings and moldings. C. Closet Clothes Rod & Shelving at Apartments. Misc. Shelving as shown. D. Hardware and attachment accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 1000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY: Support framing, grounds, and concealed blocking. B. Section 06 4100 - Architectural Wood Casework: Shop fabricated custom cabinet work. C. Section 08 5313 - Vinyl Windows. D. Section 09 9113 - Exterior Painting: Painting and finishing of finish carpentry items. E. Section 09 9123 - Interior Painting: Painting and finishing of finish carpentry items. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: 1. Provide instructions for attachment hardware and finish hardware. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect work from moisture damage. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Sequence installation to ensure utility connections are achieved in an orderly and expeditious manner. B. Coordinate the work with plumbing rough -in, electrical rough -in, and installation of associated and adjacent components. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 FINISH CARPENTRY ITEMS A. Exterior Woodwork Items: 1. Brick Mould trim at exterior doorjambs. (See Details) FINISH CARPENTRY 062000-1 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 B. Interior Woodwork Items: 1. Molding MDF Trim Door Casings primed & prepared for paint finish. Provide contemporary flat board with soft curved edges. Vertical Jambs - 2 1/4" x 5/8" thick, Product # 473LM Head Trim - 3 1/2" x 23/32" thick, Product # 14E2EM 2. Supplier equal to National Door Company. www.national-door.com 2.02 SHEET MATERIALS A. Softwood Plywood, Not Exposed to View: Any face species, medium density fiberboard core; PS 1 Grade A -B, glue type as recommended for application. B. Hardwood Plywood: Face species as indicated, plain sawn, book matched, medium density fiberboard core; HPVA HP -1, Front Face Grade AA, Back Face Grade 1, glue type as recommended for application. C. 3/4" Shelving material with melamine covering. 2.03 ADHESIVE A. Adhesive: Type recommended by laminate manufacturer to suit application . 2.04 FASTENINGS A. Fasteners: Of size and type to suit application; any finish in concealed locations and stainless steel finish in exposed locations. B. Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded steel. 2.06 ACCESSORIES A. Lumber for Shimming and Blocking: Softwood lumber of pine species. B. Primer: Alkyd primer sealer. C. Wood Filler: Solvent base, tinted to match surface finish color. 2.06 HARDWARE A. Manufacturer: Knape & Vogt - www.kv.com See Drawings for locations required. 1. L -Brackets (2) for support of Counter in Office. Knape & Vogt # 208 braced L bracket: 11.6" long x 8.3" high. 2. Shelf Supports Knape & Vogt - Wall Standard # 80 AND x lengths of 36" & 72" Knape & Vogt - Brackets # 180 ANO x lengths of 20" Knape & Vogt - Brackets # 181 AND x lengths of 16" 3. Shower Curtain Rods Knape & Vogt - Flanges & End Flanges # 764 CHR Chrome - 1 5/16" Knape & Vogt - Flanges & End Flanges # 770 5 Hvy Duty, Chrome - 1 5/16" 2.07 FABRICATION A. Shop assemble work for delivery to site, permitting passage through building openings. B. Fit exposed sheet material edges with 3/8 inch matching hardwood edging. Use one piece for full length only. C. Cap exposed plastic laminate finish edges with plastic trim. D. When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting. Provide trim for scribing and site cutting. FINISH CARPENTRY 062000-2 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 E. Apply plastic laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with manufactured sizes. Fit corners and joints hairline; secure with concealed fasteners. Slightly bevel arises. Locate counter butt joints minimum 2 feet from sink cut-outs. F. Sand work smooth and set exposed nails and screws. G. Apply wood filler in exposed nail and screw indentations. H. On items to receive transparent finishes, use wood filler that matches surrounding surfaces and is of type recommended for the applicable finish. I. Finish work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) orAWMAC/WI (NAAWS), Section 5 - Finishing for grade specified and as follows: 1. Transparent: a. System -1, Lacquer, Nitrocellulose. b. Stain: As selected by Architect. c. Sheen: Flat. J. Stain, seal, and varnish exposed to view surfaces. Brush apply only. K. Back prime woodwork items to be field finished, prior to installation. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing. B. Verify mechanical, electrical, and building items affecting work of this section are placed and ready to receive this work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Set and secure materials and components in place, plumb and level. B. Carefully scribe work abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Do not use additional overlay trim to conceal larger gaps. C. Install trim with nails at 6 inch on center. D. Install closet shelving, clothes hanging rod, & misc shelving as shown in workmanlike manner. E. Install prefinished paneling with full bed contact adhesive applied to substrate. F. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from True Position: 1/16 inch. B. Maximum Offset from True Alignment with Abutting Materials: 1/32 inch. END OF SECTION FINISH CARPENTRY 062000-3 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 SECTION 06 4100 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fabricated cabinet units as shown.. B. Countertops as Solid Surfacing. C. Cabinet hardware. D. Preparation for installing utilities. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) -Architectural Woodwork Standards; 2014. B. BHMA A156.9 -American National Standard for Cabinet Hardware; 2010. C. NEMA LD 3 - High -Pressure Decorative Laminates; 2005. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component profiles, fastening methods, jointing details, and accessories. 1. Scale of Drawings: 1-1/2 inch to 1 foot, minimum. C. Product Data: Provide data for hardware accessories, component dimensions and construction details.. D. Samples: Submit actual sample items of proposed pulls, hinges, shelf standards, and locksets, demonstrating hardware design, quality, and finish. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator or Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in fabricating the products specified in this section with minimum five years of documented experience. 1. Company with at least one project in the past 5 years with value of woodwork within 40 percent of cost of woodwork for this Project. B. Preform work generally in accordance with AWI Standards Illustrated, Custom quality. 1.05 MOCK-UP A. Provide mock-up of typical base cabinet, wall cabinet, and countertop, including hardware, finishes, and plumbing accessories. B. Locate where directed. C. Mock-up may remain as part of the Work. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect units from moisture damage. 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A. During and after installation of custom cabinets, maintain temperature and humidity conditions in building spaces at same levels planned for occupancy. ARCHITECTURAL WOOD 064100-1 CASEWORK Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 DESCRIPTION A. Typical Countertops: Flat panel sides and doors faced with Plastic Laminate. B. Solid Surface Countertops: Backsplash, skirts and edges. See Spec Section 066500. 2.02 CABINETS A. Quality Standard: Custom Grade, in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS), unless noted otherwise. B. Plastic Laminate Faced Cabinets: Custom grade. 2.03 LAMINATE MATERIALS A. Manufacturers: 1. Formica Corporation: www.formica.com. 2. Panolam Industries International, Inc\Nevamar: www.nevamar.com. 3. Wilsonart: www.wilsonart.com. 4. Nevamar: www.nevamar.com B. High Pressure Decorative Laminate (HPDL): NEMA LD 3, types as recommended for specific applications. C. Provide specific types as scheduled. 1. Vertical Surfaces: VGS, 0.028 inch nominal thickness, through color, colors as scheduled, finish as scheduled. 2. Cabinet Liner: CLS, 0.020 inch nominal thickness, through color, colors as scheduled, finish as scheduled. 2.04 COUNTERTOPS A. Solid Surfacing; See Spec 06 6500. j{I 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Adhesive: Type recommended by fabricator to suit application. B. Plastic Edge Banding: Extruded PVC, convex shaped; smooth finish; self locking serrated tongue; of width to match component thickness. I 1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range. C. Fasteners: Size and type to suit application. D. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, Pins, and Screws: Of size and type to suit application; galvanized or chrome -plated finish in concealed locations and stainless steel or chrome -plated finish in exposed locations. E. Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded steel. F. Grommets: Standard plastic, painted metal, or rubber grommets for cut-outs, in color to match adjacent surface. 2.06 HARDWARE A. Hardware: BHMA A156.9, types as recommended by fabricator for quality grade specified. B. Adjustable Shelf Supports: Standard side -mounted system using recessed metal shelf standards or multiple holes for pin supports and coordinated self rests, polished chrome finish, for nominal 1 inch spacing adjustments. C. Drawer and Door Pulls: "U" shaped wire pull, steel with chrome finish, 4 inch centers. ARCHITECTURAL WOOD 064100-2 CASEWORK Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 D. Drawer Slides: 1. Type: Full extension. 2. Static Load Capacity: Commercial grade. 3. Mounting: Side mounted. 4. Stops: Integral type. 5. Features: Provide self closing/stay closed type. 6. Manufacturers: a. Accuride International, Inc: www.accuride.com. b. Grass America Inc: www.grassusa.com. c. Knape & Vogt Manufacturing Company: www.knapeandvogt.com. E. Hinges: European style concealed self-closing type, steel with polished finish. 1. Manufacturers: a. Grass America Inc: www.grassusa.com. b. Hardware Resources: www.hardwareresources.com. c. Julius Blum, Inc: www.blum.com. 2.07 FABRICATION A. Assembly: Shop assemble cabinets for delivery to site in units easily handled and to permit passage through building openings. B. Edging: Fit shelves, doors, and exposed edges with specified edging. Do not use more than one piece for any single length. C. Fitting: When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting. Provide matching trim for scribing and site cutting. D. Plastic Laminate: Apply plastic laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with manufactured sizes. Fit corners and joints hairline; secure with concealed fasteners. Slightly bevel arises. Locate counter butt joints minimum 2 feet from sink cut-outs. E. Mechanically fasten back splash to countertops with steel brackets at 16 inches on center. F. Provide cutouts for plumbing fixtures. Verify locations of cutouts from on-site dimensions. Prime paint cut edges. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing. B. Verify location and sizes of utility rough -in associated with work of this section. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) or AWMAC/WI (NAAWS) requirements for grade indicated. B. Set and secure custom cabinets in place, assuring that they are rigid, plumb, and level. C. Use fixture attachments in concealed locations for wall mounted components. D. Use concealed joint fasteners to align and secure adjoining cabinet units. E. Carefully scribe casework abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Do not use additional overlay trim for this purpose. F. Secure cabinets to floor using appropriate angles and anchorages. G. Countersink anchorage devices at exposed locations. Conceal with solid wood plugs of species to match surrounding wood; finish flush with surrounding surfaces. ARCHITECTURAL WOOD 064100-3 CASEWORK Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Adjust installed work. B. Adjust moving or operating parts to function smoothly and correctly. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean casework, counters, shelves, hardware, fittings, and fixtures. END OF SECTION ARCHITECTURAL WOOD 064100-4 CASEWORK Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 SECTION 06 6500 SOLID POLYMER FABRICATIONS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. All countertops, backsplashes and skirting. B. All Window Sills. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide product description, fabrication information and compliance with specified performance requirements. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate fabrication details as related to rough support systems. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section and approved by manufacturer. B. Allowable Tolerances: 1. Variation in component size: +/-1/8" (3mm). 2. Location os openings: +/- 1/8" (3mm) from indicated location. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Deliver no components to project site in until areas are ready for installation. Store components indoors prior to installation. B. Handle materials to prevent damage to finished surfaces. Provide protective coverings to prevent physical damage or staining following installation for duration of the project. 1.05 WARRANTY A. See Section 01780 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion. C. Provide ten year manufacturer warranty for defects in materials. Warranty shall provide material and labor to repair or replace defective materials. Damage caused by physical or chemical abuse or damage shall not be required to warranted. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. CORIAN SURFACES from The Dupont Company. B. Avonite; Avonite, Inc. C. Fountainhead D. Gibraltar: Wilsonart International E. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. SOLID POLYMER 066500-1 FABRICATIONS Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 2.02 MATERIALS A. Solid Polymer Fabrications: 1/2" thick Homogeneous filled acrylic; not coated, laminated, or of composite construction; meeting ANSI Z124.3 & 6 , Type Six, and Fed. Spec. W W -P-541 E/GEN. 1. Material shall have minimum physical and performance properties as follows: Tensile Strength - 6000psi; Flexural Strength - 7950 psi; Work to Break - 2.48 in. lbs. 2. Superficial damage to a depth of 0.010" (.25mm) shall be repairable by sanding and polishing. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Joint Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard two-part adhesive kit to create inconspicuous, non -porous joints, with a chemical bond. 2.04 FABRICATION A. Fabrications to be performed by a Certified CORIAN fabricator / installer.. B. Form joints between components using manufacturer's standard joint adhesive. Joints shall be inconspicuous in appearance and without voids. Attach 2" wide reinforcing strip of Corian under each joint.. C. Rout and finish component edges to a smooth, uniform finish. Rout all cutouts, then sand all edges smooth. Repair or reject defective or inaccurate work. 2.05 FACTORY FINISHING A. All surfaces shall have uniform finish. 1. Matte, with a gloss rating of 5 to 20 . PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify dimensions and rough -ins and other conditions. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install components plumb and level, in accordance with approved shop drawings and product installation details. C. Provide backsplashes and endsplashes as indicated on the drawings. Adhere to countertop using manuf. standard color - matched silicone sealant. D. Keep components and hands clean during installation. Remove adhesives, sealants and other stains. E. Protect surfaces from damage until Date of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION SOLID POLYMER 066500-2 FABRICATIONS Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 SECTION 07 1113 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Bituminous dampproofing. B. Protection boards. 1 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 02204 - Fill and Backfill. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM D41/D41 M - Standard Specification for Asphalt Primer Used in Roofing, Dampproofing, and Waterproofing; 2011. B. ASTM D449/D449M - Standard Specification for Asphalt Used in Dampproofing and Waterproofing; 2003 (Reapproved 2014). C. ASTM D1187/D1187M - Standard Specification for Asphalt -Base Emulsions for Use as Protective Coatings for Metal; 1997 (Reapproved 2011). D. ASTM D1227 - Standard Specification for Emulsified Asphalt Used as a Protective Coating for Roofing; 2013. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide properties of primer, bitumen, and mastics. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with at least three years of experience. 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperatures above 40 degrees F for 24 hours before and during application ( -- until dampproofing has cured. i PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Bituminous Dampproofing Manufacturers: 1. Karnak Corporation: www.karnakcorp.com. 2. Mar -Flex Systems, Inc: www.mar-flex.com/sle. 3. W.R. Meadows, Inc: www.wrmeadows.com/sle. 4. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING A. Bituminous Dampproofing: Cold -applied water-based emulsion; asphalt with mineral colloid or chemical emulsifying agent; with fiber reinforcement; asbestos -free; suitable for application on vertical and horizontal surfaces. BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 071113-1 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 1. Composition -Vertical Application: ASTM D1227 Type III or ASTM D1187/D1187M Type I. 2. Composition - Horizontal and Low -Slope Application: ASTM D1227 Type II or III. 3. VOC Content: Not more than permitted by local, State, and federal regulations. 4. Applied Thickness: 1/16 inch, minimum, wet film. B. Primers, Mastics, and Related Materials: Type as recommended by dampproofing manufacturer. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Protection Board: 1/8 inch thick biodegradable hardboard. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify substrate surfaces are durable, free of matter detrimental to adhesion or application of dampproofing system. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Protect adjacent surfaces not designated to receive dampproofing. B. Clean and prepare surfaces to receive dampproofing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Surfaces must be clean, dry, and free from oil, grease, release agents, laitance, dirt, dust and debris. All cracks and pin holes shall be repaired and filled with trowel mastic prior to coating. D. Do not apply dampproofing to surfaces unacceptable to manufacturer. E. Apply mastic to seal penetrations, small cracks, or minor honeycomb in substrate. 3.03 APPLICATION A. Prime surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Apply bitumen with roller. C. Apply bitumen at top of footings, between the footing and the foundation wall, before foundation wall concrete forms are set in place. D. Apply bitumen in one coat, continuous and uniform, at a rate of 4 gal/100 sq ft per coat. E. Apply from 2 inches below finish grade elevation down to top of footings. F. Seal items projecting through dampproofing surface with mastic. Seal watertight. G. Tools and other equipment shall be cleaned with mineral spirits, taking all necessary precautions with handling of combustible materials. H. Allow film to cure at least 24 to 48 hours prior to backfilling. Care shall be taken to avoid damage or penetration of the coating. I. Coordinate placement of protection board directly over dampproofing, butt joints, and adhere to tacky dampproofing. Scribe and cut boards around projections, penetrations, and interruptions. 41IZe]a&WONIWZI BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 071113-2 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 SECTION 07 2100 THERMAL INSULATION l_li ift�l � � l �7_1fi 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Board insulation at cavity wall construction, perimeter foundation wall, and underside of floor slabs where shown. B. Board insulation at continous exterior inuslaiton. C. Batt insulation and vapor retarder in exterior wall construction. D. Sound Batt where shown. E. Blown -in insualation in top floor ceiling. Spec in 07 2126. F. Foam -in -Place Insulation at roof sheathing and rim joist around roof. Spec in 07 2119 G. Batt insulation for filling perimeter window and door shim spaces and crevices in exterior wall and roof. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C578 - Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation; 2015a. B. ASTM C665 - Standard Specification for Mineral -Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing; 2012. C. ASTM D2842 - Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Rigid Cellular Plastics; 2006. D. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2015a. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 013000 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance criteria, and product limitations. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include information on special environmental conditions required for installation and installation techniques. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 APPLICATIONS A. Insulation Under Concrete Slabs: Extruded polystyrene board. B. Insulation at Perimeter of Foundation: Extruded polystyrene board. C. Continuous insulation exterior Wall sheating: Expanded polystyrene board. D. Continuous insulation exterior Wall sheating behind brick veneer: Expanded polystyrene board. E. Insulation in Wood Framed Walls: Batt insulation with integral vapor retarder. F. Insulation in Wood Framed Ceiling Structure: Blown -insulation with separate vapor retarder. Spec'd Section 07 2126 G. Insulation to control air born sound: Sound Batt insulation with no vapor retarder. THERMAL INSULATION 072100-1 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 2.02 FOAM BOARD INSULATION MATERIALS APPS defined above in Section 2.01 A. APP C: Expanded Polystyrene (EPS) Unfaced Board Insulation: ASTM C578, Type I; with the following characteristics: 1. Flame Spread Index (FSI): Class A - 0 to 25, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 2. Smoke Developed Index (SDI): 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 3. Board Size: 24 by 96 inch or 48 x 96 inch with a score at 24". 4. Board Thickness: 1-1/2 inches at Walls behind metal covering. 5. Board Edges: Square. 6. Water Absorption: 4 percent by volume, maximum. 7. Compressive Resistance: 10 psi. 8. Thermal Resistance: R -value of 3.8 per 1 inch at 75 degrees F mean temperature. 9. Perm rating: 4 or more. No facers on the product. 10. Manufacturers: a. AFM Corp: www,r-control.com. b. Diversifoam Products: www.diversifoam.com. c. Insulfoam LLC: www,insulfoam.com/sle. d. Insulfoam LLC; InsulFoam Below Grade Insulation - www.insulfoam.com/sle. B. APP D: Expanded Polystyrene (EPS) Unfaced Board Insulation: ASTM C578, Type I; with the following characteristics: 1. Flame Spread Index (FSI): Class A - 0 to 25, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 2. Board Size: 48 by 96 inch. 3. Board Thickness" 1" at brick veneer walls. 4. Board edges: Tongue -and -Grooved. 5. Compressive Resistance: 10 psi. 6. Thermal Resistance: R -value of 3.8 per 1 inch at 75 degrees F mean temperature. 7. Perm rating: 4 or more. No facers on the product. 8. Manufacturers: See 2.02 B (10) above. C. APPs A&B: Extruded Polystyrene Board Insulation: Extruded polystyrene board; ASTM C578; with either natural skin or cut cell surfaces, and the following characteristics: 1. Flame Spread Index: 25 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 2. Flame Spread Index: 75 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 3. Smoke Developed Index: 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 4. R -value; 1 inch of material at 72 degrees F: 5, minimum. 5. Board Size: 24 x 96 inch. 6. Board Thickness: 2 inches. 7. Board Edges: Square. 8. Thermal Conductivity (k factor) at 25 degrees F: 0.18. 9. Compressive Resistance: 25 psi. 10. Board Density: 1.3 Ib/cu ft. 11. Water Absorption, Maximum: 0.3 percent, by volume. 12. Manufacturers: a. Dow Chemical Company: www.dow.com. b. Kingspan Insulation LLC; GreenGuard XPS TYPE IV 25 PSI: www.trustgreenguard.com. c. Owens Corning Corporation; FOAMULAR Extruded Polystyrene (XPS) Insulation: www.ocbuildingspec.com/ste. THERMAL INSULATION 072100-2 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 2.03 BATT INSULATION MATERIALS A. APP E: Batt Insulation: ASTM C 665; preformed glass fiber batt; conforming to the following: 1. Locations: a. Exterior Walls @ 2x6 Studs. b. Common Walls between apartments & three (3) Mech Rms above breezeways. (R19) 2. Thermal Resistance: R of 21. 3. Thickness: 5.5 inch. 4. Width: 16" nominal. 5. Facing: Faced on one side with aluminum foil. 6. Manufacturers: a. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com. b. Johns Manville International, Inc: www.johnsmanville.com. c. Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscorning.com. 7. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. B. APP G: Mineral Fiber Batt Insulation: Flexible or semi-rigid preformed batt or blanket, complying with ASTM C665; friction fit; unlaced flame spread index of 0 (zero) when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 1. Smoke Developed Index: 0 (zero), when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 2. Thickness: 3 1/2 inch. 3. Manufacturers: a. Johns Manville; MinWool Sound Attenuation Fire Batts: www.jm.com/sle. b. Thermafiber, Inc; SAFB: www.thermafiber.com. c. ROXUL, Inc; COMFORTBATT: www.roxul.com/sle. d. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 4. Locations: a. Party Walls betweeen apartments - Batts in both studs forming the party walls. b. Above Gyp Bd Ceilings where apartment occur above - One layer at bottom chord of wood joists. c. Walls around Toilet Rooms within apartments. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Sheet Vapor Retarder: Below roof joists clear polyethylene film for above grade application, 10 mil thick. B. Tape: Bright aluminum self -adhering type, mesh reinforced, 2 inch wide. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate, adjacent materials, and insulation materials are dry and that substrates are ready to receive insulation. B. Verify substrate surfaces are flat, free of honeycomb, fins, irregularities, or materials or substances that may impede adhesive bond. 3.02 BOARD INSTALLATION AT FOUNDATION PERIMETER A. Apply adhesive to back of boards: 1. Three continuous beads per board length. B. Install boards horizontally on foundation perimeter where indicated on wall sections. 1. Place boards to maximize adhesive contact. 2. Install in running bond pattern. 3. Butt edges and ends tightly to adjacent boards and to protrusions. C. Cut and fit insulation tightly to protrusions or interruptions to the insulation plane. THERMAL INSULATION 072100-3 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 3.03 BOARD INSTALLATION AT EXTERIOR WALLS A. Install boards horizontally on walls. 1. Place boards horizontally tight between "Z" studs. (Spec's 05 4000 2. Install in running bond pattern. B. Cut and fit insulation tightly to protrusions or interruptions to the insulation plane. C. Tape insulation board joints. 3.04 BOARD INSTALLATION AT CAVITY WALLS A. Install boards to fit snugly between wall ties. 1. Where gaps between boards are created by wall ties. 2. Push board down over brick ties to eliminate any gaps. 3. Cut board square at any damaged corners. 4. No joints allowed more than 1/16". 5. Tape over all joints after installtion of the insulation panels. Use a manufacturer approved tape. B. Install boards horizontally on walls. 1. Install in running bond pattern. 2. Butt edges and ends tightly to adjacent boards and to protrusions. C. Cut and fit insulation tightly to protrusions or interruptions to the insulation plane. 3.05 BOARD INSTALLATION UNDER CONCRETE SLABS A. Place insulation under slabs on grade after base for slab has been compacted. ( 2 feet in from perimeter as detailed. This requirement is for exterior perimeter of the office building only.) B. Cut and fit insulation tightly to protrusions or interruptions to the insulation plane. C. Prevent insulation from being displaced or damaged while placing vapor retarder and placing slab. 3.06 BATT INSTALLATION A. Install insulation, and vapor retarder in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install in exterior wall spaces without gaps or voids. Do not compress insulation. C. Staple vapor barrier to stud face. Do not compress the staple flange into the side of the stud. D. Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Insulate miscellaneous gaps and voids. E. Fit insulation tightly in cavities and tightly to exterior side of mechanical and electrical services within the plane of the insulation. F. Install with factory applied vapor retarder membrane facing warm side of building spaces. Lap ends and side flanges of membrane over framing members. G. Staple or nail facing flanges in place at maximum 6 inches on center. H. Tape seal butt ends, lapped flanges, and tears or cuts in membrane. I. At wood framing, place vapor retarder on warm side of insulation by stapling at 6 inches on center. Lap and seal sheet retarder joints over member face. J. Tape seal tears or cuts in vapor retarder. K. Extend vapor retarder tightly to full perimeter of adjacent window and door frames and other items interrupting the plane of the membrane. Tape seal in place. 3.07 PROTECTION A. Do not permit installed insulation to be damaged prior to its concealment. END OF SECTION THERMAL INSULATION 072100-4 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 SECTION 07 2119 FOAMED -IN-PLACE INSULATION PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Foamed -in-place insulation. 1. 2" Open -Cell foam on the underside of roof sheathing 2. Foam Rim Joist from wall to the roof. (Average of 14" vertical around perimeter) 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C518 - Standard Test Method for Steady -State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus; 2010. B. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2015a. C. ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2014. D. ASTM E2178 - Standard Test Method for Air Permeance of Building Materials; 2013. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide product description, insulation properties, overcoat properties, and preparation requirements. C. Certificates: Certify that products of this section meet or exceed specified requirements. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products of the type specified in this section, with not less than five years of documented experience. B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified, with minimum three years documented experience. 1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not apply foam when temperature is below that specified by the manufacturer for ambient air and substrate. B. Do not apply foam when temperature is within 5 degrees F of dew point. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis of Design: Icynene Classic Open -Cell, Low density, 100% water -blown polyurethane foam. B. Foamed -In -Place Insulation: 1. BASF Corporation; WALLTITE US Series Closed Cell: www.spf.basf.com. 2. Gaco Western: www.gaco.com. FOAMED -IN-PLACE 07 2119 -1 INSULATION Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 3. Icynene Inc; Icynene Classic LD -C-50: www.icynene.com. 4. Johns Manville; JM Corbond III Closed Cell Spray Polyurethane Foam: www.jm.com/sle. 5. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Foamed -In -Place Insulation: Low-density, flexible, open celled, water vapor permeable polyurethane foam; foamed on-site, using blowing agent of water or non -ozone-depleting gas. 1. Aged Thermal Resistance: R -value of 3.7 (deg F hr sq ft)/Btu, minimum, when tested at 1 inch thickness in accordance with ASTM C518 after aging for 180 days at 41 degrees F. 2. Air Permeance: 0.004 cfm/sq ft, maximum, when tested at intended thickness in accordance with ASTM E2178 or ASTM E283 at 1.5 psf. 3. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 25/450, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 4. Water Absorption: Less than 5 percent by volume, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D2842. 5. Water Vapor Permeance: Vapor retarder; 11 perm, maximum, when tested at intended thickness in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M, desiccant method. 6. Color: Cream (if Icynene) 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Primer: As required by insulation manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify work within construction spaces or crevices is complete prior to insulation application. B. Verify that surfaces are clean, dry, and free of matter that may inhibit insulation or overcoat adhesion. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Mask and protect adjacent surfaces from over spray or dusting. B. Apply primer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.03 APPLICATION A. Apply insulation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Apply insulation by spray method, to a uniform monolithic density without voids. C. Apply to a minimum cured thickness of 2 inch, minimum.. D. Patch damaged areas. E. Where applied to voids and gaps assure space for expansion to avoid pressure on adjacent materials that may bind operable parts. F. Trim excess away for applied trim or remove as required for continuous sealant bead. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspections and tests will be performed by an independent testing agency under provisions of Section 014000 - Quality Requirements. B. Inspection will include verification of insulation and overcoat thickness and density. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Do not permit subsequent construction work to disturb applied insulation. END OF SECTION FOAMED -IN-PLACE 072119-2 INSULATION Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 SECTION 07 2126 BLOWN INSULATION PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Ceiling: Loose insulation pneumatically placed . B. Netting of trusses to allow blown insulation to be installed and inspected from below. C. Provide clear plastic vapor barrier on bottom of joists. (Specified in Section 07 2100.) 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 2100 -Thermal Insulation. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C764 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Loose -Fill Thermal Insulation; 2011. B. ASTM C1015 -Standard Practice for Installation of Cellulosic and Mineral Fiber Loose -Fill Thermal Insulation; 2006 (Reapproved 2011). 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Materials of This Section: Provide continuity of thermal barrier at building enclosure elements, in conjunction with Section 07 2100. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance criteria, limitations . C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate procedure for preparation and installation. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordinate the work with Section 07 2100 for placement of insulation materials. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Blown Insulation: 1. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com. 2. GreenFiber: www.greenfiber.com. 3. International Cellulose Corp: www.spray-on.com. 4. Johns Manville: www,jm.com. B. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Loose Fill Insulation: ASTM C764, glass fiber type, bulk for pneumatic placement. 1. Fill Depth: Place Blown Insulation to a compacted density to fill the entire joist space. 2. Thermal Conductivity: 0.27 BTU in/(hr sq ft deg F). 3. R value: 3.7 4. Installed Weight: 0.65 #/sgft. BLOWN INSULATION 072126-1 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 5. Installed Thickness: Full depth of entire cavity within sloped taper of Wood-I-Joists.(12" average over roof area.) 6. Average Thermal Resistance: R -value of 44 (deg F hr sq ft)/Btu. B. Vapor Barrier: 10 mil reinforced plastic stapled to bottom of joists prior to blow-in insulation. (Specified in Section 07 2100.) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate, adjacent materials, and insulation are dry and ready to receive insulation. B. Verify spaces are unobstructed to allow placement of insulation. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install insulation in accordance with ASTM C1015 and manufacturer's instructions. B. Use netting at bottom of joists to allow air to escape as insulation compacts. (Do not use Plastic Vapor to support installation.) C. Completely fill intended spaces. Leave no gaps or voids. D. Assure insulation is tightly installed to avoid settlement. E. Repair and reseal insulation access ports. Refinish to match disturbed work. 3.03 CLEANING A. Remove loose insulation residue. 3.04 FINAL INSPECTION BY THIS SUB -CONTRACTOR A. Inspect all upper level apartments prior to gypsum board is installed. B. Verify no other tradesman have disturbed the insulation install. C. In any anomalies are present, repair and reinstall insulation to match original material. D. Assure the plastic vapor barrier is installed just before the work of gypsum ceiling commences.. I��IZ�7�9xNILH�1 BLOWN INSULATION 072126-2 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 SECTION 07 2500 WEATHER BARRIERS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Air Barriers: Materials that form a system to stop passage of air through exterior walls and joints around frames of openings in exterior walls. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Weather Barrier: Assemblies that form either water -resistive barriers, air barriers, or vapor retarders. B. Air Barrier: Air tight barrier made of material that is relatively air impermeable but water vapor permeable, both to the degree specified, with sealed seams and with sealed joints to adjacent surfaces. Note: For the purposes of this specification, vapor impermeable air barriers are classified as vapor retarders. C. Vapor Retarder: Air tight barrier made of material that is relatively water vapor impermeable, to the degree specified, with sealed seams and with sealed joints to adjacent surfaces. 1. Water Vapor Permeance: For purposes of conversion, 57.2 ng/(Pa s sq m) = 1 perm. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2015a. B. ASTM E96/E96M -Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2014. C. ASTM E2178 -Standard Test Method for Air Permeance of Building Materials; 2013. D. ICC -ES AC38 -Acceptance Criteria for Water -Resistive Barriers; ICC Evaluation Service, Inc; 2013. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on material characteristics. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 WEATHER BARRIER ASSEMBLIES A. Air and Water Resistive Barrier: 1. On outside surface of continuous insulation board on exterior walls use air barrier sheet, self-adhesive type with staples around windows and doors. 2.02 AIR BARRIER MATERIALS (WATER VAPOR PERMEABLE AND WATER -RESISTIVE) A. Air Barrier Sheet, Self -Adhered: 1. Air Permeance: 0.004 cubic feet per minute per square foot, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E2178. 2. Water Vapor Permeance: 10 perms, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M Procedure A (desiccant procedure). 3. Ultraviolet and Weathering Resistance: Approved in writing by manufacturer for maximum of 150 days weather exposure. WEATHER BARRIERS 072500-1 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 4. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index of 25 or less, smoke developed index of 450 or less (Class A), when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 5. Water Resistance: Comply with applicable water -resistive requirements of ICC -ES AC38. 6. Seam and Perimeter Tape: As recommended by sheet manufacturer. 7. Products: a. Carlisle Coatings and Waterproofing, Inc.; Fire Resist 705 VP: www.carlisleccw.com/sle. b. Cosella-Dorken Products, Inc.; DELTA® -VENT SA: www.cosella-dorken.COM. c. Henry Company; Blueskin VP100: www.henry.com/sle. d. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Sealants, Tapes, and Accessories for Sealing Weather Barrier and Sealing Weather Barrier to Adjacent Substrates: As specified or as recommended by weather barrier manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. and B. Air and Water Resistive Barrier: Install continuous air tight barrier over surfaces indicated, with sealed seams and with sealed joints to adjacent surfaces with sheets lapped to shed water.. C. Self -Adhesive Sheets: 1. Prepare substrate in manner recommended by sheet manufacturer; fill and tape joints in substrate and between dissimilar materials. 2. Lap sheets shingle -fashion to shed water and seal laps air tight. 3. Once sheets are in place, press firmly into substrate with resilient hand roller; ensure that all laps are firmly adhered with no gaps or fishmouths. 4. Use same material, or other material approved by sheet manufacturer for the purpose, to seal to adjacent construction and as flashing. 5. At wide joints, provide extra flexible membrane allowing joint movement. D. Openings and Penetrations in Exterior Weather Barriers: 1. Install flashing over sills, covering entire sill frame member, extending at least 5 inches onto weather barrier and at least 6 inches up jambs; mechanically fasten stretched edges. 2. At openings to be filled with frames having nailing flanges, seal head and jamb flanges using a continuous bead of sealant compressed by flange and cover flanges with at least 4 inches wide; do not seal sill flange. 3. At openings to be filled with non -flanged frames, seal weather barrier to all sides of opening framing, using flashing at least 9 inches wide, covering entire depth of framing. 4. At head of openings, install flashing under weather barrier extending at least 2 inches beyond face of jambs; seal weather barrier to flashing. 5. At interior face of openings, seal gap between window/door frame and rough framing, using joint sealant over backer rod. 6. Service and Other Penetrations: Form flashing around penetrating item and seal to weather barrier surface. 3.02 PROTECTION A. Do not leave materials exposed to weather longer than recommended by manufacturer. B. Do not leave paper- or felt -based barriers exposed to weather for longer than one week. END OF SECTION WEATHER BARRIERS 072500-2 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 SECTION 07 4213 METAL WALL PANELS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Manufactured metal panels for walls, with related flashings and accessory components. B. Pre -Install meeting with General Contractor and Metal Installer prior to installation. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy -Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process; 2015. 1.03 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Provide continuity of air barrier seal at building enclosure elements in conjunction with materials specified in Section 07 2500. B. Take caution to not damage the air barrier. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, layout, joints, construction details, methods of anchorage. C. Samples: Submit two samples of wall panel, 8 inch by 12 inch in size illustrating finish color, sheen, and texture. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum ten years of documented experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Workers experienced in performing the work of this section with minimum three years of experience. 1.06 MOCK-UP A. Construct mock-up, 20 feet long by 10 feet wide; include panel system, attachments to building, associated air seal materials, sealants and seals in mock-up. B. Locate where directed. C. Mock-up may remain as part of the Work. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect panels from accelerated weathering by removing or venting sheet plastic shipping wrap. B. Store prefinished material off ground and protected from weather. Prevent twisting, bending, or abrasion, and provide ventilation to stored materials. Slope metal sheets to ensure drainage. C. Prevent contact with materials that may cause discoloration or staining of products. 1.08 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Correct defective work within a 30 year period after Substantial Completion for degradation of panel finish, including color fading caused by exposure to weather. C. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Substantial Completion, including defects in water tightness and integrity of seals. METAL WALL PANELS 074213-1 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. MBCI; Product 7.2 Panel: www.mbci.com. 2.02 MANUFACTURED METAL PANELS A. Wall Panel: Factory fabricated prefinished metal panel, site assembled. 1. Provide "7.2" Panel for installed both Vertical and Horizontal. 2. Fabricate panels with 26 Guage coated sheet metal. 3. Provide all product as Reverse Rolled to allow that lap fasteners can be installed in the low ribs. 4. Provide and size components to withstand dead and live loads caused by positive and negative wind pressure acting normal to plane of wall. 5. Design Pressure: a. Negative Design Pressure: 25 psf 6. Fabrication: Formed true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects; pieces of longest practical lengths. 7. Corners (both interior and exterior): Fabricate as detailed matching the wall panels and colors. B. Finished Colored Metal 1. Pre -Finished Galvanized Steel: ASTM A653/A653M, with G902275 zinc coating; minimum 0.02 inch thick base metal, shop pre -coated with PVDF coating. a. MBCI finish: Signiture 200 paint system of themoset coating consisting of a proprietary polyester resin modified by silicone resin. b. Colors to Match Walls: Polar White, Saddle Tan & Koko Brown. 2. Panel Back Coating: Panel manufacturer's standard polyester or acrylic wash coat. 3. Custom Fluoropolymer Coating System: Polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF) multi -coat thermoplastic fluoropolymer coating system, including minimum 70 percent PVDF color topcoat and minimum total dry film thickness of 0.9 mil; color and gloss as selected from manufacturer's standard line. C. Trim: Same material, thickness and finish as exterior sheets; brake formed to required profiles. D. Anchors: Galvanized steel. 2.03 MATERIALS A. Precoated Steel Sheet: Hot -dipped galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A653/A653M Structural Steel (SS) or Forming Steel (FS), with G90/Z275 coating; continuous coil -coated on exposed surfaces with specified finish coating and on panel back with specified panel back coating. 2.04 FABRICATION A. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects. B. Form pieces in longest practicable lengths. METAL WALL PANELS 074213-2 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that weather barrier has been installed over substrate completely and correctly. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install panels on walls in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Protect surfaces in contact with cementitious materials and dissimilar metals with bituminous paint. Allow to dry prior to installation. C. Fasten panels to structural supports; aligned, level, and plumb. D. Locate joints over supports. Lap panel ends minimum 2 inches. E. Drill for exposed fasteners in "gang stack" to assure alignment of fasteners on the wall. F. Seal and place gaskets to prevent weather penetration. Maintain neat appearance. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Offset From True Alignment Between Adjacent Members Butting or In Line: 1/16 inch. B. Maximum Variation from Plane or Location Indicated on Drawings: 1/4 inch. 3.04 CLEANING A. Remove site cuttings from finish surfaces. B. Clean and wash prefinished surfaces with mild soap and water; rinse with clean water. END OF SECTION METAL WALL PANELS 074213-3 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 SECTION 07 5400 THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Mechanically attached system with thermoplastic roofing membrane. B. Insulation, tapered. C. Coverboard over wood deck sheathing. D. Flashings. E. Roofing stack boots. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 1000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY: Wood sheathing and parapets.. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C177 - Standard Test Method for Steady -State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded -Hot -Plate Apparatus; 2013. B. ASTM C578 - Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation; 2015a. C. ASTM C1177/C1177M - Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as Sheathing; 2013. D. ASTM C1289 - Standard Specification for Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation Board; 2014. E. ASTM D6878/D6878M - Standard Specification for Thermoplastic Polyolefin Based Sheet Roofing; 2013. F. NRCA (ML 104) - The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual; National Roofing Contractors Association, Fifth Edition, with interm updates. G. UL (DIR) - Online Certifications Directory; current listings at database.ul.com. H. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; current edition. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week before starting work of this section. 1. Review preparation and installation procedures and coordinating and scheduling required with related work. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data indicating membrane materials, flashing materials, insulation, vapor retarder, surfacing, and fasteners. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate joint or termination detail conditions and conditions of interface with other materials. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate membrane seaming precautions and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. E. Roofer's Warranty: Submit Roofer's Warranty for 3 years for workmanship on Roofer's letterhead. F. Warranty: THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE 075400-1 ROOFING Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 1. Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. 2. Submit installer's certification that installation complies with all warranty conditions for the waterproof membrane. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum five years of documented experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with at least three years of documented experience. C. Perform work in accordance with NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual. 1. Maintain one copy on site. D. Membrane welding equipment shall be provided by or approved by Roofing Manufacturer. Mechanics intending to use equipment shall have successfully completed training course provided by Manufacturer's Technical Representative prior to welding. E. Foreman: No substitution of the Job Foreman or his Alternate will be made without written notification and approval of the Architect and Owner's Representative. F. Conditions which are unacceptable to the Architect or Owner and will not be tolerated are as follows: 1. Installation of defective materials. 2. Anchoring of roof material, insulation or other component with devices or fasteners different than those specified or shown. 3. Roofs not properly sealed off at the end of each work day. Roof must be completely watertight before roofing crews leave the site for the day. All flashings, pipe jacks and other work in -process must be completed by days' end. 4. Debris on roof. (ie., pieces of tin, nails, cans, wrappers, boxes,etc.) 5. Debris in roof drain sumps or areas upon project completion. G. Interpretations: When plans or specifications do not address a particular detail, contractor must follow good (experience proven) roofing practices and perform the work in accordance with the latest addition of NRCA Handbook involving said detail. Contact the Architect for guidance and approval in questionable situations. H. There shall be no deviation made from the contract specification or the approved shop drawings without written prior approval by the architect and the manufacturer. I. CODE CLASS: Provide assembly that conforms to a Class B Roof. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products in manufacturer's original containers, dry, undamaged, with seals and labels intact. B. Store products in weather protected environment, clear of ground and moisture. C. Membrane rolls shall be stored on pallets and fully protected from moisture with canvas tarpaulins. D. Bonding adhesives shall be stored at temperatures above 40 degrees, F. E. All flammable materials shall be stored in a cool, dry area away from sparks and open flames. Follow precautions outlined on container or supplied by manufacturer. F. Protect foam insulation from direct exposure to sunlight. THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE 075400-2 ROOFING Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not apply roofing membrane during unsuitable weather. I B. Do not apply roofing membrane when ambient temperature is below 40 degrees F or above 100 degrees F. C. Do not apply roofing membrane to damp or frozen deck surface or when precipitation is expected or occurring. D. Do not expose materials vulnerable to water or sun damage in quantities greater than can be weatherproofed the same day. E. Install only as much new roofing and flashings as can be made watertight each day. F. All roofing shall be completed without exposing the building interior, its' contents or employees to inclement weather. Relative to the roofing project, the contractor assumes all responsibility for maintaining the building in a dry condition during the project construction. G. All surfaces to receive new insulation, membrane or flashings shall be thoroughly dry. Should surface moisture occur, the contractor shall provide the necessary equipment to dry the surface prior to application. H. Temporary waterstops shall be installed at the end of each day's work and shall be removed before proceeding with the next day's work. I. Arrange work sequence to avoid use of newly constructed roofing for storage, walking surface and equipment movement. Where such access is absolutely required, the contractor shall provide all necessary protection and barriers to segregate the work area and to prevent damage to adjacent areas. J. Prior to and during application, all dirt, debris and dust shall be removed from surfaces either by vacuuming, sweeping, blowing with compressed air and/or similar methods. K. All new and existing roofing, insulation, flashings, adhesive cans, metal work and general construction debris shall be disposed of, properly following all applicable local, state and federal regulations. L. The contractor shall take precautions to not overload the existing roof deck or structure during construction activities. M. Liquid materials, such as solvents and adhesives, shall be stored and used away from open flame, sparks and excessive heat. N. Verify all roof drain lines are unblocked and free flowing prior to starting work. Report any blockage to the Architect and Owner's Representative. O. Stop work if any unusual or unsatisfactory condition is discovered. P. All areas affected by construction activities shall be cleaned prior to Substantial Completion. Q. Coordinate with Agency Representative to shut off air intake equipment during use of adhesives. R. Proceed with roofing work when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit work to be performed in accordance with manufacturerer's recommendations and warranty requirements. The Architect has the authority to stop the project due to threatening weather. However, it is the Contractor's responsibility to decide when to start roofing. S. Safety: Project safety is the sole responsibility of the Contractor. THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE 075400-3 ROOFING Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 1.09 WARRANTY 5/4/2017 A. Roofer's Project Warranty: Submit (3) executed copies of Installer's 3 -year Roofing Warranty to cover work of this Section including roofing membrane, flashing, embedded sheet metal, sheet metal counterflashing, roof insulation and roofing accessories; signed and countersigned by Installer (Roofer) and Contractor. B. Manufacturer's System Warranty: Provide twenty year manufacturer's material and labor warranty to cover failure to prevent penetration of water. Submit (3) executed copies of Roofing State of Idaho 20 year "Guarantee" with no dollar limit on materials, labor and workmanship. Guarantee to be signed by an authorized representative of the roofing system manufacturer. Exceptions NOT Permitted: Damage due to roof traffic. Damage due to wind speed greater than 75 mph but less than 90 mph. C. Provide manufacturer's wind speed warranty (90 MPH). PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Thermoplastic Polyolefin (TPO) Membrane Materials: 1. Carlisle Roofing Systems, Inc; Sure -Weld TPO: www.carlisle-syntec.com/sle. 2. Firestone Building Products, LLC; Ultraply: www.firestonebpco.com. 3. GAF; EverGuard TPO 60 mil: www.gaf.com/sle. 4. Johns Manville; TPO 60 mil: www.jm.com/sle. 5. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 ROOFING MEMBRANE AND ASSOCIATED MATERIALS A. Membrane: 1. Material: Thermoplastic polyolefin (TPO) complying with ASTM D6878/D6878M. 2. Reinforcing: Internal fabric. 3. Thickness: 0.060 inch, minimum. 4. Sheet Width: Factory fabricated into largest sheets possible X 5 ft. perimeter sheet width. 5. Solar Reflectance: 0.75, minimum, initial, and 0.65, minimum, 3 -year, certified by Cool Roof Rating Council. 6. Thermal Emissivity: 0.80, minimum, initial, and 0.79, minimum, 3 -year, certified by Cool Roof Rating Council. 7. Color: White. B. Seaming Materials: As recommended by membrane manufacturer. C. Membrane Fasteners: As recommended and approved by membrane manufacturer. 1. Disc Washers and Screws: Manufacturer's recommended size and attachment pattern. 2. Provide an attachment pattern and pull out calculation based on forces of 120 mph winds. 3. Membrane -surfaced washers and screws. D. Flexible Flashing Material: Same material as membrane. 2.03 DECK SHEATHING AND COVER BOARDS A. Deck Sheathing and Cover Board: Glass mat faced gypsum panels, ASTM C1177/C1177M, fire resistant type, 1/4 inch thick. 1. Manufacturers: a. Georgia-Pacific DensDeck, DensDeck Prime, or DensDeck DuraGuard: www.densdeck.com. b. National Gypsum Company; DEXcell FA Glass Mat Roof Board: www.nationaigypsum.com. c. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements. THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE 075400-4 ROOFING Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 2.04 INSULATION (NO INSULATION REQUIRED ABOVE STRUCTURAL DECK, EXCEPT TAPERED INSULATION.) A. Molded Expanded Polystyrene (EPS) Board Insulation: ASTM C578, Type XI; molded expanded polystyrene board with the following characteristics: 1. Tapered insulation: a. Factory tapered ESP sloped to indicted on drawings. 2. Board Size: 48 by 96 inch. 3. Board Thickness: 1 1/2" inches or thicker. 4. Tapered Board: Slope as indicated; minimum thickness 1/2 in; fabricate of fewest layers possible. 5. Board Edges: Square. 6. Board Density: 0.70 Ib/cu ft. 7. Compressive Resistance: 5.0 psi. 8. Thermal Resistance: R -value of 3.1 per 1 inch at 75 degrees F mean temperature using ASTM C177 test method. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Flashings: 0.060" TPO flashing membrane. B. Stack Boots: Prefabricated flexible boot and collar for pipe stacks through membrane; same material as membrane. C. Membrane Adhesive: As recommended by membrane manufacturer. D. Thinners and Cleaners: As recommended by adhesive manufacturer, compatible with membrane. E. Sealants: Caulks, water blocks and sealants as recommended by membrane manufacturer. F. Termination Bar: As recommended by the manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Perform work in accordance with NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual and manufacturer's instructions. B. Do not apply roofing membrane during unsuitable weather. C. Do not apply roofing membrane when ambient temperature is outside the temperature range recommended by manufacturer. D. Do not apply roofing membrane to damp or frozen deck surface or when precipitation is expected or occurring. E. Do not expose materials vulnerable to water or sun damage in quantities greater than can be weatherproofed the same day. F. Verify that surfaces and site conditions are ready to receive work. G. Verify deck is supported and secure. H. Verify deck is clean and smooth, flat, free of depressions, waves, or projections, properly sloped and suitable for installation of roof system. I. Verify deck surfaces are dry and free of snow or ice. 3.02 WOOD DECK PREPARATION A. Verify flatness and tightness of joints of wood decking. Fill knot holes with latex filler. B. Verify deck is supported and secure. C. Confirm dry deck by moisture meter with 12 percent moisture maximum. THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE 075400-5 ROOFING Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 3.03 INSTALLATION - GENERAL 5/4/2017 A. Perform work in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and NRCA (RM) applicable requirements. B. Do not apply roofing membrane during unsuitable weather. C. Do not apply roofing membrane when ambient temperature is outside the temperature range recommended by manufacturer. D. Do not apply roofing membrane to damp or frozen deck surface or when precipitation is expected or occurring. E. Do not expose materials vulnerable to water or sun damage in quantities greater than can be weatherproofed the same day. 3.04 COVER BOARD AND TAPERED INSULATION A. Install high density polyiso cover board in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for this situation. B. Lay boards with edges in moderate contact without forcing. Cut insulation to fit neatly to perimeter blocking and around penetrations through roof. C. Install tapered insulation in accordance with insulation manufacturer's shop drawings over existing insulation. D. Lay cover board over crickets, cutting at cricket valleys to fit contour. Offset board end joints in staggered pattern. E. Temporarily attach new cover board with fasteners recommended by membrane manufacturer in pattern indicated on the drawings. F. Do not apply more cover board than can be covered with membrane in the same day. 3.05 MEMBRANE APPLICATION A. Roll out membrane, free from wrinkles or tears. Place sheet into place without stretching. B. Shingle joints on sloped substrate in direction of drainage. C. Overlap edges and ends and seal seams by heat welding, minimum 3 inches. Seal permanently waterproof. D. Mechanical Attachment: Apply membrane and mechanical attachment devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. E. Hot-air Welding of Seams and Overlaps: 1. Adjacent sheets shall be welded in accordance with manufacturer's written iinstructions. All side and end joints shall be hot-air welded. Lap area shall be a minimum of 5" wide when machine or hand welded. 2. Welding equipment shall be provided by or approved by roofing manufacturer. 3. All surfaces to be welded shall be clean and dry. No adhesive shall be present within the lap areas. 4. Check all welded seams, after cooling, for continuity by use of a seam probe. Check seams daily and at end of entire project. 5. Each time welding equipment is started up, after cooling, contractor shall make a minimum of at least two test seams at least 2 inches long. F. At intersections with vertical surfaces: 1. Extend membrane over cant strips and up a minimum of 6 inches onto vertical surfaces. 2. Fully adhere flexible flashing over membrane and up to nailing strips. 3. Fully adhere flexible flashing over membrane and up to reglets, edge metal or cap flashings. G. Around roof penetrations, seal flanges and flashings with flexible flashing. H. All flashing shall be mechanically fastened at the top under or through appropriate counter flashing with approved fasteners as shown in the detail drawings. THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE 075400-6 ROOFING Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 I. Pipe flashings shall be installed in accordance with illustrated details. J. Install roofing expansion joints where indicated. Make joints watertight. K. Coordinate installation of roof drains and sumps and related flashings. L. Miscellaneous roofing installation conditions shall comply with membrane manufacturer's recommendations. M. Do not expose materials vulnerable to water or sun damage in quantities greater than can be weatherproofed during the same day. N. Check and repair seams at completion of work each day. O. All flashing shall be mechanically fastened at the top through appropriate counter flashing as shown in detail drawings. P. Secure flashing to nailing strips at 4 inches on center. Q. Around roof penetrations, seal flanges and flashings with flexible flashing. R. Coordinate installation of roof drains and sumps and related flashings. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 014000 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for field quality control and inspection. B. Require site attendance of roofing and insulation material manufacturers daily during installation of the Work. C. Water cut-offs must be provided by the roofing contractor where and when a danger exists that water caused by precipitation may get under the new roofing membrane. Water cut-offs shall be made by securely setting the end of the membrane in 6" wide continuous application of plastic roofing cement and weighting the adhered edge to prevent displacement of the cut-off. All temporary water cut-offs shall be removed prior to proceeding with the next work period by cutting off that portion of the membrane that has been in contact with the plastic roofing cement and disposing of it. Provide water cut-offs at end of each day. D. Roofing contractor shall "sweep" the roof at the end of each day with a rolling magnet to ensure that loose fasteners and pieces of metal do not remain on the roof membrane. E. Upon completion of the installation, an inspection shall be made by the manufacturer's technical representative to ascertain that the roofing system has been installed according to the manufacturer's published specifications and details. F. Roofing contractor shall be responsible to provide safe access to roof during roofing installation. G. All footwear on roof during the entire construction period shall be synthetic type. 3.07 CLEANING A. Remove bituminous markings from finished surfaces. B. In areas where finished surfaces are soiled by work of this section, consult manufacturer of surfaces for cleaning advice and conform to their documented instructions. C. Repair or replace defaced or damaged finishes caused by work of this section. 3.08 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect installed roofing and flashings from construction operations. Where traffic must continue over finished roof membrane, protect surfaces using durable materials. END OF SECTION THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE 075400-7 ROOFING • r �:. Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 SECTION 07 6200 SHEET METAL FLASHING, & TRIM PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fabricated sheet metal items, including flashings and counterflashings. 1. MBCI metal to match Metal Wall Panels. B. Sealants for joints within sheet metal fabrications. C. "Z" Channels horizontal for attachment of ext.cont. insulation and support Metal Wall Panels. D. Vertical strips (24 ga galy) attached to "Z" and support Horizontal Metal Wall Panels. E. Miscellaneous flashings shown. F. Structural Steel Specs in Structural Drawing 50.1 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Division 04 0000 - Masonry: Interface between metal siding and Masonry elements. B. Section 055000 - Misc Metal Fabrications: 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold -Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2015. B. ASTM B32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal; 2008 (Reapproved 2014). C. ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2014. D. CDA A4050 - Copper in Architecture - Handbook; current edition. E. SMACNA (ASMM) -Architectural Sheet Metal Manual; 2012. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate material profile, jointing pattern, jointing details, fastening methods, flashings, terminations, and installation details if different from architectural details. C. Samples: Submit two samples, 12" x 12" inch in size illustrating material & typical finish.. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with SMACNA (ASMM) and CDA A4050 requirements and standard details, except as otherwise indicated. B. Fabricator and Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in sheet metalwork with five years of documented experience. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack material to prevent twisting, bending, and abrasion, and to provide ventilation. Slope metal sheets to ensure drainage. B. Prevent contact with materials that could cause discoloration or staining. SHEET METAL FLASHING, & 07 6200 -1 TRIM Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 171 ii'19&]1q�1 2.01 SHEET MATERIALS A. Concealed Flashings and attachment cleats: 1. Galvanized Steel @ concealed flashings: ASTM A653/A653M, with G90/Z275 zinc coating; minimum 0.02 inch (27 ga) thick base metal. 2. Galvanized Steel @ attachment cleats or clips: ASTM A653/A653M, with G90/Z275 zinc coating; minimum 0.034 inch (22 ga) thick base metal. B. Pre -Finished Colored Metal 1. Pre -Finished Galvanized Steel: ASTM A653/A653M, with G90/Z275 zinc coating; minimum 0.02 inch thick base metal, shop pre -coated with PVDF coating. a. MBCI finish: Signiture 200 paint system of themoset coating consisting of a proprietary polyester resin modified by silicone resin. b. Colors to Match Walls: Polar White, Saddle Tan & Koko Brown. c. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's custom colors to match windows. C. Exposed to view Siding Panels and flashings 1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A666 Type 304, soft temper, 0.0219 inch thick, 25 gauge; smooth, unpolished "B" finish. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Wall "Z" Furring: Equal to Scafco Supreme 2" Z furring @ 0.0295" thick metal for installation of foam insulation under steel panel siding.. ( Insulation specifed to be furnished by Section 07 2100.) B. Hat Shaped Furring Channels: Formed steel, minimum 3/8 inch deep x 7/8 inch high, overlapped splicing permitted; galvanized. Provide Scafco D20 or equal. C. Fastners and break shape metals as shown in details. See Drawing A 8.5. D. Fasteners: Stainless steel, with soft neoprene washers. E. Primer: Zinc chromate type. F. Sealant to be Concealed in Completed Work: Non -curing butyl sealant. G. Sealant to be Exposed in Completed Work: ASTM C920; elastomeric sealant, 100 percent silicone with minimum movement capability of plus/minus 25 percent and recommended by manufacturer for substrates to be sealed; clear. H. Sealant: Types 2 specified in Section 07 9005, depending on application. I. Plastic Cement: ASTM D4586/D4586M, Type I. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects. B. Form pieces as detailed. C. Hem exposed edges on underside 1/2 inch; miter and seam corners. D. Form material with flat lock seams, except where otherwise indicated. At moving joints, use sealed lapped, bayonet-type or interlocking hooked seams. E. Fabricate corners from one piece with minimum 18 inch long legs; seam for rigidity, seal with sealant. F. Fabricate flashings to allow toe to extend 2 inches over roofing gravel. Return and brake edges. SHEET METAL FLASHING, & 076200-2 TRIM Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, and vents through roof are solidly set, reglets in place, and nailing strips located. B. Verify roofing termination and base flashings are in place, sealed, and secure. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Install starter and edge strips, and cleats before starting installation. B. Back paint concealed metal surfaces with protective backing paint to a minimum dry film thickness of 15 mil. 3.03 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Conform to drawing details. B. Secure flashings in place using concealed fasteners. Use exposed fasteners only where permitted. C. Fit flashings tight in place. Make corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and lines accurate to profiles. D. Seal metal joints watertight. E. Connect downspouts to downspout boots. Grout connection watertight. 3.04 INSTALLATION, METAL WALL PANELS A. Install metal siding system as shown on Drawing A 8.5 that will minimize fasteners penetration of Air & Vapor Barrier. B. Provide fastners as shown or larger to assure wind induced pull-out loads. C. Fabricate metal Panels, cleats and flashings as detailed. If changes are proposed, submit alternative drawings for approval. D. Verify and Coordinate sizes of panels prior to fabrication to assure vertical layout is valid. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 014000 - Quality Requirements, for field inspection requirements. B. Inspection will involve surveillance of work during installation to ascertain compliance with specified requirements. END OF SECTION SHEET METAL FLASHING,& 076200-3 TRIM "\ ,7 .. �i.=r .. d Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 SECTION 07 9005 JOINT SEALERS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Sealants and joint backing. B. Sealants assocaited with Weather Barrier (Section 07 2727) are not included in this Section. C. Sealants involving buildings, slabs, openings, etc. Exterior pavement sealants are specified in Civil Section 321373. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Sealants required in conjunction with air barriers and vapor retarders: B. Section 08 8000 - Glazing: Glazing sealants and accessories. C. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Acoustic sealant. D. Section 09 3000 - Tiling: Sealant used as tile grout. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C834 - Standard Specification for Latex Sealants; 2014. B. ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2014, C. ASTM C1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2013. D. ASTM D1667 - Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials--Poly(Vinyl Chloride) Foam (Closed -Cell); 2005 (Reapproved 2011). E. SCAQMD 1168 - South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168; current edition. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordinate the work with other sections referencing this section. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data indicating sealant chemical characteristics. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Maintain one copy of each referenced document covering installation requirements on site. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. C. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three years documented experience and approved by manufacturer. 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and after installation. JOINT SEALERS 079005-1 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 1.08 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Correct defective work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion. C. Warranty: Include coverage for installed sealants and accessories which fail to achieve watertight seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Silicone Sealant: Mildew Resistant 1. Bostik Inc: www.bostik-us.com. 2. Momentive Performance Materials, Inc (formerly GE Silicones): www.momentive.com. 3. Pecora Corporation; 890NST Ultra Low Modulus Architectural Silicone Sealant - Class 100: www.pecora.com. 4. BASF Construction Chemicals -Building Systems: www.buildingsystems.basf.com. 5. Red Devil; 100% Silicone Industrial Grade RTV Sealant: www.reddevil.com. 6. Tremco Global Sealants: www.tremcosealants.com. B. Polyurethane Sealant: Chemical Resistant 1. Bostik Inc: www.bostik-us.com. 2. Pecora Corporation; DynaTrol I -XL General Purpose One Part Polyurethane Sealant: www.pecora.com. 3. BASF Construction Chemicals -Building Systems; Product Sonolastic NP1: www.buildingsystems.basf.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements. C. Polyurethane Sealant: Trafficable 1. Bostik Inc: www.bostik-us.com. 2. Pecora Corporation; DynaTrol I -XL General Purpose One Part Polyurethane Sealant: www.pecora.com. 3. BASF Construction Chemicals -Building Systems; Product Sonolastic Ultra: www.buildingsystems.basf.com. D. Acrylic Sealants (ASTM C920): 1. Tremco Global Sealants: www.tremcosealants.com. 2. Red Devil; Siliconized Acrylic Construction Grade (35 Year) Sealant: www.reddevii.com. 3. Sherwin-Williams Company; Shermax Urethanized Elastomeric Sealant: www.sherwin-williams.com. E. Butyl Sealants: 1. Bostik Inc: www,bostik-us.com. 2. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com. 3. Sherwin-Williams Company; Storm Blaster All Season Sealant: www.sherwin-williams.com. 4. Tremco Global Sealants: www.tremcosealants.com. 5. Pecora Corporation; Dynapoxy EP -1200 Two -Part Epoxy Security Sealant: www.pecora.com. 6. BASF Corp,; Product MasterFlex 350. 7. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements, F. Preformed Compressible Foam Sealers: 1. EMSEAL Joint Systems, Ltd: www.emseal.com. 2. Sandell Manufacturing Company, Inc: www.sandellmfg.com. 3. Dayton Superior Corporation: www.daytonsuperior.com. 4. Tremco Global Sealants: www.tremcosealants.com. JOINT SEALERS 079005-2 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 2.02 SEALANTS A. Sealants and Primers - General: Provide only products having lower volatile organic compound (VOC) content than required by South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168. B. Type _ - General Purpose Exterior Sealant: Polyurethane; ASTM C920, Grade NS, Class 25 minimum; Uses M, G, and A; single component. 1. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range. 2. Applications: Use for: a. Control, expansion, and soft joints in masonry. b. Joints between concrete and other materials. c. Joints between metal frames and other materials. d. Other exteriorjoints for which no other sealant is indicated. C. Type 2 - Exterior Metal Lap Joint Sealant: Butyl or polyisobutylene, nondrying, nonskinning, noncuring. 1. Product: Storm Blaster All Season Sealant manufactured by Sherwin-Williams. 2. Applications: Use for: a. Concealed sealant bead in sheet metal work. b. Concealed sealant bead in siding overlaps. D. Type 3 - General Purpose Interior Sealant: Acrylic emulsion latex; ASTM C834, Type OP, Grade NF single component, paintable. 1. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range. 2. Applications: Use for: a. Interior wall and ceiling control joints. b. Joints between door and window frames and wall surfaces. c. Other interiorjoints for which no other type of sealant is indicated. E. Type 4 - Bathtub/Tile Sealant: White silicone; ASTM C920, Uses I, M and A; single component, mildew resistant. 1. Applications: Use for: a. Joints between plumbing fixtures and floor and wall surfaces. b. Joints between kitchen and bath countertops and wall surfaces. F. Type 5 - Interior Floor Joint Sealant: Polyurethane, self -leveling; ASTM C920, Grade P, Class 25, Uses T, M and A; single component. 1. Approved by manufacturer for wide joints up to 1-1/2 inches. 2. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range. 3. Product: Sonolastic NPI manufactured by BASF Corp. 4. Applications: Use for: a. Expansion joints in floors in animal areas. b. Wall to Floor joint in animal areas. G. Type 6 - Concrete Paving Joint Sealant: Polyurethane, self -leveling; ASTM C920, Class 25, Uses T, I, M and A; single component. 1. Color: Gray. 2. Product: Sonolastic Ultra manufactured by BASF Corp. 3. Applications: Use for: a. Joints in sidewalks and vehicular paving. b. Trafficable areas in non animal or waste areas. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Primer: Non -staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. B. Joint Cleaner: Non -corrosive and non -staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials. C. Joint Backing: Round foam rod compatible with sealant; ASTM D1667, closed cell PVC; oversized 30 to 50 percent larger than joint width. JOINT SEALERS 079005-3 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 D. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work. B. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Remove loose materials and foreign matter that could impair adhesion of sealant. B. Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Perform preparation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C1193. D. Protect elements surrounding the work of this section from damage or disfigurement. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Perform work in accordance with sealant manufacturer's requirements for preparation of surfaces and material installation instructions. B. Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C1193. C. Measure joint dimensions and size joint backers to achieve the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Width/depth ratio of 2:1. 2. Neck dimension no greater than 1/3 of the joint width. 3. Surface bond area on each side not less than 75 percent of joint width. D. Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used. E. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags. F. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges. G. Tool joints concave. H. Precompressed Foam Sealant: Do not stretch; avoid joints except at corners, ends, and intersections; install with face 1/8 to 1/4 inch below adjoining surface. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent soiled surfaces. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect sealants until cured. 3.06 SCHEDULE A. Exterior Joints for Which No Other Sealant Type is Indicated: Type 1; colors as shown on drawings. B. Control and Expansion Joints in Paving: Type 6. C. Lap Joints in Exterior Sheet Metal Work: Type 2. D. Butt Joints in Exterior Metal Work and Siding: Type 1. E. Joints Between Exterior Metal Frames and Adjacent Work (except masonry): Type 1. F. Under Exterior Door Thresholds: Type 1. G. Interior Joints for Which No Other Sealant is Indicated: Type 3; . H. Control and Expansion Joints in Interior Concrete Slabs and Floors: Type 5. JOINT SEALERS 079005-4 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 I. Joints Between Plumbing Fixtures and Walls and Floors, and Between Countertops and Walls: Type 4. END OF SECTION JOINT SEALERS 079005-5 :r �.; Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 SECTION 08 1113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Non -fire -rated steel doors and frames for exterior applications. B. Thermally insulated steel doors at exterior applications. C. Hollow metal borrowed lites glazing frames. D. Accessories, including glazing, louvers, and matching panels. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI/SDI A250.3 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Factory Applied Finish Coatings for Steel Doors and Frames; 2007 (R2011). B. ANSI/SDI A250.4 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Physical Endurance for Steel Doors, Frames and Frame Anchors; 2011. C. ANSI/SDI A250.8 - Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames (SDI -100); 2014. D. ANSI/SDI A250.10 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames; 2011. E. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy -Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process; 2015. F. ASTM C1363 - Standard Test Method for Thermal Performance of Building Assemblies by Means of a Hot Box Apparatus; 2011. G. NAAMM HMMA 805 - Recommended Selection and Usage Guide for Hollow Metal Doors and Frames; 2012. H. NAAMM HMMA 860 - Guide Specifications for Hollow Metal Doors and Frames; 2013. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Materials and details of design and construction, hardware locations, reinforcement type and locations, anchorage and fastening methods, and finishes; and one copy of referenced standards/guidelines. C. Shop Drawings: Details of each opening, showing elevations, glazing, frame profiles, and any indicated finish requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: 1. Any current member of the Steel Door Institute. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND 081113-1 FRAMES Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 2.02 DESIGN CRITERIA A. Combined Requirements: If a particular door and frame unit is indicated to comply with more than one type of requirement, comply with the specified requirements for each type; for instance, an exterior door that is also indicated as being sound -rated must comply with the requirements specified for exterior doors and for sound -rated doors; where two requirements conflict, comply with the most stringent. 2.03 HOLLOW METAL DOORS A. Exterior Doors : 1. Based on NAAMM HMMA Custom Guidelines: a. Comply with guidelines of NAAMM HMMA 860 for Hollow Metal Doors and Frames. b. Performance Level 1 - Light Duty, in accordance with NAAMM HMMA 805. c. Physical Performance Level C, 250,000 cycles; in accordance with ANSI/SDI A250.4. d. Door Face Metal Thickness: 20 gage, 0.032 inch, minimum. 2. Core Material: Manufacturers standard core material/construction and in compliance with requirements. 3. Door Face Sheets: Flush. 4. Door Paneled: See Drawings for Doors needing Panel recesses. 5. Insulating Value: U -value of 0.50, when tested in accordance with ASTM C1363. 6. Weatherstripping: Refer to Section 08 7100. 7. Door Finish: Factory primed and field finished. B. Panels: Same construction, performance, and finish as doors. 2.04 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES A. Comply with standards and/or custom guidelines as indicated for corresponding door in accordance with applicable door frame requirements. B. General: 1. Comply with the requirements of grade specified for corresponding door. a. ANSI A250.8 Level 1 Doors: 16 gage frames. 2. Finish: Same as for door. 3. Provide mortar guard boxes for hardware cut-outs in frames to be installed in masonry or to be grouted. 4. Frames in Masonry Walls: Size to suit masonry coursing with head member 4 inches high to fill opening without cutting masonry units. 5. Frames Wider than 48 Inches: Reinforce with steel channel fitted tightly into frame head, flush with top. C. Exterior Door Frames: Knock -down type. 1. Galvanizing: Components hot -dipped zinc -iron alloy -coated (galvannealed) in accordance with ASTM A653/A653M, with A40/ZF120 coating. 2. Weatherstripping: Separate, see Section 08 7100. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Glazing: As specified in Section 08 8000, factory installed. B. Grout for Frames: Portland cement grout with maximum 4 inch slump for hand troweling; thinner pumpable grout is prohibited. C. Silencers: Resilient rubber, fitted into drilled hole; 3 on strike side of single door, 3 on center mullion of pairs, and 2 on head of pairs without center mullions. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND 081113-2 FRAMES Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 2.06 FINISHES A. Primer: Rust -inhibiting, complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10, door manufacturer's standard. B. Factory Finish: Complying with ANSI/SDI A250.3, manufacturer's standard coating. 1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range. C. Bituminous Coating: Asphalt emulsion or other high -build, water-resistant, resilient coating. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. j B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable. C. Verify that finished walls are in plane to ensure proper door alignment. j 3.02 PREPARATION A. Coat inside of frames to be installed in masonry or to be grouted, with bituminous coating, prior j to installation. 3.03 INSTALLATION r A. Install doors and frames in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and related requirements of specified door and frame standards or custom guidelines indicated. B. Coordinate frame anchor placement with wall construction. C. Grout frames in masonry construction, using hand trowel methods; brace frames so that pressure of grout before setting will not deform frames. D. Coordinate installation of hardware. E. Touch up damaged factory finishes. 3.04 TOLERANCES A. Clearances Between Door and Frame: Comply with related requirements of specified door and frame standards or custom guidelines indicated. B. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 in measured with straight edge, corner to corner. 3.05 ADJUSTING A. Adjust for smooth and balanced door movement. END OF SECTION HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND 081113-3 FRAMES I Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 SECTION 08 1613 FIBERGLASS DOORS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: Obtain hardware templates from hardware manufacturer prior to starting fabrication. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard details, installation instructions, hardware and anchor recommendations. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate layout and profiles; include assembly methods. 1. Indicate product components, including hardware reinforcement locations and preparations, accessories, finish colors, patterns, and textures. 2. Indicate wall conditions, door and frame elevations, sections, materials, gages, finishes, location of door hardware by dimension, and details of openings; use same reference numbers indicated on drawings to identify details and openings. D. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer; include detailed terms of warranty. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products of the type specified in this section, with not less than three years of documented experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified and with at least three years of documented experience. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact. B. Store materials in original packaging, under cover, protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions and from direct contact with water. 1. Store at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by manufacturer. 2. Do not use non -vented plastic or canvas shelters. 3. Immediately remove wet wrappers. C. Store in position recommended by manufacturer, elevated minimum 4 inch above grade, with minimum 1/4 inch space between doors. 1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install doors until structure is enclosed. B. Maintain temperature and humidity at manufacturer's recommended levels during and after installation of doors. 1.06 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Provide five (5) year manufacturer warranty covering materials and workmanship, including degradation or failure due to chemical contact. FIBERGLASS DOORS 08 1613 -1 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Fiberglass Composite Doors: (Basis of Design) 1. Therma-Tru Corp. 1750 Indian Wood Circle Maumee, OH 43537 419-891-7400 www.thermatru.com B. Other approved Manufacturers: 1. Pella 2. GlassCraft Doors; www.glasscraft.com 3. Feather River Door Co.; www.Featherriverdoor.com 4. Substution: Other equal Manufacturer, request to Architect for Pre -Bid Approval. 2.02 DOOR AND FRAME ASSEMBLIES A. Basis of Design Style: S100 (3'-0" x 6-8") Smooth -Star Fiberglass Door. Smooth Faces. B. Door and Frame Assemblies: Factory -fabricated, prepared and machined for hardware. 1. Screw -Holding Capacity: Tested to 890 lbs, minimum. 2. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index (FSI) of 0 to 25, Class A, and smoke developed index (SDI) of 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 3. Flammability: Self -extinguishing when tested in accordance with ASTM D635. 4. Clearance Between Door and Frame: 1/8 inch, maximum. 5. Clearance Between Bottom of Door and Finished Floor: 3/4 inch, maximum; not less than 1/4 inch clearance to threshold. 2.03 COMPONENTS A. Doors: Fiberglass construction with reinforced core. 1. Core Material: Urethane foam, density 1.9 pcf minimum. 2. Construction: a. 1/16" minimum thickness, proprietary fiberglass -reinforced thermaoset composite. b. Door edges are machnable kiln -dried pine, primed lock edge reinforced with engineeredlumber core, lockset area reinforced with solid blocking for hardware backup. c. Door bottom edge is moisture and decay resistant composite. 3. Sills: Inswing Hardword millfinished continuous, adjustable. Finish: Bronze. 4. Waterproof Integrity: Provide factory fabricated edges, cut-outs, and hardware preparations of fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP); provide cut-outs with joints sealed independently of glazing, louver inserts, or trim. 5. Hardware Preparations: Factory reinforce, machine, and prepare for door hardware including field installed items; provide solid blocking for each item; field cutting, drilling or tapping is not permitted; obtain manufacturer's hardware templates for preparation as necessary. 2.04 FINISHES A. Primer: Aliphatic urethane for field finishing. FIBERGLASS DOORS 081613-2 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION E A. Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before door fabrication; show E recorded measurements on shop drawings. B. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions; do not penetrate frames with anchors. B. Set units plumb, level, and true -to -line, without warping or racking doors, and with specified clearances; anchor in place. C. Set thresholds in continuous bed of sealant. D. In stud walls, install frames prior to building walls; anchor frames to studs using concealed anchors. E. Separate aluminum and other metal surfaces from sources of corrosion of electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials. F. Repair or replace damaged installed products. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Lubricate, test, and adjust doors to operate easily, free from warp, twist or distortion, and to fit watertight for entire perimeter. B. Adjust hardware for smooth and quiet operation. C. Adjust doors to fit snugly and close without sticking or binding. END OF SECTION FIBERGLASS DOORS 081613-3 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 SECTION 08 3326 OVERHEAD COILING GRILLES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide general construction, component connections and details. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate pertinent dimensioning, anchorage methods, hardware locations, and installation details. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation sequence and procedures, adjustment and alignment procedures. E. Maintenance Data: Indicate lubrication requirements and frequency and periodic adjustments required. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Overhead Coiling Grilles: 2.02 GRILLE AND COMPONENTS A. Grille: Aluminum; horizontal bar curtain, coiling on overhead counterbalanced shaft. 1. Finish: Anodized, Clear Aluminum color. 2. Mounting: Within framed opening. B. Curtain: Round horizontal bars connected with vertical links. 1. Horizontal bars: 5/16 inch diameter. 2. Bar spacing: 1-1/2 inch on center. 3. Tube spacers: 1/2 inch diameter. 4. Spacer spacing: 3-1/4 inch on center. 5. Link spacing: 6 inch on center. 6. Bar Ends: Provide with nylon runners for quiet operation. 7. Bottom Bar: Back-to-back angles with tubular resilient cushion. C. Guides: Extruded aluminum angles, of profile to retain grille in place with snap -on trim, mounting brackets of same metal. D. Hood Enclosure: Sheet metal; completely covering operating mechanisms; internally reinforced to maintain rigidity and shape. 1. Material: Same metal as grille. E. Lock Hardware: 1. Latching Mechanism: Inside mounted, adjustable keeper, spring activated latch bar feature to keep in locked or retracted position. 2. Latch Handle: Manufacturer's standard. 3. Slide Bolt: Provide on single -jamb side, extending into slot in guides, with padlock on one side. F. Roller Shaft Counterbalance: Steel pipe and helical steel spring system, capable of producing torque sufficient to ensure smooth operation of curtain from any position and capable of holding position at mid -travel; with adjustable spring tension; requiring 25 Ib nominal force to operate. OVERHEAD COILING GRILLES 083326-1 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 2.03 MATERIALS A. Aluminum: ASTM B221 (ASTM 13221M). PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that opening sizes, tolerances and conditions are acceptable. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install grille unit assembly in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Use anchorage devices to securely fasten assembly to wall construction and building framing without distortion or stress. C. Securely and rigidly brace components suspended from structure. Secure guides to structural members only. D. Fit and align assembly including hardware; level and plumb, to provide smooth operation. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Maintain dimensional tolerances and alignment with adjacent work. B. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/16 inch. C. Maximum Variation From Level: 1/16 inch. D. Longitudinal or Diagonal Warp: Plus or minus 1/8 inch per 10 ft straight edge. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust grille, hardware and operating assemblies for smooth and noiseless operation. END OF SECTION OVERHEAD COILING GRILLES 083326-2 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 SECTION 08 4313 ALUMINUM -FRAMED STOREFRONTS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordinate with installation of other components that comprise the exterior enclosure. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide component dimensions, describe components within assembly, anchorage and fasteners, glass and infill, door hardware, internal drainage details . B. Shop Drawings: Indicate system dimensions, framed opening requirements and tolerances, affected related Work, expansion and contraction joint location and details, and field welding required. C. Hardware Schedule: Complete itemization of each item of hardware to be provided for each door, cross-referenced to door identification numbers in Contract Documents. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer and Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing aluminum glazing systems with minimum three years of documented experience. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Handle products of this section in accordance with AAMA CW -10. B. Protect finished aluminum surfaces with wrapping. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed coatings that bond to aluminum when exposed to sunlight or weather. 1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install sealants when ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees F. Maintain this minimum temperature during and 48 hours after installation. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion. B. Provide ten year manufacturer warranty against failure of glass seal on insulating glass units, including interpane dusting or misting. Include provision for replacement of failed units. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Double Glazed System Equal to: 1. Kawneer North America.; Product 451-T: www.kawneer.com. 2. Oldcastle Building Envelope; Product Thermally Broken: www.oldcastlebe.com. 3. Tubelite, Inc.; T14000, 2 inch by 4-1/2 inch, Thermal, Flush Center Glaze: www.tubeliteinc.com. 4. PPG Industries, Pittsburgh, PA. 5. Series 945 T by Vistawall, Terrell, TX. B. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements. ALUMINUM -FRAMED 084313-1 STOREFRONTS Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 2.02 STOREFRONT A. Aluminum -Framed Storefront: Factory fabricated, factory finished aluminum framing members with infill, and related flashings, anchorage and attachment devices. 1. Glazing Position: Front -set. 2. Vertical Mullion Dimensions: 2 inches wide by 4-1/2 inches deep. 3. Finish: High performance organic coating. 4. Color: Custom Color as selected by Architect. 2.03 COMPONENTS A. Aluminum Framing Members: Tubular aluminum sections, thermally broken with interior section insulated from exterior, drainage holes and internal weep drainage system. 1. Framing members for interior applications need not be thermally broken. 2. Cross -Section: 2 x 3 1/2 inch nominal dimension. B. Doors: Glazed aluminum. 1. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches. 2. Top Rail: 4 inches wide. 3. Vertical Stiles: 3 1/2 inches wide, #350 Medium Stile. 4. Bottom Rail: 6 inches wide. 5. Glazing Stops: Square. 6. Finish: Same as storefront. 2.04 MATERIALS A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221 M). B. Fasteners: Stainless steel. C. Perimeter Sealant: Type 1 specified in Section 07 9005. D. Glass: As specified in Section 08 8000. E. Glazing Gaskets: Type to suit application to achieve weather, moisture, and air infiltration requirements. F. Glazing Accessories: As specified in Section 08 8000. 2.05 FINISHES A. Comply with AA DAF -45 for aluminum finishes required. B. High Performance Organic Finish: AAMA 2604; multiple coats, thermally cured fluoropolymer system. C. Touch -Up Materials: As recommended by coating manufacturer for field application. 2.06 SEALED INSULATING GLASS UNITS A. Manufacturers of glass products: 1. Any of the manufacturers specified for float glass. B. Fabricators of sealed insulating units: 1. Guardian Industries Corp: www.guardian.com. 2. Interpane Glass Company: www.interpane.com. 3. Viracon, Apogee Enterprises, Inc: www.viracon.com. 4. Capitol Glass Co., SLC, Utah. 5. Substitutions: Refer to Section 016000 - Product Requirements. C. Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Types as indicated. 1. Durability: Certified by an independent testing agency to comply with ASTM E2190. 2. Edge Spacers: Aluminum, bent and soldered corners. 3. Edge Seal: Glass to elastomer with supplementary silicone sealant. 4. Purge interpane space with dry hermetic air. ALUMINUM -FRAMED 084313-2 STOREFRONTS Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 D. Insulated Glass Units : Double pane with glass to elastomer edge seal. 1. Outer pane of 1/4" glass, inner pane of 1/4" glass. 2. Place reflective coating on No.2 surface within the unit. 3. Comply with ASTM E 774 and E 773, Class CBA. 4. Purge interpane space with dry hermetic air. 5. Total unit thickness of 1 inch minimum. 2.07 FABRICATIONS, 1" SEALED INSULATING UNITS A. Visteon 1. Outer Pane: Versalux 1/4" Grey 2000 R heat strengthened with grey reflective on the #2 surface. 2. Interior Pane: 1/4" clear with Low E on the #3 surface. 3. Transmittance, Total Solar Energy: 11% 4. Reflectance, Visible Light: 17% 5. Reflectance, Total Solar Energy: 9% 6. Shading Coefficient: 0.23 7. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.20 8. Light to Solar Gain (LSG): NA 9. U Value, Winter Night-time: 0.33 B. PPG Industries 1. Outer Pane: 1/4" SolorCool Azurlite heat strengthened with grey reflective on the #2 surface. 2. Interior Pane: 1/4" clear Sungate 100 with Low E on the #3 surface. 3. Transmittance, Total Solar Energy: 9% 4. Reflectance, Visible Light: 19% 5. Reflectance, Total Solar Energy: 10% 6. Shading Coefficient: 0.20 7. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.17 8. Light to Solar Gain (LSG): 1.24 9. U Value, Winter Night-time: 0.31 2.08 HARDWARE A. Door Hardware: Storefront manufacturer's standard type to suit application. 1. Include for each door weatherstripping, sill sweep strip, threshold, pivots, narrow stile handle latch, and closer. 2.09 FABRICATION A. Accurately fit and secure joints and corners. Make joints flush, hairline, and weatherproof. B. Prepare components to receive anchor devices. Fabricate anchors. C. Arrange fasteners and attachments to conceal from view. D. Reinforce components internally for door hardware . E. Finishing: Apply factory finish to all surfaces that will be exposed in completed assemblies. 1. Touch-up surfaces cut during fabrication so that no natural aluminum is visible in completed assemblies, including joint edges. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify dimensions, tolerances, and method of attachment with other work. B. Verify that wall openings and adjoining air and vapor seal materials are ready to receive work of this section. ALUMINUM -FRAMED 084313-3 STOREFRONTS Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install wall system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Attach to structure to permit sufficient adjustment to accommodate construction tolerances and other irregularities. C. Provide alignment attachments and shims to permanently fasten system to building structure. D. Align assembly plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain assembly dimensional tolerances, aligning with adjacent work. E. Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation. F. Install sill flashings. Turn up ends and edges; seal to adjacent work to form water tight dam. G. Where fasteners penetrate sill flashings, make watertight by seating and sealing fastener heads to sill flashing. H. Coordinate attachment and seal of perimeter air and vapor barrier materials. I. Pack fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of thermal barrier. J. Set thresholds in bed of sealant and secure. K. Install hardware using templates provided. L. Install glass in accordance with Section 08 8000, using glazing method required to achieve performance criteria. M. Install perimeter sealant in accordance with Section 07 9005. N. Touch-up minor damage to factory applied finish; replace components that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 0.06 inches every 3 ft non -cumulative or 1/16 inches per 10 ft, whichever is less. B. Maximum Misalignment of Two Adjoining Members Abutting in Plane: 1/32 inch. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating hardware for smooth operation. 3.05 CLEANING A. Remove protective material from pre -finished aluminum surfaces. B. Wash down surfaces with a solution of mild detergent in warm water, applied with soft, clean wiping cloths. Take care to remove dirt from corners. Wipe surfaces clean. C. Remove excess sealant by method acceptable to sealant manufacturer. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products from damage during subsequent construction. B. Touch-up minor damage to factory applied finish; replace components that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. C. Protect finished work from damage. 3.07 SCHEDULE- SEE DRAWINGS END OF SECTION ALUMINUM -FRAMED 084313-4 STOREFRONTS Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 SECTION 08 5313 VINYL WINDOWS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fixed Windows - See Drawings. B. Sliding Windows - See Drawings, 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 - North American Fenestration Standard/Specification for windows, doors, and skylights; 2011. B. AAMA: Windows shall be Gold Label certified with label attached to frame per AAMA requirements. C. NFRC: Windows shall be NFRC certified with temporary U -factor label applied to glass and an NFRC tab added to permanent AAMA frame label. D. ASTM E2112 - Standard Practice for Installation of Exterior Windows, Doors and Skylights; 2007 (Reapproved 2016). 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 013000 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide component dimensions, anchors, fasteners, glass, and internal drainage. C. Grade Substantiation: Prior to submitting shop drawings or starting fabrication, submit one of the following showing compliance with specified grade: 1. Evidence of AAMA Certification. 2. Evidence of WDMA Certification. 3. Evidence of CSA Certification. 4. Test report(s) by independent testing agency itemizing compliance and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect finished surfaces with wrapping. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed coatings that bond when exposed to sunlight or weather. B. Jig, brace, and box the window frame assemblies for transport to minimize flexing of members or joints. 1.05 WARRANTY A. See Section 017800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Correct defective Work within a ten year period after Date of Substantial Completion. C. Provide ten year manufacturer warranty for insulated glass units from seal failure, interpane dusting or misting, and replacement of same. Include coverage for degradation of color finish. VINYL WINDOWS 085313-1 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. Vinyl Windows: 1. Basis of Design Manufacturer: a. Milgard Manufacturing, Inc. 1010 54th Avenue East Tacoma, WA 98424 (800)-Milgard (645-4273) milgard.com 2. Additional approved Manufacturers: a. Pella Corporation; 350 Series: www.pellacommercial.com/sle. b. Silver Line by Andersen: www.silverlinewindows.com/sle. Sliding: 2800 Series. c. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 DESCRIPTION A. Window Series: Milgard Montecito® Series B. Vinyl Windows: Factory fabricated frame and sash members of extruded, hollow, ultra -violet -resistant, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) with integral color; with factory -installed glazing, hardware, related flashings, anchorage and attachment devices. 1. Configuration: As indicated on drawings. a. Product Type: FW - Fixed window and HS - Horizontal sliding window. 2. Color: Three (3) colors to be selected. 3. Size to fit openings with minimum clearance around perimeter of assembly providing necessary space for perimeter seals. 4. Operable Units: Double weatherstripped or Vinyl compression bulb seal. 5. Framing Members: Fusion welded corners and joints, with internal reinforcement where required for structural rigidity; concealed fasteners. 6. System Internal Drainage: Drain to exterior side by means of weep drainage network any water entering joints, condensation within glazing channel, or other migrating moisture within system. 7. Glazing Stops, Trim, Flashings, and Accessory Pieces: Formed of rigid PVC, fitting tightly into frame assembly. C. Horizontal Slider — 8130M Series, 1" nail fin setback, stucco key. 1. Frame: 3-1/4" minimum depth. Multi-chambered vinyl profile. 2. Sash: 1-1/4" minimum depth. Multi-chambered vinyl profile, includes vent stops located in fixed sash. 3. Sightlines: Equal for operating and fixed sash. 4. Structural Class: a. 71-1/2" X 59-1/2" and smaller: HS -C40. 5. Hardware: a. SmartTouch® direct action locking mechanism. b. Nylon rollers with stainless steel axles, extruded vinyl snap -on monorail roller track. c. Dual pull rails. 6. Operable Sash Weatherstripping: Wool pile; permanently resilient, profiled to maintain weather seal in accordance with AAMA 701/702. D. Performance Requirements: Provide products that comply with the following: 1. Grade: AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 requirements for specific window type: a. Performance Class (PC): R. b. Performance Grade (PG): 15, with minimum design pressure (DP) of 15.04 psf. VINYL WINDOWS 085313-2 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 2.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. General Performance Requirements: Products and systems provided must be manufactured, fabricated, and installed to the following performance criteria: 1. Complywith ANSI/AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2, except as noted herein 2. Performance Class: (Specify) 3. Performance Grade: (Specify) 4. U -Factor (NFRC 100): 0.32 or lower. 5. SHGC — Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (NFRC 200): (Specify) 6. OITC — Outdoor -Indoor Transmission Class (ASTM E90): (Specify) 7. STC — Sound Transmission Class (ASTM E90): (Specify) 2.04 STRUCTURAL REQUIREMENTS A. Products and systems provided must be capable of withstanding wind loads based on testing units representative of those indicated for Project that pass AAMA/NW WDA 101/I.S.2/NAFS, Uniform Structural Load Test: B. Design Wind Loads: Determine design wind loads, according to ASCE, Section 6, applicable to Product from basic wind speeds (MPH) at 33 feet above grade, based upon mean roof heights indicated on Elevations/Drawings C. Basic Wind Speed: (Specify) D. Importance Factor: (Specify) E. Exposure Category: (Specify) F. Wind Load Requirement: (Specify) 2.05 INSULATED GLASS UNITS: ASTM E 774, CLASS A A. Glazing: Insulated double pane, annealed glass, clear, low -E coated, argon filled, with glass thicknesses as recommended by manufacturer for specified wind conditions and acoustic rating indicated. B. Glazing Type: Dual or Triple Glaze 1. SunCoat® Law-E/Clear 2. SunCoatMAX® Low-E/Clear 3. SunCoat® Low-E/Clear/ SunCoat® Low -E 4. [Tinted] [Obscure -several types] [Specialty] — Per Approval C. Overall IG Unit Thickness: 1. 7/8", except Double Slider and Double Hung which are 3/4" overall. D. Spacer Type: 1. Warm edge stainless steel spacer E. Gas Filled: 1. Argon F. Glass Thickness: (Specify) 1. Per Manufacturer's Specifications 2. Special: Per Manufacturer's Approval a. 3/32", 1/8", 3/16", 1/4", 7/32" Laminate, Other 2.06 FABRICATION A. Fabricate frames and sash with mitered and fusion welded corners and joints. B. Trim and finish corners and welds to match adjacent surfaces. C. Provide concealed metal reinforcements in sash frame for attachment of lock mechanism. D. Factory interior glaze (except Double Hung and Double Slider) with snap -on mitered PVC glazing stops matching bevels on the sash and frame. Insulated glass units shall be reglazable without dismantling sash framing. 1. Note: Field glazing is required for large window units (over 40 sq. ft). VINYL WINDOWS 085313-3 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 2.07 FINISH A. Frame and Sash Color: 1. Exterior: Clay OR Tan. Provide vinyl sample colors for final selection. 2. Interior matched to exterior. B. Hardware: Painted or Metal finishes as supplied by Milgard. 1. Clay or Tan yo match interior frame finish. C. Screen Frame Color: 1. Matched to exterior frame color 2.08 HARDWARE A. Horizontal Sliding Sash: Rigid PVC interfacing tracks with dual brass wheel and stainless steel axle assembly housing, provide two sets for each operating sash and opening stops in head and sill track as required. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install window unit assemblies in accordance with manufacturers instructions and applicable building codes. B. Install windows in accordance with ASTM E2112. C. Attach window frame and shims to perimeter opening to accommodate construction tolerances and other irregularities as necessary. D. Align window plumb and level, free of warp or twist, and maintain dimensional tolerances and alignment with adjacent work. E. Set sill members and sill flashing in continuous bead of sealant. F. Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation. Pack fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of thermal barrier. 3.02 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from Level or Plumb: 0.06 inches every 3 ft non -cumulative or 0.5 inches per 100 ft, whichever is less. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Adjust hardware for smooth operation and secure weathertight closure. 3.04 CLEANING A. Remove protective material from pre -finished surfaces. B. Wash surfaces by method recommended and acceptable to window manufacturer; rinse and wipe surfaces clean. END OF SECTION VINYL WINDOWS 085313-4 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 SECTION 08 7100 HARDWARE SCHEDULE PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Exterior Apartment Entry Doors - Hinges by manufacturer of doors. 1. Smart Lockset by this Section. B. Interior Apartment and Office Doors - Hinges by Manufacturer. 1. All hardware scheduled by this Section. C. Aluminum / Glass Doors - All hardware by StoreFront Sub -Contractor. D. Metal Doors - for exterior utility doors. 1. All hardware scheduled by this Section. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's catalog literature for each type of hardware, marked to clearly show products to be furnished for this project, and includes construction details, material descriptions, finishes, and dimensions and profiles of individual components. C. Shop Drawings - Door Hardware Schedule: Submit detailed listing that includes each item of hardware to be installed on each door. Use door numbering scheme as included in Contract Documents. 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Package hardware items individually; label and identify each package with door opening code to match door hardware schedule. 1.04 WARRANTY A. See Section 017800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Warranty against defects in material and workmanship for period indicated, from Date of Substantial Completion. 1. Locksets and Cylinders: Three years, minimum. 2. Other Hardware: Two years, minimum. PART 2 PRODUCTS (OR EQUAL) MANUFACTURERS EZ Set, Wieser, WesLock, or Schlage Latchsets Or Equal. HARDWARE SCHEDULE 087100-1 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 PART 3 EXECUTION DOOR HARDWARE GROUPS SCHEDULE INFORMATION 5/4/2017 The Door Schedule on the Drawings indicates which hardware set is used with each door. Manufacturers Abbreviations ABBREV MANUFACTURER PRODUCTS WIS Wieser Locks, Latches and Bolts TRM Trimco Misc Hardware, Gasketing WSL WesLock Locks, Latches and Bolts IVE Ives Hinges LAR Larsen & Shaw Continuous Hinges LCN LCN Door Closers EZ EZ at latch Set and Locksets PEM Pemko Thresholds, Sweeps and Gasketing RIX Rixson Magnetic Door Holder SCH Schla a Lock Company Locks and Latches SEL Select Products Continuous Hinges DOOR HARDWARE GROUP SCHEDULE Group No 01: Apartment Entrances QTY UNIT DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 ea 4" Hinges Standard Weight US15 SatiN 1 set Weatherstrip Gasketing Standard Manuf. Standard 1 ea Threshold Standard Manuf. See Spec 1 ea Entrance Smart Lock Schla a Control Smart Dk Bronze SCH Addison / Accent 1 ea 34" x 16" Kickplate Standard Manuf. 1 ea Peephole in door Group No 02: Apt Interior Doors QTY UNIT DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 ea 4" Hinges Standard Weight US15 SatiN 1 ea Passage Lever US15 SatiN HARDWARE SCHEDULE 087100-2 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 Group No 03: Apt. Interior Privacy QTY UNIT DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 ea 3" Hinges 3 ea 4" Hinges Standard Weight US15 SatiN 1 ea Privacy Lever Lock US15 SatiN Group No 04: Apt.lnterior Bi -Fold QTY UNIT DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 ea 3" Hinges Standard Weight US15 SatiN 1 ea Pull US15 SatiN 1 ea Std Track, Pivots, Guides White Group No 05: Apt.lnterior Bi -Fold QTY UNIT DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 ea 3" Hinges Standard Weight US15 SatiN 2 ea Pulls US15 SatiN 1 ea Std Track, Pivots, Guides White HARDWARE SCHEDULE 087100-3 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 Group No 06: Ext Maint./ Storage QTY UNIT DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 ea 6 ea 4" Hinges Heavy BB Weight US26D 1 ea Threshold Gasket Alum 1 ea Astragal Weatherstrip US26D 20 linft Gasket Weatherstrip Gra 1 ea Flashbolt Alum 1 ea C finder Lockset Store Room Function US26D Group No 07: Elev. Equip Room, Mech Rooms, IT / Stdr Rooms QTY UNIT DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 ea 3 ea 4" Hinges Heavy BB Weight US26D 1 ea Threshold Gasket Alum 17 linft Gasket Weatherstrip Gra 1 ea Cylinder Lockset Store Room Function US26D 1 ea Closer Alum Group No 08: Waiting Storefront Entrances QTY UNIT DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 ea 4" Hinges Heavy BB Weight US26D 1 ea Threshold Alum 17 linft Gasket Gray 1 ea Entrance Lever US26D 1 ea Closer Alum HARDWARE SCHEDULE 087100-4 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 Group No 09: Door L2 QTY UNIT DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 6 ea 4` Hinges 3 ea 4" Hinges Standard Weight US15 SatiN 1 ea Lockset Lever Storeroom Function US15 SatiN Group No 10: Doors L4 Table / Chair Storage QTY UNIT DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR FINISH MFR 6 ea 4` Hinges Standard Weight US15 SatiN 1 ea Flushbolt Top US15 SatiN 1 ez Passage Lever Lock Lever US15 SatiN Group No 11: Door M12 Offive QTY UNIT DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 ea 4' Hinges Standard WeightUS15 SatiN 1 ea Lever Lockset US15 SatiN END OF SCHEDULE HARDWARE SCHEDULE 087100-5 .. i' ' i Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 SECTION 08 8000 GLAZING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Insulated double Glass units for exterior applications. 1. Vinyl Windows are not included. B. Includes Storefront, Aluminum Framed Doors, Sidelites and Windows within storefront sections. C. Glazing compounds and accessories. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2014. B. ASTM C1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass; 2011. C. ASTM C1048 - Standard Specification for Heat -Strengthened and Fully Tempered Flat Glass; 2012. D. ASTM C1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2013. E. ASTM E774 - Standard Specification for the Classification of the Durability of Sealed Insulating Glass Units; 1997. F. ASTM E2190 - Standard Specification for Insulating Glass Unit Performance and Evaluation; 2010. G. GANA (SM) - GANA Sealant Manual; 2008. 1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Select type and thickness of exterior glass to withstand dead loads and wind loads acting normal to plane of glass at design pressures calculated in accordance with IBC code. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data on Glass Types: Provide structural, physical and environmental characteristics, size limitations, special handling or installation requirements. C. Product Data on Glazing Compounds: Provide chemical, functional, and environmental characteristics, limitations, special application requirements. Identify available colors. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with GANA Glazing Manual and SIGMA TM -3000 Glazing Guidelines for glazing installation methods. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install glazing when ambient temperature is less than 50 degrees F. B. Maintain minimum ambient temperature before, during and 24 hours after installation of glazing compounds. 1.07 WARRANTY A. See Section 017800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. GLAZING 088000-1 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 B. Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Provide a ten (10) year warranty to include coverage for seal failure, interpane dusting or misting, including replacement of failed units. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 INSULATING GLASS UNITS A. Type IG -1 - Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Vision glass, double glazed. 1. Application: All exterior glazing unless otherwise indicated. 2. Total Thickness: 1 inch. 2.02 EXTERIOR GLAZING ASSEMBLIES A. Performance Criteria: Select type and thickness of glass to withstand dead and live loads caused by positive and negative wind pressure acting normal to plane of glass. 1. Use the procedure specified in ASTM E1300 to determine glass type and thickness. 2. Limit glass deflection to 1/200 or flexure limit of glass, whichever is less, with full recovery of glazing materials. 3. Glass thicknesses listed are minimum. B. Air and Vapor Seals: Provide completed assemblies that maintain continuity of building enclosure vapor retarder and air barrier: 1. In conjunction with vapor retarder and joint sealer materials described in other sections. 2. To utilize the inner pane of multiple pane sealed units for the continuity of the air barrier and vapor retarder seal. 3. To maintain a continuous air barrier and vapor retarder throughout the glazed assembly from glass pane to heel bead of glazing sealant. 2.03 GLASS MATERIALS A. Float Glass Manufacturers: 1. Visteon Glass Systems: www.visteon.com/floatglass. 2. Old Castle. 3. Pilkington LOF. 4. PPG Industries, Inc. 5. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Float Glass: Provide float glass based glazing unless noted otherwise. 1. Annealed Type: ASTM C1036, Type I - Transparent Flat, Class 1 - Clear, Quality -Q3. 2. Heat -Strengthened and Fully Tempered Types: ASTM C1048, Kind HS and Kind FT. 3. Tinted Types: ASTM C1036, Class 2 - Tinted, color and performance characteristics as indicated. 4. Thicknesses: As indicated; for exterior glazing comply with requirements indicated for wind load design regardless of thickness indicated. 2.04 COMPONENTS A. Clear Float Glass: Clear, annealed. 1. Comply with ASTM C 1036, Type I, transparent flat. Class 1 clear, Quality Q3 (glazing select). 2. 1/4 inch minimum thick. B. Safety Glass : Clear; fully tempered with horizontal tempering where required. 1. Laminated with plastic (polycarbonite) interlayer; interlayer thickness of 0.030 ". 2. Comply with ASTM C 1048, Condition A uncoated, Type 1 transparent flat. Class 1, Quality q3 glazing select. 3. Comply with ANSI Z97.1. 4. CSPS Glazing Standards: Category II. 5. Tempered Thickness: 1/4 inch minimum thick. GLAZING 088000-2 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 C. Tinted Glass : Float type, heat strengthened, grey color. 1. Comply with ASTM C 1036, Type I, transparent flat, Class 2, Quality 03 (glazing select). D. Low E Glass : Float type, annealed, clear. 2.05 SEALED INSULATING GLASS UNITS A. Manufacturers of glass products: 1. Any of the manufacturers specified for float glass. B. Fabricators of sealed insulating units: 1. Guardian Industries Corp: www.guardian.com. 2. Interpane Glass Company: www.interpane.com. 3. Viracon, Apogee Enterprises, Inc: www.viracon.com. 4. Capitol Glass Co., SLC, Utah. 5. Substitutions: Refer to Section 016000 - Product Requirements. C. Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Types as indicated. 1. Durability: Certified by an independent testing agency to comply with ASTM E2190. 2. Edge Spacers: Aluminum, bent and soldered corners. 3. Edge Seal: Glass to elastomer with supplementary silicone sealant. 4. Purge interpane space with dry hermetic air. D. Insulated Glass Units: Double pane with glass to elastomer edge seal. 1. Outer pane of 1/4" glass, inner pane of 1/4" glass. 2. Place reflective coating on No.2 surface within the unit. 3. Comply with ASTM E 774 and E 773, Class CBA. 4. Purge interpane space with dry hermetic air. 5. Total unit thickness of 1 inch minimum. 2.06 FABRICATIONS, 1" SEALED INSULATING UNITS A. Visteon ( or equal with other manufacturers) 1. Outer Pane: Versalux 1/4" Grey 2000 R heat strengthened with grey reflective on the #2 surface. 2. Interior Pane: 1/4" clear with Low E on the #3 surface. 3. Transmittance, Total Solar Energy: 11% 4. Reflectance, Visible Light: 17% 5. Reflectance, Total Solar Energy: 9% 6. Shading Coefficient: 0.23 7. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.20 8. Light to Solar Gain (LSG): NA 9. U Value, Winter Night-time: 0.33 2.07 GLAZING COMPOUNDS A. Manufacturers: 1. GE Plastics: www.geplastics.com. 2. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com. 3. Substitutions: Refer to Section 016000 - Product Requirements. 4. Butyl Sealant: Single componentASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 12-1/2, Uses M and A;, Shore A hardness of 10 to 20; black color. B. Silicone Sealant: Single component; chemicalneutral curing; capable of water immersion without loss of properties; non-bleeding, non-stainingASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses M, A, and G; with cured Shore A hardness range of 15 to 25; Black color. 2.08 GLAZING ACCESSORIES A. Setting Blocks: Neoprene, 80 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness; ASTM C864 Option II. Length of 0.1 inch for each square foot of glazing or minimum 4 inch x width of glazing rabbet space minus 1/16 inch x height to suit glazing method and pane weight and area. GLAZING 088000-3 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 B. Glazing Tape, Back Bedding Mastic Type: Preformed, butyl -based, 100 percent solids compound with integral resilient spacer rod applicable to application indicated; hardness range of 5 to 30 cured Shore A durometer; coiled on release paper; black color. 1. Manufacturers: a. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com. b. Tremco Global Sealants: www.tremcosealants.com. c. Saint-Gobain Performance Plastics: www.plastics.saint-gobain.com. d. Substitutions: Refer to Section 016000 - Product Requirements. C. Glazing Gaskets: Resilient silicone extruded shape to suit glazing channel retaining slot; black color. D. Glazing Clips: Manufacturer's standard type. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance. B. Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions that may impede moisture movement, weeps are clear, and ready to receive glazing. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry. B. Seal porous glazing channels or recesses with substrate compatible primer or sealer. C. Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant. D. Install sealants in accordance with ASTM C1193 and GANA Sealant Manual. E. Install sealants in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.03 INSTALLATION - EXTERIOR DRY METHOD (TAPE AND GASKET SPLINE GLAZING) @ STOREFRONT A. Cut glazing tape to length; install on glazing pane. Seal corners by butting tape and sealing junctions with butyl sealant. B. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inch from corners. C. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against fixed stop with sufficient pressure to attain full contact. D. Install removable stops without displacing glazing spline. Exert pressure for full continuous contact. E. Trim protruding tape edge. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Glass and Glazing product manufacturers to provide field surveillance of the installation of their products. B. Monitor and report installation procedures and unacceptable conditions. 3.05 CLEANING A. Remove glazing materials from finish surfaces. B. Remove labels after Work is complete. C. Clean glass and adjacent surfaces. GLAZING 088000-4 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 3.06 PROTECTION A. After installation, mark pane with an W by using removable plastic tape or paste; do not mark heat absorbing or reflective glass units. END OF SECTION GLAZING 088000-5 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 SECTION 09 2600 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fire rated party walls, bearing walls and ceilings between apartments. B. Cementitious backer board for tile walls. C. Gypsum wallboard. D. Gypsum wallboard over wood framing. E. Joint treatment and accessories. F. Metal Ceiling framing clips near truss attachment. G. Fur down & Soffit Construction. H. Textured finish system. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Building framing and sheathing. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C 36 - Standard Specification for Gypsum Wallboard; 2001. B. ASTM C475/C475M - Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board; 2002 (Reapproved 2007). C. ASTM C514 - Standard Specification for Nails for the Application of Gypsum Board; 2004 (Reapproved 2009)e1. D. ASTM C557 - Standard Specification for Adhesives for Fastening Gypsum Wallboard to Wood Framing; 2003 (Reapproved 2009)e1. E. ASTM C840 - Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; 2011. F. ASTM C1002 - Standard Specification for Steel Self -Piercing Tapping Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs; 2007. G. ASTM C1047 - Standard Specification for Accessories for Gypsum Wallboard and Gypsum Veneer Base; 201Oa. H. ASTM C1396/C1396M - Standard Specification for Gypsum Board; 2011. 1.04 GYPSUM FIRE -RATED ASSEMBLIES A. Follow assembly instructions for board thickness and attachment requirements to assure assembly validity. Reference Fire ResistanceDesign Manual published by the Gypsum Association. LOCATION FIRE RATING DESIGN FILE # GYP BD TYPE X Roof 1 hr GA File # FC 5000 1/27/1/2" Floor / Ceiling 1 hr GA File # FC 5000 1/2'//1/2" Ext. Brg. Walls 1 hr 5/8" Int. Brg. Walls 1 hr GA File # WP 3510 5/8" Party Walls (two walls) 1 hr GA File # WP 3370 5/8" None Brg. Walls NR NA 1/2" GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09 2600 -1 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on metal framing. C. Samples: Submit two samples of gypsum board finished with proposed texture application, 12 by 12 inches in size, illustrating finish color and texture. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing gypsum board application and finishing, with minimum 3 years of documented experience. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GYPSUM BOARD: A. Manufacturers: 1. G -P Gypsum Corporation: www.gp.com. 2. National Gypsum Company: www.nationaigypsum.com. 3. USG Corporation: www.usg.com. 4. Gold Bond Building Products. 5. Celotex. 6. Georgia Pacific. 2.02 BOARD MATERIALS A. Gypsum Wallboard: Paper -faced gypsum panels as defined in ASTM C1396/C1396M; sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut. 1. Application: Use for vertical surfaces and ceilings, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Thickness: a. Vertical Surfaces: 1/2 inch and 5/6 inch. b. Ceilings: Two (2) layers with resilent channel between 1/2 inch Type "C" Gypsum Board.. c. Multi -Layer Assemblies: Thicknesses as indicated on drawings. B. Backing Board For Non -Wet Areas: Water-resistant gypsum backing board as defined in ASTM C1396/C1396M; sizes to minimum joints in place; ends square cut. 1. Application: Vertical surfaces behind thinset tile, except in wet areas. 2. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273. 3. Type: Regular and Type X, in locations indicated. 4. Type X Thickness: 5/8 inch. 5. Type C Thickness: 1/2 inch. 6. Regular Board Thickness: 1/2 inch. 7. Edges: Tapered. 8. Products: a. American Gypsum; AquaBloc ("Greenboard"). b. CertainTeed Corporation; ProRoc Brand Moisture Resistant Gypsum Board ("Greenboard"). c. CertainTeed Corporation; ProRoc Brand Moisture & Mold Resistant Gypsum Board. d. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; ToughRock Mold -Guard Gypsum Board ("Greenboard"). e. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; DensShield Tile Backer. f. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond Brand XP Gypsum Board. g. USG Corporation; Sheetrock Brand Mold Tough Gypsum Panels. h. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. C. Fire Resistant Type: Complying with Type X or Type C requirements; UL or WH rated. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 092600-2 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Acoustic Sealant: Non -hardening, non -skinning, for use in conjunction with gypsum board. Surface burning characteristics: flame spread 0, smoke developed 0. Meets ASTM C919 and ASTM C834.Provide SHEETROCK ACOUSTICAL SEALANT or Equal manufactured by United States Gypsum Company. B. Finishing Accessories: ASTM C1047, galvanized steel or rolled zinc, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Types: As detailed or required for finished appearance. 2. Special Shapes: In addition to conventional cornerbead and control joints, provide L -bead at exposed panel edges. 3. Manufacturers - Finishing Accessories: a. Phillips Manufacturing Cc: www.phillipsmfg.com. b. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements. C. Joint Materials: ASTM C475 and as recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for project conditions. 1. Tape: 2 inch wide, coated glass fiber tape for joints and corners, except as otherwise indicated. 2. Ready -mixed vinyl -based joint compound. D. Textured Finish Materials: Latex -based compound; containing fine aggregate. E. Nails for Attachment to Wood Members: ASTM C514. F. Anchorage to Substrate: Tie wire, nails, screws, and other metal supports, of type and size to suit application; to rigidly secure materials in place. G. Adhesive for Attachment to Wood: ASTM C557. I PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that project conditions are appropriate for work of this section to commence. 3.02 BOARD INSTALLATION A. Comply with ASTM C 840. Install to minimize butt end joints, especially in highly visible locations. B. Single -Layer Non -Rated: Install gypsum board in most economical direction, with ends and edges occurring over firm bearing. C. Double -Layer Non -Rated: Use gypsum board for first layer, placed perpendicular to framing or furring members, with ends and edges occurring over firm bearing. Use glass mat faced gypsum board at exterior walls and at other locations as indicated. Place second layer perpendicular to framing or furring members. Offset joints of second layer from joints of first layer. D. Installation on Wood Framing: For rated assemblies, comply with requirements of listing authority. For non -rated assemblies, install as follows: 1. Single -Layer Applications over exposed studs: Adhesive application. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF TRIM AND ACCESSORIES A. Corner Beads: Install at external corners, using longest practical lengths. S. Edge Trim: Install at locations where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials and as indicated. 3.04 JOINT TREATMENT A. Paper Faced Gypsum Board: Use fiberglass joint tape, bedded with ready -mixed vinyl -based joint compound and finished with ready -mixed vinyl -based joint compound. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 092600-3 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 B. Finish all gypsum board in accordance with ASTM C 840 Level 4. C. Finish gypsum board in scheduled areas in accordance with levels defined in ASTM C 840 and as scheduled below. D. Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, and corners to produce smooth surface ready to receive finishes. 1. Feather coats of joint compound so that camber is maximum 1/32 inch. 2. Taping, filling, and sanding is not required at surfaces behind fixed cabinetry. 3.05 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation of Finished Gypsum Board Surface from True Flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 feet in any direction. END OF SECTION GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 092600-4 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 SECTION 09 6500 RESILIENT FLOORING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Resilient sheet flooring with Cove Base in Toilet and Shower Rooms. B. Luxury Vinyl Tile (LTV) with Rubber Resilient base in Kitchens and Hallways. C. Installation accessories. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM F710 -Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring; 2011. B. ASTM F970 - Standard Test Method for Static Load Limit; 2007 (Reapproved 2011). C. ASTM F1303 - Standard Specification for Sheet Vinyl Floor Covering with Backing; 2004 (Reapproved 2014). D. ASTM F1861 - Standard Specification for Resilient Wall Base; 2008 (Reapproved 2012). E. ASTM F1913 - Standard Specification for Vinyl Sheet Floor Covering Without Backing; 2004 (Reapproved 2014). 1.03 SUBMITTALS 1.04 1.05 A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance characteristics; including sizes, patterns and colors available; and installation instructions. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate seaming plan. D. Selection Samples: Submit manufacturer's complete set of color samples for Architect's initial selection. E. Concrete Testing Standard: Submit a copy of ASTM F710. F. Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials, and suggested schedule for cleaning, stripping, and re -waxing. G. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Section 016000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. 2. Extra Flooring Material: 150 square feet of each type and color. 3. Extra Wall Base: 20 linear feet of each type and color. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect roll materials from damage by storing on end. FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain temperature in storage area between 55 degrees F and 90 degrees F. B. Store materials for not less than 48 hours prior to installation in area of installation at a temperature of 70 degrees F to achieve temperature stability. Thereafter, maintain conditions above 55 degrees F. RESILIENT FLOORING 096500-1 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SHEET FLOORING A. Vinyl Sheet Flooring: Homogeneous without backing, with color and pattern throughout full thickness. 1. Manufacturers: a. Mannington b. Armstrong World Industries, Inc: www.arrnstrong.com. c. Forbo Flooring, Inc: www.forboflooringna.com. d. Johnsonite, a Tarkett Company: www.johnsonite.com. e. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2. Minimum Requirements: Comply with ASTM F1913. 3. Total Thickness (Wear Layer Thickness): 0.080 inch nominal. 4. Sheet Width: 49 inch minimum. 5. Static Load Resistance: 250 psi minimum, when tested as specified in ASTM F970. 6. Seams: Heat welded. 7. Integral coved base with cap strip. 8. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. B. Welding Rod: Solid bead in material compatible with flooring, produced by flooring manufacturer for heat welding seams, and in color matching field color. 2.02 LUXURY TILE FLOORING A. Luxury Vinyl Tile: Printed film type, with transparent or translucent wear layer, and: 1. Basis of Design: Strong Step by Mohawk 2. Manufacturers: a. Mohowk Group (BASIS OF DESIGN) b. Johnsonite, a Tarkett Company: www.johnsonite.com. c. Mannington d. Shaw 3. Plank Size: 6 by 48 inch. 4. Wear Layer Thickness: 0.12 inch. 5. Total Thickness: 2 mil. 2.03 RESILIENT BASE A. Resilient Base: ASTM F1861, Type TS rubber, vulcanized thermoset; top set Style A, Straight, and as follows: 1. Height: 4 inch. 2. Thickness: 0.125 inch thick. 3. Finish: Satin. 4. Length: Roll. 5. Color: Color as selected from manufacturer's standards. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Primers, Adhesives, and Seaming Materials: Waterproof; types recommended by flooring manufacturer. 1. Provide only products having lower volatile organic compound (VOC) content than required by the more stringent of the South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168 and the Bay Area Air Quality Management District Regulation 8, Rule 51. B. Moldings, Transition and Edge Strips: Same material as flooring. C. Filler for Coved Base: Plastic. RESILIENT FLOORING 096500-2 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces are flat to tolerances acceptable to flooring manufacturer, free of cracks that might telegraph through flooring, clean, dry, and free of curing compounds, surface hardeners, and other chemicals that might interfere with bonding of flooring to substrate. B. Cementitious Sub -floor Surfaces: Verify that substrates are dry enough and ready for resilient flooring installation by testing for moisture and pH. 1. Test in accordance with ASTM F710. 2. Obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer and adhesive materials manufacturer. C. Verify that required floor -mounted utilities are in correct location. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Prepare floor substrates as recommended by flooring and adhesive manufacturers. B. Remove sub -floor ridges and bumps. Fill minor low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other defects with sub -floor filler to achieve smooth, flat, hard surface. C. Clean substrate. D. Apply primer as required to prevent "bleed -through" or interference with adhesion by substances that cannot be removed. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Starting installation constitutes acceptance of sub -floor conditions. B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Spread only enough adhesive to permit installation of materials before initial set. D. Fit joints tightly. E. Set flooring in place, press with heavy roller to attain full adhesion. F. Where type of floor finish, pattern, or color are different on opposite sides of door, terminate flooring under centerline of door. G. Install edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges, where flooring terminates, and where indicated. H. Scribe flooring to walls, columns, cabinets, floor outlets, and other appurtenances to produce tight joints. 3.04 INSTALLATION -SHEET FLOORING A. Lay flooring with joints and seams parallel to longer room dimensions, to produce minimum number of seams. Lay out seams to avoid widths less than 1/3 of roll width; match patterns at seams. B. Seal seams by heat welding where indicated. C. Coved Base: Install as detailed on drawings, using coved base filler as backing at floor to wall junction. Extend sheet flooring vertically to height indicated, and cover top edge with metal cap strip. 3.05 TILE FLOORING A. Mix tile from container to ensure shade variations are consistent when tile is placed, unless manufacturer's instructions say otherwise. B. Lay flooring with joints and seams parallel to building lines to produce symmetrical tile pattern. 3.06 RESILIENT BASE A. Fit joints tightly and make vertical. Maintain minimum dimension of 18 inches between joints. RESILIENT FLOORING 096500-3 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 B. Miter internal corners. At external corners, use premolded units. At exposed ends, use premolded units. C. Install base on solid backing. Bond tightly to wall and floor surfaces. D. Scribe and fit to door frames and other interruptions. 3.07 CLEANING A. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage. B. Clean in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.08 PROTECTION A. Prohibit traffic on resilient flooring for 48 hours after installation. END OF SECTION RESILIENT FLOORING 096500-4 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 SECTION 09 6813 TILE CARPETING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Carpet tile, loose laid with edges and control grid adhered. B. Carpet Tiles for Bedrooms and Living Room. C. Carpet base, 4" high and hemmed at top edge. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 03 3000 - Cast -in -Place Concrete: Restrictions on curing compounds for concrete slabs and floors. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM D2859 - Standard Test Method for Ignition Characteristics of Finished Textile Floor Covering Materials; 2016. B. ASTM F710 - Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring; 2011. C. CRI (CIS) - Carpet Installation Standard; Carpet and Rug Institute; 2011. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate layout of joints. C. Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance characteristics; sizes, patterns, colors available, and method of installation. D. Samples: Submit two carpet tiles illustrating color and pattern design for each carpet color selected. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. F. Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials, and suggested schedule for cleaning. G. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Section 016000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. 2. Extra Carpet Tiles: Quantity equal to 2 percent of total installed of each color and pattern installed. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing specified carpet tile with minimum three years documented experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in installing carpet tile with minimum three years documented experience and approved by carpet tile manufacturer. 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Store materials in area of installation for minimum period of 24 hours prior to installation. TILE CARPETING 096813-1 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Carpet Modular Tiles: Design Basis: Manufacturer - Mohawk - Renegade Collection, 15 oz. per yard., 10.2 stitches per inch Size: 6" x 48" Modular Plank Tiles Installation: 3 -Step Vertical Ashlar 5/4/2017 B. Tile Carpeting: Additional acceptable Manufacturers per Pre -Bid Substitution Approval. 1. Tandus: www.tandus.com. 2. Lees Carpets: www.leescarpets.com. 3. Milliken & Company: www.milliken.com. 4. Patcraft; www.patcraft.com. 5. Mohawk; www:mohawkflooring.com C. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 -Product Requirements. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Sub -Floor Filler: White premix latex; type recommended by flooring material manufacturer. B. Edge Strips: Rubber, selected color. C. Adhesives: 1. Compatible with materials being adhered; maximum VOC content of 50 g/L; CRI (GLP) certified; in lieu of labeled product, independent test report showing compliance is acceptable. D. Carpet Tile Adhesive: Recommended by carpet tile manufacturer; releasable type. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that sub -floor surfaces are smooth and flat within tolerances specified for that type of work and are ready to receive carpet tile. B. Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work, are dust -free, and are ready to receive carpet tile. C. Verify that sub -floor surfaces are dust -free and free of substances that could impair bonding of adhesive materials to sub -floor surfaces. D. Cementitious Sub -floor Surfaces: Verify that substrates are dry enough and ready for flooring installation by testing for moisture and pH. 1. Test in accordance with ASTM F710. 2. Obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by flooring material manufacturer and adhesive materials manufacturer. E. Verify that required floor -mounted utilities are in correct location. TILE CARPETING 096813-2 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 3.02 PREPARATION A. Prepare floor substrates as recommended by flooring and adhesive manufacturers. B. Remove sub -floor ridges and bumps. Fill minor or local low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other defects with sub -floor filler. C. Apply, trowel, and float filler to achieve smooth, flat, hard surface. Prohibit traffic until filler is cured. D. Vacuum clean substrate. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Starting installation constitutes acceptance of sub -floor conditions. B. Install carpet tile in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Blend carpet from different cartons to ensure minimal variation in color match. D. Cut carpet tile clean. Fit carpet tight to intersection with vertical surfaces without gaps. E. Lay carpet tile in runnig 3 -step pattern, with pile direction parallel to next unit, set parallel to building lines. F. Locate change of color or pattern between rooms under door centerline. G. Adhere carpet tile to substrate along centerline of rooms, at perimeter of rooms, where tiles are cut, and at 15 foot intervals throughout rooms. Lay remainder of tile dry over substrate. H. Trim carpet tile neatly at walls and around interruptions. I. Complete installation of edge strips, concealing exposed edges. 3.04 CLEANING A. Remove excess adhesive without damage, from floor, base, and wall surfaces. B. Clean and vacuum carpet surfaces. END OF SECTION TILE CARPETING 096813-3 a'. s ri Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 SECTION 09 9113 EXTERIOR PAINTING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Surface preparation. B. Field application of paints. C. Scope: Finish exterior surfaces exposed to view, unless fully factory -finished and unless otherwise indicated, including the following: 1. Exposed surfaces of steel lintels and ledge angles. 2. Generally Exterior Paint includeds Metal Doors on Storage Rms, Steel ext. stairs, Fiberglass Entry Doors, and door trim around Entry Doors. 3. Mechanical and Electrical: a. On the roof and outdoors, paint equipment that is exposed to weather or to view, including factory -finished materials. D. Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items: 1. Items factory -finished unless otherwise indicated; materials and products having factory -applied primers are not considered factory finished. 2. Items indicated to receive other finishes. 3. Items indicated to remain unfinished. 4. Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels, and operating parts of equipment. 5. Floors, unless specifically indicated. 6. Glass. 7. Concealed pipes, ducts, and conduits. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. MPI (APL) - Master Painters Institute Approved Products List; Master Painters and Decorators Association; current edition, www.paintinfo.com. B. MPI (APSM) - Master Painters Institute Architectural Painting Specification Manual; Current Edition, www.paintinfo.com. C. SSPC-SP 1 - Solvent Cleaning; 2015. D. SSPC-SP 6 - Commercial Blast Cleaning; 2007. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide complete list of products to be used, with the following information for each: 1. Manufacturer's name, product name and/or catalog number, and general product category (e.g. "alkyd enamel"). 2. MPI product number (e.g. MPI #47). 3. Cross-reference to specified paint system(s) product is to be used in; include description of each system. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability. EXTERIOR PAINTING 099113-1 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 51412017 B. Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing. C. Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum of 90 degrees F, in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions. 1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature ranges required by the paint product manufacturer. B. Follow manufacturer's recommended procedures for producing best results, including testing of substrates, moisture in substrates, and humidity and temperature limitations. C. Do not apply exterior paint and finishes during rain or snow, or when relative humidity Is outside the humidity ranges required by the paint product manufacturer. D. Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 50 degrees F for exterior; unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. E. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid -height at substrate surface. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Provide paints and finishes used in any individual system from the same manufacturer; no exceptions. B. Base Manufacturer: Any Manufacturer that is listed in MPI Categories. 2.02 PAINTS AND FINISHES - GENERAL A. Paints and Finishes: Ready mixed, unless required to be a field -catalyzed paint. 1. Where MPI paint numbers are specified, provide products listed in Master Painters Institute Approved Product List, current edition available at www.paintinfo.com, for specified MPI categories, except as otherwise indicated. 2. Provide paints and finishes of a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating, with good flow and brushing properties, and capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags. 3. For opaque finishes, tint each coat including primer coat and intermediate coats, one-half shade lighter than succeeding coat, with final finish coat as base color. 4. Supply each paint material in quantity required to complete entire project's work from a single production run. 5. Do not reduce, thin, or dilute paint or finishes or add materials unless such procedure is specifically described in manufacturer's product instructions. B. Sheens: Provide the sheens specified; where sheen is not specified, sheen will be selected later by Architect from the manufacturer's full line. C. Colors: To be selected from manufacturer's full range of available colors. 1. Selection to be made by Architect after award of contract. 2. Allow for minimum of three colors for each system, unless otherwise indicated, without additional cost to Owner. 2.03 PAINT SYSTEMS - EXTERIOR A. Paint E -OP - Exterior Surfaces to be Painted, Unless Otherwise Indicated: Including primed wood and Fiberglass Doors. 1. Top Coat(s): Exterior Latex; MPI.#10, 11, 15, 119, or 214. a. Products: 1) Behr Premium Plus Exterior Semi -Gloss Enamel [No. 5050]. 2) PPG Paints Fortis 350 Exterior Latex Semi -Gloss, 2406G Series. EXTERIOR PAINTING 099113-2 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 B. Paint E -OP - Exterior primed Metal fabrications: 1. Two Coat(s): Exterior Light Industrial Coating, Water Based; MPI #161, 163, or 164. a. Products: 1) PPG Paints Pitt -Tech Plus WB DTM Industrial Enamel, 90-1110 Series, Satin. (MPI #161) 2.04 PRIMERS A. Primers: Provide the following unless other primer is required or recommended by manufacturer of top coats. 1. Alkali Resistant Water Based Primer; MPI #3. a. Products: 1) Behr Premium Plus Interior/Exterior Multi -Surface Primer and Sealer [No. 4361. (MPI #3) 2) PPG Paints Perma-Crete Interior/Exterior Alkali Resistant Primer, 4-603 Series. (MPI #3) 2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Accessory Materials: Provide primers, sealers, cleaning agents, cleaning cloths, sanding materials, and clean-up materials as required for final completion of painted surfaces. B. Patching Material: Latex filler. C. Fastener Head Cover Material: Latex filler. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin application of paints and finishes until substrates have been properly prepared. B. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer. C. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any condition that may potentially effect proper application. D. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. E. Test shop -applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly and correct defects prior to application. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. C. Remove or mask surface appurtenances, including electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings, prior to preparing surfaces for finishing. D. Seal surfaces that might cause bleed through or staining of topcoat. E. Remove mildew from impervious surfaces by scrubbing with solution of tetra -sodium phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry. F. Ferrous Metal: 1. Solvent clean according to SSPC-SP 1. 2. Shop -Primed Surfaces: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare steel surfaces. Re -prime entire shop -primed item. EXTERIOR PAINTING 099113-3 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 3. Remove rust, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances using using methods I recommended in writing by paint manufacturer and blast cleaning according to SSPC-SP 6 "Commercial Blast Cleaning". Protect from corrosion until coated. G. Metal Doors to be Painted: Prime metal door top and bottom edge surfaces. 3.03 APPLICATION A. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical components and paint separately. B. Exterior Wood to Receive Opaque Finish: If final painting must be delayed more than 2 weeks after installation of woodwork, apply primer within 2 weeks and final coating within 4 weeks. C. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual". D. Where adjacent sealant is to be painted, do not apply finish coats until sealant is applied. E. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry before next coat is applied. F. Apply each coat to uniform appearance. j G. Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just prior Il to applying next coat. H. Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed prior to finishing. 3.04 CLEANING A. Collect waste material that could constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and remove daily from site. 3.05 PROTECTION j A. Protect finishes until completion of project. B. Touch-up damaged finishes after Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION EXTERIOR PAINTING 099113-4 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 SECTION 09 9123 INTERIOR PAINTING 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Surface preparation. B. Field application of paints. C. Scope: Finish interior surfaces exposed to view, unless fully factory -finished and unless otherwise Indicated, including the following: 1. Painting exposed steel structure above the main level and the roof level. 2. Both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical and telecom equipment before installing equipment (if any). 3. Elevator pit ladders. 4. Roof Access Ladders. 5. Mechanical and Electrical: a. Paint interior surfaces of air ducts that are visible through grilles and louvers with one coat of flat black paint to visible surfaces. D. Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items: 1. Items factory -finished unless otherwise indicated; materials and products having factory -applied primers are not considered factory finished. 2. Items indicated to receive other finishes. 3. Items indicated to remain unfinished. 4. Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels, bar code labels, and operating parts of equipment. 5. Stainless steel, anodized aluminum, bronze, terne coated stainless steel, and lead items. 6. Floors, unless specifically indicated. 7. Ceramic and other tiles. 8. Glass. 9. Concrete masonry units in utility, mechanical, and electrical spaces. 10. Acoustical materials, unless specifically indicated. 11. Concealed pipes, ducts, and conduits. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 05 5000 - Metal Fabrications: Shop -primed items. B. Section 05 5100 - Metal Stairs: Shop -primed items. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D - National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Architectural Coatings; U.S. Environmental Protection Agency; current edition. B. ASTM D4442 - Standard Test Methods for Direct Moisture Content Measurement of Wood and Wood -Based Materials; 2015. C. MPI (APL) - Master Painters Institute Approved Products List; Master Painters and Decorators Association; current edition, www.paintinfo.com. D. MPI (APSM) - Master Painters Institute Architectural Painting Specification Manual; Current Edition, www.paintinfo.com. E. SSPC-SP 1 - Solvent Cleaning; 2015. F. SSPC-SP 6 - Commercial Blast Cleaning; 2007. INTERIOR PAINTING 099123-1 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide complete list of products to be used, with the following information for each: 1. Manufacturer's name, product name and/or catalog number, and general product category (e.g. "alkyd enamel"). 2. MPI product number (e.g. MPI #47). 3. Cross-reference to specified paint system(s) product is to be used in; include description of each system. C. Samples: Submit two paper chip samples, 6 by 6 inch in size illustrating range of colors and textures available for each surface finishing product scheduled. D. Certification: By manufacturer that paints and finishes comply with VOC limits specified. E. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate special surface preparation procedures. F. Maintenance Data: Submit data including finish schedule showing where each product/color/finish was used, product technical data sheets, material safety data sheets (MSDS), care and cleaning instructions, and repair of painted and finished surfaces, G. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. 2. Extra Paint and Finish Materials: 1 gallon of each color; from the same product run, store where directed. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing In manufacturing the products specified, with minimum ten years documented experience. B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified with minimum five years experience and approved by manufacturer. 1.06 MOCK-UP A. See Section 014000 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for mock-up. B. Provide panel, 12 feet long by 12 feet wide, illustrating paint color, texture, and finish. C. Provide door and frame assembly illustrating paint color, texture, and finish. D. Mock-up may remain as part of the work. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability. B. Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and Instructions for mixing and reducing. C. Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum of 90 degrees F, in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions. 1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature ranges required by the paint product manufacturer. B. Follow manufacturer's recommended procedures for producing best results, including testing of substrates, moisture in substrates, and humidity and temperature limitations. C. Minimum Application Temperatures for Paints: 50 degrees F for interiors unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. D. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid -height at substrate surface. INTERIOR PAINTING 099123-2 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Provide paints and finishes from the same manufacturer to the greatest extent possible. 1. In the event that a single manufacturer cannot provide specified products, minor exceptions will be permitted provided approval by Architect is obtained using the specified procedures for substitutions. 2. Substitution of a different paint system using MPI -approved products by the same manufacturer will be considered. B. Paints: 1. Base Manufacturer: Any Manufacturer that is listed in MPI Catagories.. C. Primer Sealers: Same manufacturer as top coats. D. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 PAINTS AND FINISHES • GENERAL A. Paints and Finishes: Ready mixed, unless intended to be a field -catalyzed paint. 1. Where MPI paint numbers are specified, provide products listed in Master Painters Institute Approved Product List, current edition available at www.paintinfo.com, for specified MPI categories, except as otherwise indicated. 2. Provide paints and finishes of a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating, with good flow and brushing properties, and capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags. 3. Provide materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 4. For opaque finishes, tint each coat including primer coat and intermediate coats, one-half shade lighter than succeeding coat, with final finish coat as base color. 5. Supply each paint material in quantity required to complete entire project's work from a single production run. 6. Do not reduce, thin, or dilute paint or finishes or add materials unless such procedure is specifically described in manufacturer's product instructions. B. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content: 1. Provide paints and finishes that comply with the most stringent requirements specified in the following: a. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D --National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Architectural Coatings. 2. Determination of VOC Content: Testing and calculation in accordance with 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24), exclusive of colorants added to a tint base and water added at project site; or other method acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C. Flammability: Comply with applicable code for surface burning characteristics. D. Sheens: Provide the sheens specified; where sheen is not specified, sheen will be selected later bVArchitect from the manufacturer's full line. E. Colors: As indicated on drawings. 1. Allow for minimum of three colors for each system, unless otherwise indicated, without additional cost to Owner. 2. Extend colors to surface edges; colors may change at any edge as directed by Architect. 3. In utility areas, finish equipment, piping, conduit, and exposed duct work in colors according to the color coding scheme Indicated. INTERIOR PAINTING 099123-3 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 2.03 PAINT SYSTEMS - INTERIOR A. Paint I -OP - Interior Surfaces to be Painted, Unless Otherwise Indicated: Including gypsum board, concrete masonry units, wood, and shop primed steel. 1. Two top coats and one coat primer. 2. Top Coat(s): Interior Latex; MPI #43, 44, 52, 53, 54, or 114. a. Products: 1) PPG Paints Speedhide Pro -EV Interior Latex Semi -Gloss Enamel, 12-510 Series. (MPI #54) 2) Sherwin-Williams Harmony Interior Acrylic Latex, Semi -Gloss. (MPI #54) B. Paint I -OP -MD -DT - Medium Duty Door/Trim: For surfaces subject to frequent contact by occupants, including metals and wood: 1. Medium duty applications include doors and door frames. 2. Two top coats and one coat primer. 3. Top Coat(s): Interior Light Industrial Coating, Water Based; MPI #151, 153 or 154. a. Products: 1) PPG Paints Pitt -Tech Plus WB DTM Industrial Enamel, 90-1210 Series, Semi -Gloss. (MPI #153) 2) Sherwin-Williams Pro Industrial Acrylic Coating, Semi -Gloss. (MPI #153) C. Paint I -OP -MD -WC -Medium Duty Vertical and Overhead: Including shop primed steel. 1. Two top coats and one coat primer. 2. Top Coat(s): High Performance Architectural Interior Latex; MPI #138, 139, 140, or 141. a. Products: 1) PPG Paints Pitt -Glaze WB1 Pre -Catalyzed Water -Borne Acrylic Epoxy, 16-310 Series, Eggshell. 2) Sherwin-Williams Pro Industrial Pre -Catalyzed Waterbased Epoxy, Semi -Gloss. (MPI #141) 2.04 PRIMERS A. Primers: Provide the following unless other primer is required or recommended by manufacturer of top coats. 1. Interior/Exterior Latex Block Filler; MPI 94. a. Products: 1) Pratt & Lambert Pro -Hide Silver Interior/Exterior Latex Block Filler. 2. Interior Latex Primer Sealer; MPI #50. a. Products: 1) PPG Paints Speedhide Pro -EV Latex Sealer, 12-900. 3. Interior Drywall Primer Sealer. a. Products: 1) PPG Paints Speedhide Pro -EV Latex Sealer, 12-900. 2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Accessory Materials: Provide primers, sealers, cleaning agents, cleaning cloths, sanding materials, and clean-up materials as required for final completion of painted surfaces. B. Patching Material: Latex filler. C. Fastener Head Cover Material: Latex filler. INTERIOR PAINTING 099123-4 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer. B. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any condition that may potentially effect proper application. C. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums: 1. Gypsum Wallboard: 12 percent. 2. Masonry, Concrete, and Concrete Masonry Units : 12 percent. 3. Interior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D4442. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly and correct defects prior to application. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. C. Remove or mask surface appurtenances, including electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings, prior to preparing surfaces or finishing. D. Seal surfaces that might cause bleed through or staining of topcoat. E. Masonry: 1. Prepare surface as recommended by top coat manufacturer. F. Gypsum Board: Fill minor defects with filler compound. Spot prime defects after repair. G. Ferrous Metal: 1. Solvent clean according to SSPC-SP1. 2. Shop -Primed Surfaces: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare steel surfaces. Re -prime entire shop -primed item. 3. Remove rust, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances using using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer and blast cleaning according to SSPC-SP 6 "Commercial Blast Cleaning". Protect from corrosion until coated. H. Wood Surfaces to Receive Opaque Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior to priming. Seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after primer has dried; sand between coats. Back prime concealed surfaces before installation. I. Wood Doors to be Field -Finished: Seal wood door top and bottom edge surfaces with clear sealer. 3.03 APPLICATION A. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical components and paint separately. B. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual". C. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry before next coat is applied. D. Apply each coat to uniform appearance in thicknesses specified by manufacturer. E. Sand wood and metal surfaces lightly between coats to achieve required finish. F. Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just prior to applying next coat. G. Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed prior to finishing. INTERIOR PAINTING 099123-5 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 014000 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for field inspection. 3.05 CLEANING A. Collect waste material that could constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and remove daily from site. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Protect finishes until completion of project. B. Touch-up damaged finishes after Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION INTERIOR PAINTING 099123-6 Student Housing BVII, LLC JFiS 1619 5/4/2017 SECTION 14 2400 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Complete hydraulic elevator systems. 1. Passenger type. 2. Two (2) Elevators. 3. Four (4) Levels serving Two Similar Buildings. B. Elevator Maintenance Contract. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 03 3000 - Cast -in -Place Concrete: Includes elevator machine foundation, elevator pit, and grouting thresholds. B. Section 04 2000 - Unit Masonry: Masonry hoistway enclosure; building -in and grouting hoistway door frames. C. Section 05 5000 - Metal Fabrications: Includes elevator pit ladder, sill supports, divider beams, and overhead hoist beams. D. Section 09 6500 - Resilient Flooring: Floor finish in car. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ADA Standards - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards for Accessible Design; 2010. B. ASME A17.1 - Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators; 2013. C. ASME A17.2 - Guide for Inspection of Elevators, Escalators, and Moving Walks; 2014. D. NEMA LD 3 - High -Pressure Decorative Laminates; 2005. E. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators; 2014. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 013000 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on the following items. 1. Signal and operating fixtures, operating panels, and indicators. 2. Car design, dimensions, layout, and components. 3. Car and hoistway door and frame details. 4. Electrical characteristics and connection requirements. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate the following information. 1. Locations of Elevator Machine Equipment: Driving machines, power units, controllers, and other component. 2. Hoistway Components: Car guide rails, buffers, jack unit and other components. 3. Rail bracket spacing; maximum loads imposed on guide rails requiring load transfer to building structural framing. 4. Clearances and over -travel of car. 5. Locations in hoistway and machine room of traveling cables and connections for car lighting and telephone. HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14 2400 -1 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 6. Location and sizes of doors and frames. 7. Electrical characteristics and connection requirements. 8. Show arrangement of elevator equipment in machine room, and allow for clear passage of equipment through access door. D. Samples: Submit samples illustrating car interior finishes, car and hoistway door and frame finishes, and handrail material and finish in the form of cut sheets or finish color selection brochures. E. Warranty Documentation: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. F. Initial Maintenance Contract. G. Maintenance Contract: Submit proposal to Owner for standard one year continuing maintenance contract agreement in accordance with ASME A17.1 and requirements as indicated, starting on date initial maintenance contract is scheduled to expire. 1. Indicate in proposal the services, obligations, conditions, and terms for agreement period and for renewal options. 2. Use form, Draft of Elevator Maintenance Agreement, provided at the end of this section. H. Operation and Maintenance Data: 1. Parts catalog with complete list of equipment replacement parts; identify each entry with equipment description and identifying code. 2. Operation and maintenance manual. 3. Schematic drawings and wiring diagrams. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum ten years documented experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Trained personnel and supervisor on staff of elevator equipment manufacturer. C. Testing Agency Qualifications: Independent firm specializing in performing testing and inspections of the type specified in this section. 1.06 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Provide 12 month manufacturer warranty for elevator operating equipment and devices from Date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Hydraulic Elevators -Basis of Design: Schindler Model 3500- Low -Rise Holeless Hydraulic Elevator, 330A General Purpose, Dual Jack, 4 Openings.. B. Hydraulic Elevators - Other Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Otis Elevator Company: www.otis.com. 2. Schindler Elevator Corporation; Schindler 330A Low -Rise Holeless Hydraulic Elevator, , Dual Jack, Front Opening: www.us.schindier.com. 3. ThyssenKrupp Elevator: www.thyssenkruppelevator.com. C. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 1. For any product not identified as Basis of Design, submit information as specified for substitutions. HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 142400-2 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 2.02 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS A. Hydraulic Passenger Elevator, Type 3500: 1. Hydraulic Elevator Equipment: a. Holeless hydraulic with cylinder mounted within hoistway. 2. Operation Control Type: a. Selective Collective Automatic Operation Control. 3. Interior Car Height: 96 inch. 4. Electrical Power: 208 volts; alternating current (AC); three phase; 60 Hz. 5. Rated Net Capacity: 3500 lbs. 6. Rated Speed: 150 ft per minute. 7. Hoistway Size: 100 inch wide by 88 inch deep. 8. Platform Size: 84 inch wide by 75 inch deep. 9. Door Width: 42 inch 10. Interior Car Platform Size: 80 inch wide by 65 inch deep. 11. Elevator Pit Depth: 48 inch. 12. Overhead Clearance at Top Floor: 147 inch. 13. Travel Distance: As indicated on drawings. 14. Number of Stops: As indicated on drawings. 15. Number of Openings: 3 Front; 0 Rear. 2.03 COMPONENTS A. Elevator Equipment: 1. Motors, Hydraulic Equipment, Controllers, Controls, Buttons, Wiring, Devices, and Indicators: Comply with NFPA 70. 2. Guide Rails, Cables, Buffers, Attachment Brackets and Anchors: Design criteria for components includes safety factors in accordance with applicable requirements of Elevator Code; ASME A17.1. 3. Buffers: a. Spring type for elevators with speed less than 200 ft per minute. 4. Lubrication Equipment: a. Provide grease fittings for periodic lubrication of bearings. b. Grease Cups: Automatic feed type. c. Lubrication Points: Visible and easily accessible. B. Electrical Equipment: 1. Motors: NEMA MG 1. 2. Boxes, Conduit, Wiring, and Devices: As required by NFPA 70. 3. Sump Pump in Pit: Refer to Section 22 0513. 4. Spare Conductors: Include 10 percent extra conductors and two pairs of shielded audio cables in traveling cables. 5. Include wiring and connections to elevator devices remote from hoistway and between elevator machine rooms. Provide additional components and wiring to suit machine room layout. 2.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with ASME A17.1, applicable local codes, and authorities having jurisdiction (AHJ). B. Accessibility Requirements: Comply with ADA Standards. C. Perform structural steel design, fabrication, and installation in accordance with AISC 360. HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 142400-3 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 D. Comply with seismic design requirements in accordance with ASME A17.1, applicable local codes, and authorities having jurisdiction (AHJ). 1. Comply with Elevator Safety Requirements for Seismic Risk Zone in accordance with ASME A17.1 and other related requirements. 2. Provide earthquake emergency operations in accordance with ASME A17.1 requirements. E. Perform welding of steel in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1 M. F. Fabricate and install door and frame assemblies in accordance with NFPA 80 and in compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. G. Perform electrical work in accordance with NFPA 70. H. Comply with venting or pressurization of the hoistway design in accordance with HVAC system requirements and authorities having jurisdiction. I. Comply with fire protection sprinkler system of the hoistway design in accordance with NFPA 13 requirements and authorities having jurisdiction. Refer to Section 21 1300. 2.05 MATERIALS A. Cylinder Casing: ASTM Al 39/139M, Grade A steel. B. Rolled Steel Sections, Shapes, Rods: ASTM A36/A36M. C. Steel Sheet: ASTM A1008/A1008M, Designation CS (commercial steel), with matte finish. D. Sheet Steel: Hot -dipped galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A653/A653M, with G90/Z275 coating. E. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A666, Type 304; No. 4 Brushed finish unless otherwise indicated. 2.06 OPERATION CONTROLS A. Elevator Controls: Provide landing operating panels and landing indicator panels. 1. Landing Operating Panels: Metallic type, one for originating "Up" and one for originating "Down" calls, one button only at terminating landings; with illuminating indicators. 2. Landing Indicator Panels: Illuminating. 3. Comply with ADA Standards for elevator controls. B. Interconnect elevator control system with building security, fire alarm, card access, smoke alarm, and building management control systems. C. Door Operation Controls: 1. Program door control to open doors automatically when car arrives at floor landing. 2. Render "Door Close" button inoperative when car is standing at dispatch landing with doors open. 3. Door Safety Devices: Moveable, retractable safety edges, quiet in operation; equipped with photo -electric light rays. D. Provide "Firefighter's Emergency Operation" in accordance with ASME A17.1, applicable building codes, and authorities having jurisdiction (AHJ). Locate at Main Entry ( Security Area). 2.07 OPERATION CONTROL TYPE A. Selective Collective Automatic Operation Control: Applies to car in single elevator shaft. 1. Refer to description provided in ASME A17.1. 2. Automatic operation by means of one button in the car for each landing served and by "UP" and "DOWN" buttons at the landings. 3. Stops are registered by momentary actuation of landing car buttons without consideration of the number of buttons actuated or the sequence buttons are actuated, but the stops are made in the order that landings are reached in each direction of travel. 4. All "UP" landing calls are made when car is traveling in the up direction. 5. All "DOWN" landing calls are made when car is traveling in the down direction. 6. The uppermost and lowermost calls are answered as soon as they are reached without consideration of the car travel direction. HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 142400-4 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 2.08 INDEPENDENT SERVICE CONTROL: A. Provide key operated "Independent Service" on car operating panel. Key activation will remove that car from normal operation and cancel pre -registered car calls. B. Car will respond to selected floor. Car will not respond to any calls from landing call buttons. Car will only respond to calls placed on the car operating panel. Doors will remain open at last landing requested. Doors will close with a constant pressure on "Door Close" button. C. Key activation to normal operation will return car to normal operation. 2.09 MATERIALS A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221 M), natural anodized finish unless otherwise indicated. B. Plywood: PS 1, Structural I, Grade C -D or better, sanded. C. Resilient Flooring: Vinyl tile flooring and Resilient base, as specified in Section 09 6500. D. Plastic Laminate: NEMA LD 3, Type HGS, color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard line of colors. 2.10 CAR AND HOISTWAY ENTRANCES A. Elevator, No. 1 & 2: 1. Car and Hoistway Entrances, Courtyard: a. Framed Opening Finish and Material: Alkyd enamel on steel. b. Car Door Material: Powder coat on steel, with rigid sandwich panel construction. c. Hoistway Door Material: Powder coat on steel, with rigid sandwich panel construction. d. Door Type: Double leaf. e. Door Operation: Side opening, two speed. 2.11 CAR EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS A. Elevator Car, No. 1 & 2: 1. Car Operating Panel: Provide main and auxiliary; flush -mounted applied face plate, with illuminated call buttons corresponding to floors served with "Door Open/Door Close" buttons, "Door Open" button, "Door Close" button, and alarm button. a. Panel Material: Integral with front return; one per car. b. Car Floor Position Indicator: Above door with illuminating position indicators. c. Locate alarm button where it is unlikely to be accidentally actuated; not more than 54 inch above car finished floor. 2. Flooring: LVT Vinyl. 3. Wall Base: Resilient base, 4 inch high. 4. Front Return Panel: Match material of car door. 5. Door Wall: Plastic laminate on plywood. 6. Side Walls: Plastic laminate on plywood. 7. Rear Wall: Plastic laminate on plywood. 8. Hand Rail: Aluminum, at all three sides. Provide open clearance space 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) wide to face of wall. a. Aluminum Finish: Clear anodized. 9. Ceiling: a. Panel Finish: Baked enamel, color as selected. b. Lighting: Compact fluorescent downlights. 2.12 EXTERIOR HOISTWAY ENTRANCES A. Hoistway Entrances; Ground Level: 1. Framed Opening Material and Finish: Brushed stainless steel. 2. Door Material and Finish: Brushed stainless steel. 3. Hoistway Fire Rating: 2 Hours. 4. Door Fire Rating: 1-1/2 Hours. 5. Sills: Extruded aluminum. HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 142400-5 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 B. Hoistway Entrances; Upper Floor Elevator Landings: 1. Framed Opening Material and Finish: Painted steel. 2. Door Material and Finish: Painted steel. 3. Hoistway Fire Rating: 2 Hours. 4. Door Fire Rating: 1-1/2 Hours. 5. Sills: Extruded aluminum. C. Car Doors: 1. Car Door Material and Finish: Painted steel. 2. Car Doors: 18 gage, 0.0478 inch minimum sheet thickness, rigid sandwich panel construction. 3. Door Fire Rating: 1-1/2 Hours. 4. Sills: Extruded aluminum. D. Hoistway Entrances and Car Doors: 1. Height: 84 inch. 2. Door Type: Double leaf. 3. Door Operation: Side opening, two speed. E. Thresholds: Form to align with frame return and coordinate with floor finish. F. Gasketing: Provide acoustical type gasketing at hoistway doors and frames to eliminate audible noise due to car activities in the hoistway, and air pressure differential between hoistway and landing floors. 2.13 MACHINE ROOM FITTINGS A. Wall -Mounted Frames: Glazed with clear plastic; sized as required. Provide one chart each for master electric and hydraulic schematic and for lubrication chart. Install charts. B. Key Cabinet: Wall -mounted, lockable, keyed to building keying system, for control and operating panel keys. C. Monitoring Device Interface: 1. Fabricate one multiple terminal block in controller relay panel or selector, in location indicated, for connection of monitoring devices for: a. Landing and car registration circuits. b. Motor generator running circuits. c. Load weighing circuits. d. Up and down peak programming circuits. e. Independent service switches. 2. Label terminals for use with alligator test clips. 2.14 FINISHES A. Baked Enamel on Steel: Clean and degrease metal surface; apply one coat of primer sprayed and baked; two coats of enamel sprayed and baked. B. Finish Paint for Metal Surfaces: Alkyd enamel, semi -gloss, color as selected, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction. C. Clear Anodized Finish: Class I, AAMA 611 AA-M12C22A41 Clear anodic coating with electrolytically deposited organic seal; not less than 0.7 mils thick. HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 142400-6 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 2.15 CAR FINISH MATERIALS A. Car Operating Panel: Provide main and auxiliary; flush -mounted applied face plate, with illuminated call buttons corresponding to floors served, alarm button, and 'Door Open" button. ' 1. Position alarm button where it is unlikely to be accidentally actuated; not more than 54 inch above car finished floor. B. Comply with ADA Standards for operating panel and interior layout of car. C. Stainless Steel Hand Rail: Round, 1-1/2 inch diameter, with No. 4 Brushed finish. D. Rails: Provide 1-1/2 inch clearance space from wall. E. Ceiling System: 1. Frame Finish: Powder coated, color as selected.. 2. Panel Finish: Powder coated, color as selected. 3. Lighting: Compact fluorescent downlights. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting this work. B. Verify that hoistway, pit, and machine room are ready for work of this section. C. Verify hoistway shaft and openings are of correct size and within tolerance. D. Verify location and size of machine foundation and position of machine foundation bolts. E. Verify that electrical power is available and of correct characteristics. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Arrange for temporary electrical power for installation work and testing of elevator components. Comply with requirements of Section 01 5000. B. Maintain elevator pit excavation free of water. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Coordinate this work with installation of hoistway wall construction. B. Install system components, and connect equipment to building utilities. C. Provide conduit, electrical boxes, wiring, and accessories. D. Install hydraulic piping between cylinder and pump unit. E. Mount machines, motors, and pumps on vibration and acoustic isolators, on bed plate and concrete pad. 1. Securely fasten to building supports. 2. Prevent lateral displacement. F. Size hoistway and machine room in accordance with approved shop drawings. G. Install guide rails to allow for thermal expansion and contraction movement of guide rails. H. Accurately machine and align guide rails, forming smooth joints with machined splice plates. I. Bolt brackets to self drilling expansion shell anchors. J. Install hoistway door sills, frames, and headers in hoistway walls; grout sills in place, set hoistway floor entrances in alignment with car openings, and align plumb with hoistway. K. Fill hoistway door frames solid with grout in accordance with Section 04 2000. L. Structural Metal Surfaces: Clean surfaces of rust, oil or grease; wipe clean with solvent; prime two coats. HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 142400-7 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 M. Machine Room Components: Clean and degrease; prime one coat, finish with one coat of enamel. N. Wood Surfaces not Exposed to Public View: Finish with one coat primer; one coat enamel. 0. Adjust equipment for smooth and quiet operation. 3.04 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Guide Rail Alignment: Plumb and parallel to each other in accordance with ASME At 7.1 and ASME A17.2. B. Car Movement on Aligned Guide Rails: Smooth movement, without any objectionable lateral or oscillating movement or vibration. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 014000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements. B. Testing and inspection by regulatory agencies certified in accordance with ASME QEI-1 will be performed at their discretion. 1. Schedule tests with agencies and notify Owner and Architect. 2. Obtain permits as required to perform tests. 3. Document regulatory agency tests and inspections in accordance with requirements. 4. Perform tests required by regulatory agencies. 5. Furnish test and approval certificates issued by authorities having jurisdiction. C. Perform testing and inspection in accordance with requirements. 1. Inspectors shall be certified in accordance with ASME QEI-1. 2. Perform tests as required by ASME A17.2. 3. Provide at least two weeks written notice of date and time of tests and inspections. 4. Supply instruments and execute specific tests. D. Operational Tests: 1. Perform operational tests in the presence of Owner and Architect. 2. Test single elevator system by transporting at least 12 persons up from main floor to top floor landings during a five minute period. 3. At an agreed time, and the building occupied with normal building traffic, conduct tests to verify performance. a. Furnish event recording of each landing call registrations, time initiated, and response time throughout entire working day. 4. Set period of time elevator takes to travel between typical floor landings at not more than 10 seconds. a. Measure time from moment doors start to close until car has stopped level at next floor landing and doors are opening. 3.06 ADJUSTING A. Adjust for smooth acceleration and deceleration of car so not to cause passenger discomfort. B. Adjust with automatic floor leveling feature at each floor landing to reach 1/4 inch maximum from flush with sill. 3.07 CLEANING A. Remove protective coverings from finished surfaces. B. Clean surfaces and components and make ready for inspection. HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 142400-8 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/4/2017 3.08 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for closeout submittals. B. See Section 01 7900 - Demonstration and Training, for additional requirements. C. Demonstrate proper operation of equipment to Owner's designated representative. D. Demonstration: Demonstrate operation of system to Owner's personnel. 1. Use operation and maintenance data as reference during demonstration. 2. Briefly describe function, operation, cleaning and maintenance of each component. E. Training: Train Owner's personnel on cleaning and operation and maintenance of system. 1. Use operation and maintenance manual as training reference, supplemented with additional training materials as required. 2. Provide minimum of two hours of training. 3. Instructor: Manufacturer's training personnel. 4. Location: At project site, unless noted otherwise. 3.09 PROTECTION A. Do not permit construction traffic within car after cleaning. B. Protect installed products until Date of Substantial Completion. C. Touch-up, repair, or replace damaged products and materials prior to Date of Substantial Completion. 3.10 MAINTENANCE A. Provide Initial Maintenance Contract of elevator system and components in accordance with ASME A17.1 and requirements as indicated for 12 months from Date of Substantial Completion B. Perform maintenance contract services using competent and qualified personnel under the supervision and direct employ of the elevator manufacturer or installer. C. Examine system components periodically. D. Include systematic examination, adjustment, and lubrication of elevator equipment. Maintain and repair or replace parts whenever required using parts produced by the original equipment manufacturer. E. Perform work without removing cars from use during peak traffic periods. F. Provide emergency call back service during regular working hours throughout period of this maintenance contract. G. Maintain an adequate stock of parts for replacement or emergency purposes, and have personnel available to ensure the fulfillment of this maintenance contract without unreasonable loss of time. END OF SECTION HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 142400-9 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/2/2017 SECTION 21 0500 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Pipe, fittings, valves, and connections for sprinkler systems. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Furnish and install an automatic fire sprinkler protection system as described in Contract Documents. 1. System shall be installed beginning with connection to the new building service main located as shown and work shall include but not necessarily be limited to the following areas: a. New construction 2. Provide double check valve on fire sprinkler service lines. 3. Furnish and install post indicator valves on all fire line services. 1.3 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 21 1300 - Wet Pipe Fire Suppression Sprinklers: Sprinkler systems design. 1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A 795/A 795M - Standard Specification for Black and Hot -Dipped Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe for Fire Protection Use; 2008. B. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; 2010. C. NFPA 13 - Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems; National Fire Protection Association; 2010. D. UL (FPED) - Fire Protection Equipment Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition. E. UL 262 - Gate Valves for Fire -Protection Service; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. F. UL 312 - Check Valves for Fire -Protection Service; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.5 APPLICABLE CODES AND ORDINANCES A. The following form a part of this specification: 1. National Fire Protection Association Pamphlets: Standards of the National Fire Protection Association for the Installation of Sprinkler and Fire Protection Equipment. a. Pamphlet No. 13, 13D, 13R, 14, and applicable standards. b. Pamphlet No. 231, 231C and applicable standards. c. And as approved over this geographical area 2. International Building Code 3. International Fire Cade 4. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. Publications: List of Inspected Fire Protection Equipment and Materials. 5. Applicable state and local codes and ordinances pertaining to fire protection systems and equipment. 6. Requirements of State Fire Marshal. 7. Requirements of Local Fire Marshal. 8. Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators. 9. Life Safety Code. COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 0500-1 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/2/2017 B. Work in Idaho must be done by an Idaho licensed sprinkler contractor and plans submitted to and approved by the office of the Idaho State Fire Marshal. C. The contractor shall notify the Idaho State Fire Marshall and the Local Fire Department to witness the test of the fire sprinkler system. 1.6 VERIFICATIONS AND REQUIREMENTS A. Fire Sprinkler Contractor shall verify adequacy of the water service to the building. B. Fire Sprinkler Contractor shall also check with the Local City Fire Marshal, the State Fire Marshal and the Fire Rating Bureau to determine requirements for the following: 1. Fire department connections 2. Test connections 3. Exterior and interior piping 4. Spacing of heads 5. Rating of building 1.7 FEES AND PERMITS A. Fees or permits required to furnish and install the fire protection system shall be included as part of this Section of the Contract Documents. 1.8 PIPE SIZING A. Fire Sprinkler Contractor shall be required to size all piping for this project using the Hydraulic Calculation Method in accordance with requirements of National Fire Protection Association Pamphlet No. 13 for Hydraulically Designed Sprinkler Systems 1.9 SUBMITTALS A. See General Section — for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalogue information. Indicate valve data and ratings. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate pipe materials used, jointing methods, supports, Floor and wall penetration seals. Indicate installation, layout, weights, mounting and support details, and piping connections. 1. Fire Sprinkler Contractor shall submit complete layouts to underwriters having jurisdiction and the State Fire Marshal for approval prior to submission to Architect. a. Particular attention shall be paid in layout to coordination of sprinkler piping and structural system of beams and mechanical ductwork. Notations shall be made on shop drawings where pipes are required to pass thru beams. b. Wall sprinkler shall be used in ramp areas where headroom is at a minimum and shall be arranged so as not to conflict with egress and door swings. C. Careful coordination shall be given to avoid changing ceiling lighting systems as shown on drawings. d. Sprinklers must be spaced equally with lights and ceiling diffusers. e. No fabrication of piping shall be done until piping drawings are accepted by the Architect, the Mechanical Engineer and State Fire Marshal. 2. The Fire Protection Sprinkler Contractor shall submit drawings that have been prepared and overseen by a NICET Certified Engineering Technician in fire protection with a minimum, Level 3 rating, or by a Professional Engineer in fire protection. This person shall be employed and be a staff member of the Fire Protection Contractor and shall be required to certify that the drawings are in accordance with the specifications and all regulatory requirements. All drawings shall be signed by the CET or stamped and signed by the Professional Engineer. 3. All area with exposed structure, piping shall neatly follow and be held tight to the line of the deck. When approved by the Architect, piping may follow the line of the exposed structure. D. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and tag numbering. COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 0500-2 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/2/2017 E. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions and spare parts lists. 1.10 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Installer: The sub -contractor for the fire protection system shall be duly licensed by the state, county and city in which the project is being constructed. The fire sprinkler contractor must be engaged in the installation of the types of automatic fire sprinkler system required for this project and be fully familiar with all local conditions, specified codes and requirements. Prior to installation, submit data for approval showing that the Fire Sprinkler Contractor has successfully installed Automatic Fire Sprinkler Systems of the type and design as specified herein. C. Designer: The designer for the fire sprinkler system shall be a staff employee of the 'Installer" and shall be either a licensed Fire Protection Engineer in the State of Idaho, or a Certified Engineering Technician in Fire Protection, Level III (NICET Level III). Registration or certification shall be active during the entire contract period. The designer shall certify that the drawings and installation are in accordance with the intent of the plans and specifications. The designer shall make a complete and final inspection of the installation, including operating all alarms, control valves, checking all piping, seismic bracing, hangers, etc. After checking all components of the system, the designer shall provide a letter stating the installation is complete, operational and in accordance with approved plans and specifications. If changes have been made in the installation since the plans were approved, the designer shall correct the shop drawings and provide as -built drawings to the Owner with the letter. D. Valves: Bear UL label or marking. Provide manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body. E. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. Final Inspection: The Sprinkler Contractor CET or PE responsible for overseeing this project shall make a complete and final inspection of the installation, checking out all alarms, valves, piping, seismic bracing, hangers, etc., conduct a final main drain test on the system, and provide documentation of this final inspection 1.11 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store valves in shipping containers, with labeling in place. B. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves. C. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS A. Sprinkler Systems: Conform work to NFPA 13. B. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME Code. 2.2 BURIED PIPING A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M Schedule 40 or ASTM A 795 Standard Weight, black, with AWWA C105 polyethylene jacket, or double layer, half -lapped polyethylene tape. 1. Steel Fittings: ASME B16.9, wrought steel or buttwelded; with double layer, half -lapped polyethylene tape. 2. Cast Iron Fittings: ASME B16.1, Flanges and Flanged fittings. COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION 210500-3 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/2/2017 2.3 2.4 3. Joints: Welded in accordance with AWS D1.1. 4. Casing: Closed glass cell insulation. ABOVE GROUND PIPING A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 795 Schedule 10 or ASTM A 53 Schedule 40, black. 1. Steel Fittings: ASME 816.9, wrought steel or buttwelded. 2. Cast Iron Fittings: ASME B16.1, flanges and flanged fittings, ASME B16.4 and threaded fittings. 3. Malleable Iron Fittings: ASME B16.3 and threaded fittings. 4. Mechanical Grooved Couplings: Malleable iron housing clamps to engage and lock, "C" shaped elastomeric sealing gasket, steel bolts, nuts, and washers; galvanized for galvanized pipe. PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 inch (15 to 40 mm): Malleable iron, adjustable swivel, split ring. B. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 inches (50 mm) and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. C. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods. D. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 inches (80 mm): Cast iron hook. E. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 inches (100 mm) and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp. F. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp. G. Floor Support: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. H. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FIRE SPRINKLER CONTRACTOR A. It is the responsibility of the Fire Sprinkler Contractor to inspect the job site prior to fabricating materials. The Fire Sprinkler Contractor shall coordinate the design with all plans and other contractors so that construction can be done without problems. The Fire Sprinkler Contractor shall call for a meeting with all trades to coordinate and sequence installation with the progress of other mechanical and structural systems, and work out spaces for all of the work. By doing so, the project will proceed at the General Contractor's completion schedule. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe. B. Remove scale and foreign material, from inside and outside, before assembly. C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install sprinkler system and service main piping, hangers, and supports in accordance with NFPA 13. B. Route piping in orderly manner, plumb and parallel to building structure. Maintain gradient. C. Install piping to conserve building space, to not interfere with use of space and other work. COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION 210500-4 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/2/2017 D. Areas Subject to Freezing Temperatures: 1. Branches serving these areas may contain a cold weather valve and anti -freeze loop or dry heads. E. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. F. Sleeve pipes passing through partitions, walls, and floors. G. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment. H. Pipe Hangers and Supports: 1. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent work. 2. Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow. 3. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. Design hangers for pipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe. 4. Support vertical piping at every other floor. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping. 5. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or trapeze hangers. 6. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping. 7. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Refer to Painting Section. Hangers and supports located in crawl spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed. I. Slope piping and arrange systems to drain at low points. Use eccentric reducers to maintain bottom of pipe level. J. Prepare pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories for finish painting. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding. Refer to General Painting Section, K. Do not penetrate building structural members unless indicated and approved in writing by the Structural Engineer. L. Provide sleeves when penetrating footings, floors, and walls. Seal pipe and sleeve penetrations to achieve fire resistance equivalent to fire separation required. M. When installing more than one piping system material, ensure system components are compatible and joined to ensure the integrity of the system. Provide necessary joining fittings. Ensure flanges, union, and couplings for servicing are consistently provided. N. Die cut threaded joints with full cut standard taper pipe threads with red lead and linseed oil or other non- toxic joint compound applied to male threads only. 0. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. Remove protective coatings prior to installation. P. Provide gate valves for shut-off or isolating service. Q. Provide drain valves at main shut-off valves, low points of piping and apparatus. R. Work shall be executed and inspected in accord with laws, ordinances, rules and regulations of local authorities having jurisdiction over such work. Should any change in the drawings or specifications be required to conform to these ordinances, Fire Sprinkler Contractor shall notify the Architect -Engineer at time of submitting his bid. After entering into the contract, Fire Sprinkler Contractor shall be held to complete all necessary work to meet local requirements without expense to Owner. S. Sprinkler system shall be installed such that spacing of sprinkler heads in relation to ceiling shall not exceed that permitted for type of ceiling construction involved. T. General Contractor is required under contract stipulations to leave chases and openings in walls, floors, ceilings, partitions and beams, etc., provided Fire Sprinkler Contractor shall furnish to General Contractor full information as to locations, dimensions, etc., of such chases and openings including the provision and COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 0500-5 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/2/2017 proper setting of all sleeves and other equipment in advance of construction of work so as to cause no delay in work. U. Should any cutting of walls, floors, ceilings, partitions, etc., be required for proper installation of the work or apparatus of Fire Sprinkler Contractor due to his failure in giving the General Contractor proper information at time required, such cutting shall be done at his own expense and in a manner acceptable to Architect - Engineer. All drilling and patching for anchor bolts, hangers, and other supports shall be subject to approval of Architect -Engineer. V. Siamese connections and watermains to sprinkler room shall be provided by Fire Sprinkler Contractor and connections to sprinkler system shall be by Fire Sprinkler Contractor, W. Conduits and wiring for alarm contacts, power wiring from starter to motor, and starter shall be provided and wired complete by Electrical Contractor for testing by Fire Sprinkler Contractor. Control wiring from starter to control and safety devices shall be provided and wired by Fire Sprinkler Contractor. 3.4 FIELD TESTING A. All portions of the system shall be hydrostatically tested. B. Flushing of underground piping shall be done in accord with National Fire Protection Association. C. On completion of the work, system shall be tested by full flow. 1. Each control valve for each sprinkler system shall be tested by use of an inspector's test valve or the application of heat to sprinkler head most remote from the valve. 2. All alarms and other devices shall be tested. 3. All appliances and equipment for testing shall be furnished by Fire Sprinkler Contractor, 4. Expenses, except for water and electricity used in connection with the tests, shall be defrayed by Fire Sprinkler Contractor. 5. On completion of tests by Fire Sprinkler Contractor, any defects detected shall be corrected by Fire Sprinkler Contractor at his own expense and additional tests made until systems are proved satisfactory. 6. Fire Sprinkler Contractor shall submit to Architect -Engineer a certificate covering materials and tests, similar to that specified by National Fire Protection Association, with a request for formal inspection at least five working days prior to date of inspection. The State and Local Fire Marshalls shall also be notified to witness this test. At such inspection any or all of required tests shall be repeated as directed by the Architect -Engineer. END OF SECTION 210500 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 0500-6 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/2/2017 SECTION 21 1319 WET -PIPE AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEM PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Furnish and install complete fire sprinkler system as specified in Contract Documents. B. Products Installed But Not Furnished Under This Section: 1. Firestopping 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Size sprinkler system by one of following methods: a. Pipe schedule method in accordance with NFPA 13 b. Hydraulic calculation design method based on water supply evaluation performed at building site. 2. Submittal Procedure: a. After award of Contract and prior to purchase of equipment, submit seven sets of shop drawings with specifications and hydraulic calculations, if pipe schedule method is not used, to Architect and two sets to local jurisdiction having authority for fire prevention for review. b. After integrating Architect's and local jurisdiction's comments into drawings, licensed certified fire protection engineer of record submitting fire sprinkler system design construction documents shall stamp, sign, and date each sheet of shop drawings and first page of specifications and calculations. C. Submit stamped documents to area office and local jurisdiction having authority for fire prevention for final approval. d. After final approval, submit four copies of approved stamped documents to Architect. e. Failure of system to meet requirements of authority having jurisdiction shall be corrected at no additional cost to Owner. 1.4 QUALITY CONTROL A. Qualifications: 1. Installer shall be licensed by jurisdiction having authority over installed fire protection systems for location of Project. Furnish verified list of similar projects installed during past five years minimum. 2. Engineer for fire protection system shall be licensed fire protection engineer certified by NICET to level three minimum and engaged in design of fire protection systems. Engineer shall be responsible for overseeing preparation of shop drawings, hydraulic calculations where applicable, and system installation. Engineer shall make complete inspection of installation. Engineer shall provide corrected record drawings to Owner with letter of acceptance. Engineer shall certify that installation is in accordance with Contract Documents. B. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: 1. Unless noted otherwise, system shall conform to: a. NFPA 13 - 1989 Light & Ordinary Hazard Occupancies b. NFPA 24 - 1987 C. NFPA 101 -1991 d. Requirements of local water department and local authority having jurisdiction for fire protection. e. Applicable rules, regulations, laws, and ordinances. WET -PIPE AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEM 21 1319-1 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/2/2017 f. Underwriter's Laboratories Publication, "Fire Protection Equipment Directory", January 1990. g. Comply with backflow prevention requirements and, if required, include device in hydraulic calculations. 1.5 MAINTENANCE A. Extra Materials: 1. Furnish twelve spare heads of each type and temperature rating used, properly boxed with sprinkler head wrench. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE A. Above Ground: 1. Schedule 40 black welded steel meeting requirements of ASTM A 795-89, "Specification for Black and Hot -Dipped Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe for Fire Protection Use." 2.2 FITTINGS A. Flanged, Welded, & Screwed: 1. Carbon Steel meeting requirements of ASTM A 105-87a, "Specification for Forgings, Carbon Steel, for Piping Components." B. Grooved Pipe Coupling System: 1. Victaulic Coupling 2. ITT Grinnell Coupling 2.3 VALVES A. Butterfly Valve: 1. UL/FM approved 2. Indicating type 3. Approved Manufacturers: a. Mueller: 1) Model B-3250-00 Wafer type with valve tamper switch 2) Model B-3250-52 Grooved ends type with valve tamper switch b. Nibco: 1) Model WD3510-4 Wafer type with valve tamper switch 2) Model GD1765-4 Grooved type with valve tamper switch C. Norris Model NW285AC-2K Wafer type with optional tamper switch d. Pratt Model IBV B. Gate Valve: 1. UL/FM approved 2. Outside Screw and Yoke Type (O.S.&Y) 3. Class 150 psi 4. Approved Manufacturers: a. Nibco Model F-637-31 Flanged Ends b. Mueller Model A-2073-6 Flanged Ends C. Ball Valves: 1. UUFM approved 2. Valve tamper switch 3. Approved Manufacturers: a. Milwaukee Model BBSC with threaded ends b. Nibco Model T-505 with threaded ends C. Nibco Model G-505 with grooved ends WET -PIPE AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEM 21 1319-2 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/2/2017 D. Check Valve - Swing Check 1. %" to 3" horizontal check 2. Regrinding type 3. Renewable disk 4. Bronze Class 125 with threaded ends 5. Approved Manufacturers - a. Nibco Model KT -403-W b. Walworth Figure 412 E. Check Valve - Swing Check 1. 2-1/2" to 12" Horizontal check 2. Bolted bonnet 3. Raised face Flanges 4. Bronze mounted w/ductile iron body 5. 125 Lb. Class.a 6. Approved Manufacturers: a. Nibco Model F-938-31 b. Walworth Fig. 883F C. Mueller Model A-2120-6 F. Check Valve - Wafer type 1. 4" to 8" Cast iron body 2. 175 psi minimum working pressure 3. Rubber Seat 4. Approved Manufacturers: a. Nibco Model W -900-W b. Mueller A-2102 G. Alarm Check Valve: 1. Approved Manufacturers: a. Reliable Model E with gauges and drain b. Viking Model E-1 with gauges and drain C. Star Model F with gauges and drain H. Retard Chamber: 1. Self draining 2. Approved Manufacturers: a. Reliable Model E-1 b. Viking Model C c. Star Model D I. Inspector's Test Valve: 1. Ductile iron body with threaded ends 2. Combination sight glass/orifice 3. Bronze top works 4. Approved Manufacturer: a. Victaulic Testmaster Alarm Test Module Style 718 2.4 SPRINKLER HEADS A. Concealed pendent: 1. Flush ceiling profile 2. Adjustable cover 3. UL/FM approved 4. Approved Manufacturers: a. Reliable Model G-4 "Adjustable Concealer" b. Central Model AA Adjustable Concealed Sprinkler with ceiling plate C. Star Model PH -1 "Phantom 1" B. Horizontal Sidewall Sprinkler: 1. UL/FM approved WET -PIPE AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEM 21 1319-3 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/2/2017 2. Recess adjustable 3. Use Viking Model A-1 chrome plated sprinkler guard where guards are required 4. Approved Manufacturers: a. Reliable Model F-1 with Reliable recessed, 2 -piece escutcheon Model GF1 b. Viking Model M HSW with Viking recessed, 2 -piece escutcheon Model E-1 C. Star Model J with Star Nova Series recessed escutcheon C. Pendent and Upright Sprinkler: 1. UUFM approved 2. Use Reliable Model C-1 chrome plated sprinkler guard where guards are required. 3. Use Reliable Model C Flush chrome escutcheon. 4. Approved Manufacturers: a. Reliable Model G b. Viking Model M C. Central Model A d. Star Model E D. Adjustable Drop Nipple: 1. Steel tube, oxide coated. 2. Double o -ring seal. 3. 175 psi minimum working pressure. 4. Approved Manufacturers: a. CECA - Cold Extrusion Company of America b. Central Model "Alpha" 2.5 WATER FLOW ALARM A. Mechanical Flow Alarm - Water Gong. 1. UUFM approved. 2. Approved Manufacturers: a. Reliable Model C b. Viking Model F-1 C. Central Model F d. Star Model CD 2.6 PRESSURE GAUGES A. Mechanical Water Pressure Gauges: 1. UUFM approved. 2. 3-1/2 inch diameter dial. 3. 0-300 psi in 5 psi increments. 4. Approved Manufacturers: a. Reliable Model UA b. Trerice model 500 2.7 PRESSURE DETECTORS A. Electrical Water Pressure Switch: 1. UUFM approved. 2. Switch activates on pressure rise between 4-8 psi. 3. Two single pole double throw switches. 4. Automatic reset. 5. Approved Manufacturers: a. Reliable Model J54-8295 b. Potter Electric Signal Cc Model PS10 2.8 TAMPER SWITCH A. Weather and Tamper Resistant Switch. 1. UUFM approved. 2. Two Single Pole Double Throw Switches. WET -PIPE AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEM 21 1319-4 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/2/2017 3. Approved Manufacturer: a. Potter Electric Signal Co Model PCVS 2.9 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION ;— - -- A. Two-way Inlet with Single Clapper 1. Polished Brass. 2. 3/4 Inch Straight Design Automatic Drain Device by Potter -Roemer Fig. 5982. 3. Round "AUTO. SPKR." Identification Plate, Polished Brass by Potter -Roemer Fig. 5962. 4. Approved Manufacturer: a. Potter -Roemer Fig. 5710 b. Reliable Model B PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Connect system to flange provided under Section 02 669. B. Install system to drain. Drain trapped piping in accordance with NFPA 13 3-3.3. 1. Install main drain from riser. 2. Install auxiliary drains in low points of piping system and inspector's test valve drain to mechanical pad located outside building unless otherwise directed by Architect. C. Install piping system so it will not be exposed to freezing temperatures. D. Do not use dropped, damaged, or used sprinkler heads. E. Install piping per NFPA 13, Paragraph 3-6.1.2. F. Install sprinkler lines concealed. G. Install tamper switches and pressure flow detectors where located by Architect. H. Install water powered motor gong on exterior wall in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions. I. Install automatic ball drip device in lowest point of piping to fire department connection and drain to exterior of building. J. Install frestopping at pipe penetrations through fire -rated floors, walls, and partitions. K. Brace and support system to meet seismic zone requirements for building site. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests, Inspection: 1. Test system according to "Contractor's Material & Testing certificate for Above Ground Piping" NFPA-13, figure 1-10.1(a). 2. Tests shall be witnessed by Architect and Representative of local jurisdiction over fire prevention. 3. Test blanks shall have red painted lugs protruding beyond flange to clearly indicate their presence and be numbered to assure their removal when testing is completed. END OF SECTION 21 1319 WET -PIPE AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEM 21 1319-5 f Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/2/2017 SECTION 21 1330 STANDPIPE & FIRE HOSE SYSTEMS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Furnish and install fire hose system as described in Contract Documents. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Installation shall conform to local plumbing and fire protection codes and relevant NFPA standards. B. Components shall be ILL approved if applicable. 1.4 SEQUENCING & SCHEDULING A. Coordinate with other Sections to assure proper wall openings and compatibility with specified fire extinguishers. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 COMPONENTS A. Piping: 1. Type L copper with wrought copper fittings. Connections shall be sweat copper type with 50150 solder. B. Valves: 1, 1-1/2 inch, 300 Ib, chrome plated brass angle valve. Valve shall be UL listed and have female NPT inlet and male hose thread outlet. Provide 1-1/2 inch valve escutcheon plate. C. Cabinets: 1. Combined fire hose and fire extinguisher cabinets shall be two piece type steel tub with white baked enamel inside, knock -out plugs in each corner, aluminum door and pull handle tension latch, full length hinge, lock and key, break glass door, aluminum recess trim (reversible for right or left hand hinge). Hose rack shall be chrome plated. D. Hose: 1. Fire hose shall be 1-1/2 inch diameter x 75 feet flexible fold hose with all neoprene tube covered with dacron filler and long staple cotton warp yarn woven for maximum strength and flexibility. Equip with quick opening and closing fog chrome plated nozzle. E. Approved Manufacturers 1. Allenco 2. Elkhart Brass 3. Potter Roemer 4. Seco 5. Standard STANDPIPE & FIRE HOSE SYSTEMS 21 1330-1 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/2/2017 PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Mount cabinets plumb and square with trim providing a neat ft with wall surfaces. END OF SECTION 21 1330 STANDPIPE & FIRE HOSE SYSTEMS 21 1330-2 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/2/2017 SECTION 21 1400 DRY PIPE FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLERS PART1-GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Dry -pipe sprinkler system. B. System design, installation, and certification. C. Fire department connections. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A, Section 21 0500 - Common Requirements for Fire Suppression: Pipe, fittings, and valves. B. Section 21 0548 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for Fire Suppression Piping and Equipment. C. Section 21 0553 - Identification for Fire Suppression Piping and Equipment. D. Section 26 0519 — Line Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections. E. Section 26 6411— Automatic Fire Alarm and Detection System. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. UL (FPED) - Fire Protection Equipment Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3300— for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on sprinklers, valves, and specialties, including manufacturers catalog information. Submit performance ratings, rough -in details, weights, support requirements, and piping connections. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit preliminary layout of finished ceiling areas indicating only sprinkler locations coordinated with ceiling installation. 2. Indicate hydraulic calculations, detailed pipe layout, hangers and supports, sprinklers, components and accessories. Indicate system controls. 3. Submit shop drawings to authority having jurisdiction for approval. Submit proof of approval to Architect. D. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of sprinklers and deviations of piping from drawings. Indicate drain and test locations. E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that system has been tested and meets or exceeds specified requirements and code requirements. F. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include components of system, servicing requirements, record drawings, inspection data, replacement part numbers and availability, and location and numbers of service depot. DRY PIPE FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLERS 21 1400-1 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/2/2017 G. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Section 016000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. 2. Extra Sprinklers: Type and size matching those installed, in quantity required by referenced NFPA design and installation standard. 3. Sprinkler Wrenches: For each sprinkler type. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Maintain one copy of referenced design and installation standard on site. B. Conform to UL requirements. C. Designer Qualifications: Design system under direct supervision of a Professional Engineer experienced in design of this type of work and licensed in the State of Idaho. D. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. E. Equipment and Components: Provide products that bear UL label or marking. F. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store products in shipping containers and maintain in place until installation. Provide temporary inlet and outlet caps. Maintain caps in place until installation. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Sprinklers, Valves, and Equipment: 1. Tyco Fire Suppression & Building Products: www.tyco-fire.com. 2. Viking Corporation: www.vikinggroupinc.com. 3. Reliable: www.reliablehvac.com 4. Central: www.aecinfo.com 5. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements. 2.2 SPRINKLER SYSTEM A. Sprinkler System: Provide coverage for entire building. B. Occupancy: Comply with NFPA 13 for hazard classification.. C. Water Supply: Determine volume and pressure from water flow test data. 1. Revise design with test data available prior to submittals. D. Provide fire department connections where indicated. E. Storage Cabinet for Spare Sprinklers and Tools: Steel, located adjacent to alarm valve. 2.3 SPRINKLERS A. Suspended Ceiling Type: Semi -recessed pendant type with matching screw on escutcheon plate. 1. Finish: Enamel, color white. 2. Escutcheon Plate Finish: White. 3. Fusible Link: Fusible solder link type temperature rated for specific area hazard. DRY PIPE FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLERS 21 1400-2 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/2/2017 B. Concealed Ceiling Type: Fully recessed with surface cap. 1. Finish: Enamel, color white. 2. Surface Cap Finish: White. 3. Fusible Link: Fusible solder link type, temperated rated for specific area hazard. C. Exposed Area Type: Pendant upright type with guard. 1. Finish: Brass. 2. Fusible Link: Fusible solder link type temperature rated for specific area hazard. D. Sidewall Type: Semi -recessed horizontal sidewall type with matching screw on escutcheon plate. 1. Finish: Brass. 2. Escutcheon Plate Finish: Brass. 3. Fusible Link: Fusible solder link type temperature rated for specific area hazard. E. Dry Sprinklers: Standard pendant type with matching screw on escutcheon plate. 1. Finish: Brass. 2. Escutcheon Plate Finish: Brass. 3. Fusible Link: Fusible solder link type temperature rated for specific area hazard. F. Furnish and install special sprinkler heads on each side of all windows or doors with windows in the two hour fire rated walls as required by I.B.C. 715. 1. White enamel finish. 2. Liquid filled bulb link. 3. White escutcheon plates. G. Guards: Finish to match sprinkler finish. H. Spray Nozzles: Brass with solid cone discharge, 30 degrees of arc with blow -off dust cap. 2.4 SPRINKLER HEADS A. Sprinkler head orifice sizes shall be in accordance with National Fire Protection Association. B. Any change in spacing must be in straight rows with lights and walls. C. Sprinkler heads shall be automatic and conventional (spray) type approved by a nationally recognized testing laboratory. D. Each head shall have an orifice of nominal 1/2" diameter. E. Sprinkler heads shall be pendant type where installed above a hung ceiling. F. Any sprinkler heads in non -conditioned areas or exterior areas shall be protected with antifreeze loop or freeze proof sprinkler heads as required. 2.5 PROTECTIVE GUARDS A. Heavy wire protective guard shall be provided for sprinkler heads located in heavy use areas where damage may result including, but not limited to: B. Gyms, Wrestling rooms C. Locker rooms D. Multi-purpose rooms E. Shops F. Equipment rooms DRY PIPE FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLERS 21 1400-3 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/2/2017 2.6 PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Wet Pipe Sprinkler Alarm Valve: Check type valve with divided seat ring, rubber faced clapper to automatically actuate water motor alarm and electric alarm, with pressure retard chamber and variable pressure trim ; with test and drain valve. B. Electric Alarm: 24 volt D.C. electrically operated chrome plated gong with pressure alarm switch. C. Water Flow Switch: Vane type switch for mounting horizontal or vertical, with two contacts; rated 10 amp at 125 volt AC and 2.5 amp at 24 volt DC. D. Fire Department Connections 1. Type: Flush mounted wall type with brass finish. 2. Outlets: Two way with thread size to suit fire department hardware; threaded dust cap and chain of matching material and finish. 3. Drain: 3/4 inch (19 mm) automatic drip, outside. 4. Label: "Sprinkler- Fire Department Connection". E. Air Maintenance Device 1. Maximum inlet air pressure 125 psi. 2. Minimum outlet air pressure 65 psi. 3. Approved Manufacturers: a. Reliable Model B-1 b. Viking Model D-2 c. Star Model B F. Accelerator: 1. Install with pressure gauge 2. Approved Manufacturers: a. Reliable Model B-1 b. Viking Model D-1 c. Star Model A 2.7 AIR COMPRESSOR A. Air compressor: 1. Tank -mounted, 17 gallon tank rated at 165 psi working pressure. Restrict speed of compressor to between 700 and 900 RPM. 2. Set tank -mounted air compressor on neoprene isolation pads located at each corner and sized 4" x 4" x 3/4" high. 3. Wire air compressor to circuit breaker. 4. Furnish with air intake filter and silencer. 5. Overload protected 1750 RPM motor. 6. Industrial grade with totally enclosed steel belt guard. 7. Auto control group mounted and pre -wired. Auto group includes pressure switch, check valve, manifold, safety valve, and mounting. B. Approved Manufacturers: a. General Air Products Model LT620100. b. Jenny Products Model K1S-17WMS. C. Equal as approved by Architect prior to bidding. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. It is the responsibility of the Fire Sprinkler Contractor to inspect the job site prior to fabricating materials. The Fire Sprinkler Contractor shall coordinate the design with all plans and other contractors so that construction can be done without problems. The Fire Sprinkler Contractor shall call for a meeting with all trades to coordinate and sequence installation with the progress of other mechanical and structural DRY PIPE FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLERS 21 1400-4 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/2/2017 systems, and work out spaces for all of the work. By doing so, the project will proceed at the General Contractor's completion schedule. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with referenced NFPA design and installation standard. B. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Work to begin inside building, at base of flange to underground fire protection water main. D. Install system in compliance with methods detailed in NFPA-13, including seismic requirements for Area 3. E. Offset as needed for other trades. Avoid conflict in areas of tight construction. Do not obstruct access to air control boxes, access doors, lights or other ceiling mounted equipment. F. Submit piping and equipment data sheets for review by the Architect prior to the start of the installation. G. Install piping straight and true to bear evenly on hangers and supports. Keep the interior and ends of new piping thoroughly cleaned of foreign matter by closing pipe openings with caps or plugs during installation. Cover and protect components of the system against dirt, chemical or mechanical injury. H. Fire sprinklers shall be centered in ceiling tile in one direction and a minimum of 4 -inches from acoustical ceiling ("T') grid. Provide piping offsets or Flexible offsets as required that meet the code. Install fire sprinkler head guards on fire sprinklers lower than 7 -feet above finished floor and as identified in 2.05. I. Fire sprinkler piping that is exposed shall be approved and coordinated with the Architect, prior to any pipe fabrication and/or installation of fire sprinkler piping. Care shall be used in locating exposed fire sprinkler piping. J. Install inspectors test valve at an accessible height, without the use of a ladder, or having to remove ceiling tiles. Location to be approved by the Architect. K. Provide concrete splash blocks for drains, test valve discharge, etc. Concrete splash blocks shall be pre- fabricated, 2-1/2inches thick. L. Install special sprinkler heads on each side of windows or doors with windows in the two hour rated fire walls as required by I.B.C. 715. M. Provide white painted escutcheons around exposed piping, where piping passes through walls or ceilings in a finished area. N. Field Changes: Do not make field changes for piping layout or sizing without prior approval, after the approval of the fire sprinkler drawings. 0. Provide approved double check valve assembly at sprinkler system water source connection. P. Locate fire department connection with sufficient clearance from walls, obstructions, or adjacent siamese connectors to allow full swing of fire department wrench handle. Q. Locate outside alarm gong on building wall as indicated. R. Apply masking tape or paper cover to ensure concealed sprinklers, cover plates, and sprinkler escutcheons do not receive field paint finish. Remove after painting. Replace painted sprinklers. S. Flush entire piping system of foreign matter. Pressure test entire system as required by code. DRY PIPE FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLERS 21 1400-5 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 U. Require test be witnessed by Fire Marshal. 5/2/2017 V. Conduct an inspection and operational test at the end of the one year warrantee period in accordance with NFPA-25. Provide a written report to the Owner at the completion of the inspection. W. Install piping system so it will not fail due to freezing temperatures. X. Do not use dropped, damaged, or used sprinkler heads. Pendants: 1. Do not use regular pendants. 2. Install dry pendants with tees and not elbows. Do not adjust length with pipe nipples and couplings. 3. Individually measure and order each dry pendant based on measured distance from ceiling to face of branch line tee. 4. Dry -Pendant Concealed Sprinkler: a. Use flat cover plate to conceal sprinkler head. Cover not to exceed 3116 inch from ceiling. Z. Minimum slope required by code and inspected by Local Fire Marshall to insure complete drainage of dry piping. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Tests: 1. Water Flow Test: a. Test to determine static and residual pressures and corresponding flow rate at point of connection to utility water main. b. Adjust water flow test data for seasonal fluctuations and future growth as recommended by Water Utility and AHJ. C. At point of connection to utility water main, combine inside and outside hose stream allowances. 2. Pneumatically test dry system by establishing 40 psi air pressure and measuring drop as required by'Contractor's Material And Testing certificate for Above Ground Piping' NFPA-13, Figure 24.1 (2010) Edition) Drop shall not exceed 1 - 112 psi (6.90 - 3.45 kPA) in 24 hours 3. Check slope of piping and certify that piping is sloped as required by Contract Documents and will not trap water in system. Report unsatisfactory conditions to Architect. 4. Tests shall be witnessed by Architect and representative of local jurisdiction over fire prevention. 3.4 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Ensure required devices are installed and connected as required to fire alarm system. B. Work with Fire Alarm Contractor to insure system alarms properly when activated. C. Work with Electrical Contractor to insure that all control devices are properly wired with electrical power and connected to power and alarm systems. 3.5 ACCEPTANCE A. Acceptance of installation is subject to final inspection and approval by: 1. Idaho State Fire Marshal's Office. 2. Local Fire Department. 3. Architect or his Representative END OF SECTION 21 1400 END OF DIVISION 21 DRY PIPE FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLERS 21 1400-6 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/2/2017 SECTION 22 0501 COMMON PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Furnish labor, materials, and equipment necessary for completion of work as described in Contract Documents. B. It is the intent of these specifications that the systems specified herein are to be complete and operational before being turned over to the owner. During the bidding process, the contractor is to ask questions or call to the engineer's attention any items that are not shown or may be required to make the system complete and operational. Once the project is bid and the contractor has accepted the contract, it is his responsibility to furnish and install all equipment and parts necessary to provide a complete and operational system without additional cost to the owner. C. Furnish and install fire stopping materials to seal penetrations through fire rated structures and draft stops. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Substitutions: By specific designation and description, standards are established for specialties and equipment. Other makes of specialties and equipment of equal quality will be considered provided such proposed substitutions are submitted to the Architect for his approval, complete with specification data showing how it meets the specifications, at least 5 working days prior to bid opening. A list of approved substitutions will be published as an addendum. 1. Submit a single copy of Manufacturer's catalog data including Manufacturer's complete specification for each proposed substitution. 2. The Architect or Engineer is to be the sole judge as to the quality of any material offered as an equal. B. Product Data, Shop Drawings: Within 30 days after award of contract, submit 10 sets of Manufacturer's catalog data for each manufactured item. 1. Literature shall include enough information to show complete compliance with Contract Document requirements. 2. Mark literature to indicate specific item with applicable data underlined. 3. Information shall include but not be limited to capacities, ratings, type of material used, guarantee, and such dimensions as are necessary to check space requirements. 4. When accepted, submittal shall be an addition to Contract Documents and shall be in equal force. No variation shall be permitted. 5. Even though the submittals have been accepted by the Engineer, it does not relieve the contractor from meeting all of the requirements of the plans and specifications and providing a complete and operational system. C. Drawings of Record: One complete set of blue line mechanical drawings shall be provided for the purpose of showing a complete picture of the work as actually installed. 1. These drawings shall serve as work progress report sheets. Contractor shall make notations neat and legible therein daily as the work proceeds. 2. The drawings shall be kept at the job at a location designated by the Mechanical Engineer. 3. At completion of the project these "as -built" drawings shall be signed by the Contractor, dated, and returned to the Architect. COMMON PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS 220501 -1 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/2/2017 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: 1. Perform work in accordance with applicable provisions of local and state Plumbing Code, Gas Ordinances, and adoptions thereof. Provide materials and labor necessary to comply with rules, regulations, and ordinances. 2. In case of differences between building codes, state laws, local ordinances, utility company regulations, and Contract Documents, the most stringent shall govern. Promptly notify Architect in writing of such differences. B. Applicable Specifications: Referenced specifications, standards, and publications shall be of the issues in effect on date of Advertisement for Bid. 1. "Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Guide" published by the American Society of Heating and Air Conditioning Engineers. 2. "Engineering Standards" published by the Heating, Piping, and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association. 1. "2012 International Building Code", "2012 International Mechanical Code", and "2012 International Fire Code" as published by the International Conference of Building Officials. 2. 2012 Idaho Plumbing Code as published by the International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials. 3. "National Electrical Code" as published by the National Fire Protection Association. 4. "2012 International Energy Conservation Code ". 1.5 INSPECTIONS AND PERMITS A. Pay for permits, fees, or charges for inspection or other services. Local and state codes and ordinances must be properly executed without expense to Owner and are considered as minimum requirements. Local and state codes and ordinances do not relieve the Contractor from work shown that exceeds minimum requirements. 1.6 ADDITIONAL WORK: A. Design is based on equipment as described in the drawing equipment schedule. Any change in foundation bases, electrical wiring, conduit connections, piping, controls and openings required by alternate equipment submitted and approved shall be paid for by this division. All work shall be in accordance with the requirements of the applicable sections. PART 2 - NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Site Inspection: 1. Examine premises and understand the conditions which may affect performance of work of this Division before submitting proposals for this work. 2. No subsequent allowance for time or money will be considered for any consequence related to failure to examine site conditions. B. Drawings: 1. Mechanical drawings show general arrangement of piping, ductwork, equipment, etc, and do not attempt to show complete details of building construction which affect installation. This Contractor shall refer to architectural, structural, and electrical drawings for additional building detail which affect installation of his work. a. Follow mechanical drawings as closely as actual building construction and work of other trades will permit. b. No extra payments will be allowed where piping and/or ductwork must be offset to avoid other work or where minor changes are necessary to facilitate installation. C. Everything shown on the mechanical drawings shall be the responsibility of Mechanical Contractor unless specifically noted otherwise. COMMON PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS 220501 -2 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/2/2017 3.2 3.3 2. Consider architectural and structural drawings part of this work insofar as these drawings furnish information relating to design and construction of building. These drawings take precedence over mechanical drawings. 3. Because of small scale of mechanical drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, and accessories which may be required. Investigate structural and finish conditions affecting this work and arrange work accordingly, providing such fittings, valves, and accessories required to meet conditions. Do not scale drawings for locations of equipment or piping. Refer to large scale dimensioned drawings for exact locations. C. Insure that items to be furnished fit space available. Make necessary field measurements to ascertain space requirements including those for connections and furnish and install equipment of size and shape so final installation shall suit true intent and meaning of Contract Documents. 1. If approval is received to use other than specified items, responsibility for specified capacities and insuring that items to be furnished will fit space available lies with this Division. 2. If non-specified equipment is used and it will not fit job site conditions, this Contractor assumes responsibility for replacement with items named in Contract Documents, PREPARATION A. Cut carefully to minimize necessity for repairs to existing work. Do not cut beams, columns, or trusses. 1. Patch and repair walls, floors, ceilings, and roofs with materials of same quality and appearance as adjacent surfaces unless otherwise shown. Surface finishes shall exactly match existing finishes of I same materials. 2. Each Section of this Division shall bear expense of cutting, patching, repairing, and replacing of work of other Sections required because of its fault, error, tardiness, or because of damage done by it. 3. Cutting, patching, repairing, and replacing pavements, sidewalks, roads, and curbs to permit installation of work of this Division is responsibility of Section installing work. INSTALLATION I1 3.4 A. B. C. 3.5 Arrange pipes, ducts, and equipment to permit ready access to valves, unions, traps, starters, motors, control components, and to clear openings of doors and access panels. STORAGE AND PROTECTION OF MATERIALS: Provide storage space for storage of materials and assume complete responsibility for losses due to any cause whatsoever. Storage shall not interfere with traffic conditions in any public thoroughfare. Protect completed work, work underway, and materials against loss or damage. Close pipe openings with caps or plugs during installation. Cover fixtures and equipment and protect against dirt, or injury caused by water, chemical, or mechanical accident. EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL A. Perform necessary excavation of whatever substance encountered for proper laying of all pipes and underground ducts. 1. Excavated materials not required for fill shall be removed from site as directed by Engineer. 2. Excavation shall be carried low enough to allow a minimum coverage over underground piping of 5'-0" or to be below local frost level. 3. Excess excavation below required level shall be backfilled at Contractor's expense with earth, sand, or gravel as directed by Engineer. Tamp ground thoroughly. 4. Ground adjacent to all excavations shall be graded to prevent water running into excavated areas. B. Backfill pipe trenches and allow for settlement. 1. Backfill shall be mechanically compacted to same density as surrounding undisturbed earth. 2. Cinders shall not be used in backfilling where steel or iron pipe is used. 3. No backfilling shall be done until installation has been approved by the Engineer. COMMON PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS 220501 -3 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/2/2017 3.6 COOPERATION A. Cooperate with other crafts in coordination of work. Promptly respond when notified that construction is ready for installation of work under Division 22. Contractor will be held responsible for any delays which might be caused by his negligence or failure to cooperate with the other Contractors or crafts. 3.7 SUPERVISION A. Provide a competent superintendent in charge of the work at all times. Anyone found incompetent shall be removed at once and replaced by someone satisfactory, when requested by the Architect. 3.8 INSTALLATION CHECK: A. An experienced, competent, and authorized representative of the manufacturer or supplier of each item of equipment indicated in the equipment schedule shall visit the project to inspect, check, adjust if necessary, and approve the equipment installation. In each case, the equipment supplier's representative shall be present when the equipment is placed in operation. The equipment supplier's representative shall revisit the project as often as necessary until all trouble is corrected and the equipment installation and operation is satisfactory to the Engineer. B. Each equipment supplier's representative shall furnish to the Owner, through the Engineer, a written report certifying the following: 1. Equipment has been properly installed and lubricated. 2. Equipment is in accurate alignment. 3. Equipment is free from any undue stress imposed by connecting piping or anchor bolts. 4. Equipment has been operated under full load conditions. 5. Equipment operated satisfactorily. C. All costs for this installation check shall be included in the prices quoted by equipment suppliers. 3.9 CLEANING EQUIPMENT AND PREMISES A. Properly lubricate equipment before Owner's acceptance. B. Clean exposed piping, equipment, and fixtures. Repair damaged finishes and leave everything in working order. C. Remove stickers from fixtures and adjust flush valves. D. Trap elements shall be removed during cleaning and flushing period. Replace trap elements and adjust after cleaning and flushing period. 3.10 TESTS A. No piping work, fixtures, or equipment shall be concealed or covered until they have been inspected and approved by the inspector. Notify inspector when the work is ready for inspection. B. All work shall be completely installed, tested as required by Contract Documents and the city and county ordinances and shall be leak -tight before the inspection is requested. C. Tests shall be repeated to the satisfaction of those making the inspections. D. Water piping shall be flushed out, tested at 100 psi and left under pressure of supply main or a minimum of 40 psi for the balance of the construction period. 3.11 WARRANTEE A. Contractor shall guarantee work under Division 22 to be free from inherent defects for a period of one year from acceptance. COMMON PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS 220501 -4 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/2/2017 1. Contractor shall repair, revise or replace any and all such leaks, failure or inoperativeness due to defective work, materials, or parts free of charge for a period of one year from final acceptance, provided such defect is not due to carelessness in operation or maintenance. B. In addition to warrantee specified in General Conditions and plumbing systems are to be free from noise in operation that may develop from failure to construct system in accordance with Contract Documents. 3.12 SYSTEM START-UP, OWNER'S INSTRUCTIONS A. Owner's Instructions 1. Instruct building maintenance personnel and Owner Representative in operation and maintenance of mechanical systems utilizing Operation & Maintenance Manual when so doing. 2. Minimum instruction periods shall be as follows — a. Plumbing - Four hours. 3. Instruction periods shall occur after Substantial Completion inspection when systems are properly working and before final payment is made. 4. None of these instructional periods shall overlap another. END OF SECTION 22 0501 COMMON PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS 220501 -5 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/2/2017 SECTION 22 0503 PIPE, PIPE FITTINGS, PIPE HANGERS & VALVES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Section 22 05 01 apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. General piping and valve materials and installation procedures for all piping systems. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacture: 1. Use domestic made valves, pipe and pipe fittings. B. General: Support components shall conform to Manufacturer's Standardization Society Specification SP - 58. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 VALVES A. Ball Valves: 1. 2" and smaller for domestic water service: a. Milwaukee BA -100, bronze, screwed, 600# WOG ball valve with Teflon seats b. Victaulic S/722. 2. 2" and smaller for heating hot water service: a. Milwaukee BA -100, bronze, screwed, 600# WOG ball valve with Teflon seats b. Victaulic S/722. 3. 2'/" and larger - 3 piece full port, bronze, flanged 400# WOG with seats rated for temperature service. 4. Ball valves shall be used where ever possible. B. Cutoff service valves may be gate Valves: 1. Up to 2" inclusive: Milwaukee No. 148 2. 2 1/2" and larger: Milwaukee No. F-2885 C. Check Valves: 1. Up to 2" inclusive: Milwaukee No. 509 2. 2 1/2" and larger: a. Milwaukee No. F-2974 b. Victaulic 716, 779 D. Stop and Waste Cocks: 1. Milwaukee No. F-2885 with 3/4" Milwaukee No. 105 gate valve tapped into pipe on outlet side of main valve. E. Use ball valves or butterfly valves everywhere unless noted otherwise. F. Approved Manufacturers: 1. Crane 2. Nibco 3. Hammond PIPE, PIPE FITTINGS, PIPE HANGERS & VALVES 220503.1 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/2/2017 4. Stockham 5. Milwaukee 6. Victaulic 2.2 PIPE A. Exposed waste, vent and water piping connections to fixtures shall be chrome plated. B. Roof Drain Piping: Above grade - up to 3" - Schedule 40-A-120 galvanized steel pipe with galvanized banded fittings or cast iron soil pipe with no -hub fittings. Below grade and over 3" shall be service weight cast iron soil pipe and fittings. C. Sewer Piping: Beyond 5'-0" from the building lines - SDR -35 PVC sewer pipe or concrete sewer pipe as approved by local code. Bed piping in sandfll. D. Condensate Drain Piping: Type "M" copper with sweat fittings or Schedule 40 PVC pipe and fittings. 2.3 PIPE HANGERS A. Adjustable, malleable iron clevis type of a diameter adequate to support pipe size. B. Approved Manufacturers: 1. B -Line Systems Fig. B3100 2. Grinnell No. 260 3. Kin -Line 455 4. Superstrut CL -710 2.4 INSULATING COUPLINGS A. Suitable for at least 175 PSIG WP at 250 deg F. B. Approved Manufacturers: 1. Central Plastics Co 2. Victaulic Co 3. Watts Regulator Co 2.5 EXPANSION JOINTS A. Install at all building expansion joints and as shown on the drawings, flexible, or nipple/flexible coupling combinations for added expansion/deflection. Submit Manufacturer's data. B. Approved Manufacturers 1. Victaulic Style 155, 150 2. Grinnell - Gruv-Lok 3. Garlock Garlflex 8100 4. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc. 2.6 SLEEVES A. Sleeves shall be standard weight galvanized iron pipe, Schedule 40 PVC, or 14 gauge galvanized sheet metal two sizes larger than pipe or insulation. B. Steel or heavy steel metal of the telescoping type of a size to accommodate pipe and covering wherever it passes through floors, walls, or ceilings. 2.7 INTERMEDIATE ATTACHMENTS A. Continuous threaded rod may be used wherever possible. B. No chain, wire, or perforated strap shall be used. PIPE, PIPE FITTINGS, PIPE HANGERS & VALVES 220503-2 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/2/2017 2.8 FLOOR AND CEILING PLATES A. Brass chrome plated 2.9 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS - Grinnell and Fee/Mason A. Concrete Inserts: Grinnell Fig. 282 B. Pipe Hanger Flange: Grinnell Fig. 163 C. Vertical Pipe: Grinnell Fig. 261 or equal. D. Cast Iron Pipe: Grinnell Fig. 260 clevis hanger or equal E. Pipe Attachments for steel pipe with 1" or less of insulation: 1. Grinnell Fig. 108 ring 2. Grinnell Fig. 114 turnbuckle adjuster 3. Or equal PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Furnish and install complete system of piping, valved as indicated or as necessary to completely control entire apparatus. Pipe drawings are diagrammatic and indicate general location and connections. Piping may have to be offset, lowered, or raised as required or directed at site. This does not relieve this Contractor from responsibility for proper erection of systems of piping in every respect. B. Properly support piping and make adequate provisions for expansion, contraction, slope, and anchorage. 1. Cut piping accurately for fabrication to measurements established at site and work into place without springing or forcing. 2. Do not use pipe hooks, chains, or perforated metal for pipe support. 3. Remove burr and cutting slag from pipes. 4. Make changes in direction with proper fittings. 5. Insulate hangers for copper pipe from piping by means of at least two layers of Scotch 33 plastic tape. 6. Support piping at 8 feet on center maximum for pipe 1-1/4 inches or larger and 6 feet on center maximum for pipe one inch or less. Provide support at each elbow. Install additional support as required. 7. Suspend piping from roof trusses or clamp to vertical walls using Unistrut and clamps (except underground pipe). Laying of piping on any building member is not allowed. C. Arrange piping to not interfere with removal of other equipment, ducts, or devices, or block access to doors, windows, or access openings. Provide accessible, ground joint unions in piping at connections to equipment. D. Make connections of dissimilar metals with insulating couplings. E. Provide sleeves around pipes passing through floors, walls, partitions, or structural members. 1. Seal sleeves with plastic or other acceptable material. 2. Do not place sleeves around soil, waste, vent, or roof drain lines passing through concrete Floors on grade. F. Cap or plug open ends of pipes and equipment to keep dirt and other foreign materials out of system. Do not use plugs of rags, wool, cotton waste, or similar materials. G. Install piping systems so they may be easily drained. H. Grade soil and waste lines within building perimeter 114 inch fall per It in direction of flow. I. Insulate water piping buried within building perimeter. 1. Do not use reducing bushings, street elbows, or close nipples. PIPE, PIPE FITTINGS, PIPE HANGERS & VALVES 220503-3 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/2/2017 2. Bury water piping 6 inches minimum below bottom of slab and encase in 2 inches minimum of sand. 3. Do not install piping in shear walls. 3.2 HORIZONTAL PIPING INSTALLATION A. Locate hangers, supports, and anchors near or at changes in piping direction and concentrated loads. B. Provide for vertical adjustment to maintain pitch required for proper drainage. C. Allow for expansion and contraction of the piping. 3.3 PIPE SLEEVES AND INSERTS A. Set sleeves before concrete is poured or floors finished. B. Inserts for units should be placed in the concrete or masonry during construction to avoid cutting of finished work. When and if cutting becomes necessary, it must be done in accordance with the cutting and patching specifications. 3.4 FLOOR AND CEILING PLATES A. Install on all pipes passing through floors, partitions, and ceilings. 3.5 UNIONS AND CONNECTIONS A. Install malleable ground joint unions in hot and cold water piping throughout the system so that any portion can be taken down for repairs or inspections without injury to same or covering. B. Running threads or long screws will not be permitted in jointing any pipe. C. Provide dielectric waterways Style #47 between ferrous and non-ferrous metals. 3.6 FIRE STOPPING A. Fire stop all penetrations of fire walls, fire barriers, fire petitions, and other fire rated walls and ceilings and floors as per IBC Section 711. See Specification 22 0800. END OF SECTION 22 0503 PIPE, PIPE FITTINGS, PIPE HANGERS & VALVES 22 0503 -4 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/2/2017 SECTION 22 0553 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPES AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install identification of plumbing piping and equipment as described in Contract Documents. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Paint: 1. One Coat Primer: a. 6-2 Quick Drying Latex Primer Sealer over fabric covers. b. 6-205 Metal Primer under dark color paint. C. 6-6 Metal Primer under light color paint. 2. Finish Coats: Two coats 53 Line Acrylic Enamel, 3. Performance Standard: Paints specified are from Pittsburgh Paint & Glass (PPG), Pittsburgh, PA www.pittsburghpaints.com or PPG Canada Inc, Mississauga, ON (800) 263-4350 or (905) 238- 6441 4. Type Two Acceptable Products. See Section 016200. a. Paint of equal quality from following Manufacturers may be submitted for Architect's approval before use. Maintain specified colors, shades, and contrasts. 1) Benjamin Moore, Montvale, NJ www.benjaminmoore.com or Toronto, ON (800) 304-0304 or(416)766-1176. 2) ICI Dulux, Cleveland, OH or ICI Paints Canada Inc, Concord, ON www.dulux.com. 3) Sherwin Williams, Cleveland, OH www.sherwin-williams.com. 2.2 VALVE IDENTIFICATION A. Make a list of and tag all valves installed in this work. 1. Valve tags shall be of brass, not less than 1"x2" size, hung with brass chains. 2. Tag shall indicate plumbing or heating service. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SCHEDULES A. Pipe Identification Schedule 1. Apply stenciled s mbols as follows: Pie Use Abbreviation Domestic Cold Water CW Domestic Hot Water HW END OF SECTION 22 0553 ID FOR PLUMBING PIPES AND EQUIPMENT 220553-1 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/2/2017 SECTION 22 0703 MECHANICAL INSULATION AND FIRE STOPPING PART1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Section 22 05 01 apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Furnish and install mechanical insulation and fire stopping as described in Contract Documents including but not limited to the following: 1. Rain Drain Piping Insulation 2. Hot Water Piping Insulation (Domestic) 3. Fire Stopping 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE 4 A. Insulation shall have composite (insulation, jacket or facing and adhesive used to adhere facing or jacket to insulation) fire and smoke hazard ratings as tested by Procedure ASTM E-84, NFPA 255 and UL 723 not exceeding: Flame Spread of 25 and Smoke Developed of 50. B. Insulation Contractor shall certify in writing, prior to installation, that all products to be used will meet the above criteria. C. Accessories, such as adhesives, mastics, cements, and tapes, for fittings shall have the same component ratings as listed above. D. Products, or their shipping cartons, shall bear a label indicating that flame and smoke ratings do not exceed above requirements. E. Any treatment of jacket or facings to impart flame and smoke safety shall be permanent. E F. The use of water-soluble treatments is prohibited. END OF SECTION 22 0703 MECHANICAL INSULATION AND FIRE STOPPING 22 0703 - 1 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/2/2017 SECTION 22 0705 UNDERGROUND PIPING INSULATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Section 22 05 01 apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Furnish and install insulation on underground hot and cold water pipes within confines of building as described in Contract Documents. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIAL A. Insulation: 1. 112 inch thick Armafiex Standard Pipe Insulation 2. Equal by Rubatex 3. Equal by Imcolock B. Joint Sealant: 1. Armstrong 520 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Slip underground pipe insulation onto pipe and seal butt joints. B. Where slip-on technique is not possible, slit insulation, apply to pipe, and seal seams and joints. END OF SECTION 22 0705 UNDERGROUND PIPING INSULATION 22 0705 - 1 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/2/2017 SECTION 22 0710 POTABLE WATER PIPE INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Section 22 05 01 apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Furnish and install insulation on above ground hot and water lines, fittings, valves, pump bodies, flanges, and accessories as described in Contract Documents. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 INSULATION A. One inch thick snap -on glass fiber pipe insulation. B. Heavy density pipe insulation with factory vaporjacket equal to Fiberglass ASJ may be used. C. Approved Manufacturers 1. CTM 2. Manville 3. Owens-Corning 4. Knauf 2.2 PVC FITTING, VALVE, & ACCESSORY COVERS A. Approved Manufacturers: 1. Knauf 2. Zeston PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION A. Piping: 1. Apply insulation to clean, dry piping with joints tightly butted. 2. Adhere "factory applied vapor barrierjacket lap" smoothly and securely at longitudinal laps with a white vapor barrier adhesive. 3. Adhere 3 inch wide self-sealing buttjoint strips over end joints. B. Fittings, Valves, & Accessories: 1. Insulate with same type and thickness of insulation as pipe, with ends of insulation tucked snugly into throat of fitting and edges adjacent to pipe insulation tufted and tucked in. 2. Cover insulation with one piece fitting cover secured by stapling or taping ends to adjacent pipe covering. C. Pipe Hangers: 1. Do not allow pipes to come in contact with hangers. 2. Provide 16 ga x 6 inch long galvanized shields at each pipe hanger to protect pipe insulation from crushing by clevis hanger. END OF SECTION 22 0710 POTABLE WATER PIPE INSULATION 220710-1 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/2/2017 SECTION 22 0711 HANDICAPPED FIXTURES INSULATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Section 22 05 01 apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Furnish and install handicapped fixtures insulation as described in Contract Documents. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Insulating device must comply with UBC -85 and federal accessibility standards. B. Cover must meet federal standards for protection from burns and abrasions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Insulating device shall be molded fire resistant foam, to encapsulate hot water piping, stop, and P -trap. 1. Approved Manufacturers: a. TCI Products' Skal+Gard SG -100B B. Safety cover with recloseable sealing strips which allow for removal and replacement for line maintenance may be used on drain and supply lines under lavatories. 1. Approved Manufacturers: a. Handy -Shield b. Plumberex C. Color shall be white. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install tamper -proof locking strap to discourage pilferage. END OF SECTION 22 0711 HANDICAPPED FIXTURES INSULATION 220711 -1 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/2/2017 SECTION 22 0720 RAIN DRAIN INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Section 22 05 01 apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Furnish and install rain drain insulation as described in Contract Documents. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. 1/2 inch thick pre -formed fibrous glass pipe covering with a vapor barrier jacket or 1/2" thick rubber insulator. B. End joint strips and overlap seams shall be adhered with a vapor barrier mastic and stapled with outward clinch staples on 4 -inch centers. Staples and seams shall be sealed with a second coat of vapor barrier adhesive. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Insulate rain drain lines, overflow lines, and drain bodies. B. Seal off vapor barrier to pipe at all fittings, hangers, and every 20 feet on straight runs. END OF SECTION 22 0720 RAIN DRAIN INSULATION 22 0720-1 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/2/2017 SECTION 22 0800 FIRE STOPPING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Section 22 05 01 apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Furnish and install fire stopping as described in Contract Documents. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire stopping material shall meet ASTM E814, E84 and be UL listed. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS E I A. Material shall be flexible, long lasting, intumescent acrylic seal to accommodate vibration and building "- movement. B. Caulk simple penetrations with gaps of 1/4" or less with: 1. Dow Corning Fire Stop Sealant 2. Pensil300 i C. Caulk multiple penetrations and/or penetrations with gaps in excess of 1/4" with: 1. Dow Corning Fire Stop Foam 2. Pensi1200 3. IPC flame safe FS -1900 4. Tremco "Tremstop 1A" PART 3 - EXECUTION I 3.1 INSTALLATION I i A. Follow manufacturer's installation instructions explicitly. B. Seal penetrations of ductwork, piping, and other mechanical equipment through one-hour and two-hour rated partitions as shown on Architectural and Mechanical Drawings. I C. Install fire stopping material on clean surfaces to assure adherence. END OF SECTION 22 0800 FIRE STOPPINBG 220800-1 - Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/2/2017 SECTION 22 1110 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING, HOT AND COLD POTABLE WATER DISTRIBUTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes ASTM F877 cross-linked polyethylene (PEX) tubing hot and cold water distribution systems, ASTM F876 cross-linked polyethylene (PEX) tube, ASTM F1807 fittings and ASTM F2159 fittings 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASTM International 1. ASTM E84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 2. ASTM F876 Standard Specification for Cross-linked Polyethylene (PEX) Tubing. 3. ASTM F877 Standard Specification for Cross-linked Polyethylene (PEX) Plastic Hot and Cold Water Distribution Systems 4. ASTM F1807 Standard Specification for Metal Insert Fittings Utilizing a Copper Crimp Ring for SDR9 Cross-linked Polyethylene (PEX) Tubing 5. ASTM F2159 Standard Specification for Plastic Insert Fittings Utilizing a Copper Crimp Ring for SDR9 Cross-linked Polyethylene (PEX) Tubing B. National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) 1. Standard 14 Plastics Piping System Components and Related Materials 2. Standard 61 Drinking Water System Components — Health Effects C. International Code Council (ICC) 1. International Mechanical Code 2. International Plumbing Code D. International Association of Plumbing Officials (IAPMO) 1. Uniform Plumbing Code 2. Uniform Mechanical Code E. Plastic Pipe Institute (PPI) 1. Technical Report TR -3 Policies and Procedures for Developing Recommended Hydrostatic Design Stresses for Thermoplastic Pipe Materials. 2. Technical Report TR -4 Recommended Hydrostatic Strengths and Design Stresses for Thermoplastic Piping and Fitting Compounds 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. A. Design Requirements 1. Standard Grade hydrostatic pressure ratings from the Plastic Pipe Institute in accordance with TR -3 and listed in TR -4. The following three standard -grade hydrostatic ratings are required; a. 200 degrees F at 80 psi b. 180 degrees F at 100 psi C. 73 degrees F at 160 psi 2. Tubing tested in general accordance with ASTM E84 for a flame spread/smoke developed index of 25/50 or less for the following PEX tube sizes encased with % inch fiberglass insulation; a. 1 %inch b. 1 '/2 inch C. 2 inch 3. Tubing tested in general accordance with ASTM E84 for a flame spread/smoke developed index of 25/50 or less for the following PEX tube sizes; a. 3/8 inch b. / inch C. 5/8 inch DOMESTIC WATER PIPING, HOT & COLD POTABLE WATER DISTRIBUTION 221110-1 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/2/2017 d. %inch e. 1 inch B. Performance Requirements 1. To provide a PEX tubing hot and cold potable water distribution system, which is manufactured, fabricated and installed to comply with regulatory agencies and to maintain performance criteria stated by the PEX tubing manufacturer without defects, damage or failure a. Comply with NSF Standard 14 b. Comply with NSF Standard 61 C. Show compliance with ASTM F877 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General 1. Upon request, submit listed submittals in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Submittal Procedures Section B. Product Data 1. Upon request, submit manufacturer's product submittal data and installation instructions 2. Upon request, submit manufacturer's Professional Installation Limited Warranty C. Shop Drawings 1. Upon request, provide installation drawings indicating tubing layout, manifold locations, plumbing fixtures supported and schedules with details required for installation of the system D. Samples 1. Upon request, submit selection and verification samples of piping E. Listing Certifications 1. Upon request, submit manufacturers third party listings 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications 1. Utilize an installer having demonstrated experience on projects of similar size and complexity and possesses the skills and knowledge to install a PEX potable water distribution system 2. Installer will utilize skilled workers holding a trade qualification license or equivalent or apprentices under the supervision of a licensed tradesperson B. Pre -installation Meetings 1. Verify project timeline requirements 2. Manufacturer's installation instruction 3. Manufacturer's warranty requirements 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General 1. Comply with Division 1 Product Requirement Section B. Delivery 1. Deliver materials in manufacture's original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact until ready for installation C. Storage and Protection 1. Store materials protected from exposure to harmful environmental conditions and at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by the manufacturer 2. Store PEX tubing indoors, in cartons or under cover to avoid dirt or foreign material from entering the tubing 3. Do not expose PEX tubing to direct sunlight for more than six months. If construction delays are encountered, cover the tubing that is exposed to direct sunlight DOMESTIC WATER PIPING, HOT & COLD POTABLE WATER DISTRIBUTION 22 1110-2 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/2/2017 1.7 WARRANTY A. Project Warranty 1. Refer to Conditions of the Contract for project warranty provisions B. Manufacturer's Warranty 1. Shall cover the repair or replacement of properly installed tubing and fittings proven defective as well as incidental damages 2. Warranty period for PEX tubing and subsequent system shall be 25 year non -prorated warranty against failure due to defect in material or workmanship, beginning with the date of installation 3. It is the installer's responsibility to avoid mixing fittings manufactured by others as it will reduce the owner's warranty PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT MANUFACTURERS A. Zurn B. Uponor C. Vanguard D. Rehau E. Viega 2.2 MATERIALS A. Tubing 1. Cross-linked polyethylene (PEX). 2. Non -barrier type. a. Shall have a pressure and temperature rating of 160 PSI at 73°F, 100 PSI at 180°F and 8C PSI at 2007. b. Tubing shall have a minimum of 6 months UV protection. 3. Manufactured in accordance with ASTM F876 and ASTM F877 and tested for compliance by an independent third -party agency. B. Fittings 1. Manufactured in accordance with ASTM F1807 or ASTM F2159 and/or comply with ASTM F877 system standard as identified on the fitting C. Manifold 1. Preassembled Manifold 2. Copper Manifold System 3. Multi Port Fittings 4. Copper Manifold Header D. Valves 1. Shall be of the metal type, meeting the requirements of ASTM F877, identified as such with the appropriate mark on the product PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS A. A. Comply with manufacture's product data, including product technical bulletins, technical memo's, installation instructions and design drawings. 3.2 EXAMINATION A. Site Verification of Conditions DOMESTIC WATER PIPING, HOT & COLD POTABLE WATER DISTRIBUTION 22 1110-3 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/2/2017 1. Verify that site conditions are acceptable for the installation of the PEX potable water system 2. Do not proceed with installations of the PEX potable water system until unacceptable conditions are corrected 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install PEX tubing in accordance with tubing manufacturer's recommendations and as indicated in the PEX Plumbing Installation Guide B. Do not install PEX tubing within 6 inches of gas appliance vents or within 12 inches of any recessed light fixtures C. Do not solder within 18 inches of PEX tubing in the same waterline. Make sweat connections prior to making PEX connections D. Ensure no glues, solvents, sealants or chemicals come in contact with the tubing without prior permission from the tubing manufacturer E. Do not expose PEX tubing to direct sunlight for more than 6 months F. Use grommets or sleeves at the penetration for PEX tubing passing through metal studs G. Use a PEX manufacturer recommended fire stop sealant manufacturer H. Protect PEX tubing with sleeves where abrasion may occur I. Use nail plates where PEX tubing penetrates wall stud or joists and has the potential for being struck with a screw or nail J. Allow slack of approximately 1/8 inch per foot of tube length to compensate for expansion and contraction K. Minimum horizontal supports are to be installed not less than 32 inches between hangers in accordance with model plumbing codes. L. Pressurize PEX tubing in accordance with applicable codes or in the absence of applicable codes, test pressure shall be at least equal to normal system working pressure, but not less than 40 PSI water or air and not greater than 225 PSI water, 125 PSI air 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Site Tests 1. To ensure system integrity, pressure test the system before covering tubing in concrete and after other trades have worked in the vicinity of the tubing 2. Repair and replace any product that has been damaged according to manufacturer's recommendation 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect installed work from damage due to subsequent construction activity on the site END OF SECTION 22 1110 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING, HOT & COLD POTABLE WATER DISTRIBUTION 221110-4 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 SECTION 23 1123 NATURAL GAS SYSTEMS 5/2/2017 PARTI- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Section 23 05 01 apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Furnish and install gas piping and fittings within building including connection to meter. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Welders shall be certified and bear evidence of certification 30 days prior to commencing work on project. If there is doubt as to proficiency of welder, Owner's Representative may require welder to take another test. This shall be done at no cost to Owner. Certification shall be by Pittsburgh Testing Laboratories or other approved authority. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE A. Meet requirements of ASTM A 53-89a, "Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black & Hot -Dipped Zinc -Coated Welded & Seamless". B. Carbon steel, butt welded, Schedule 40 black steel pipe. 2.2 FITTINGS A. Black Pipe: 1. Welded forged steel fittings meeting requirements of ASTM A 234-89a, "Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and Elevated Temperatures", or standard weight malleable iron screwed. 2.3 VALVES A. 125 psi bronze body ball valve, UL listed B. Approved Manufacturers & Models: 1. ConBraCo - "Apollo" series 80-100 2. Jenkins - FIG -30-A 3. Jomar - Model T-204 4. McDonald - 3410 5. PGL Corp - 'Red Cap" gas ball valve 6. Watts - Model B -6000 -UL 2.4 PRESSURE REDUCING REGULATORS A. Corrosion Resistant Brass Body. B. 1/2" to 4" Threaded NPT C. 2" and Above Flanged. NATURAL GAS SYSTEMS 221123-1 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/2/2017 D. Max Inlet Pressure 10 psi. E. Max Outlet Pressure 0.5 psi. F. Temperature Capabilities --20 to 180° F. G. Approved Manufactures and Models. 1. Emerson Process Management. 2. Maxitrol3UP33 3. Or approved equal. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Pipe installed underground, through air plenums, in walls, and pipes 2-1/2 inches and larger shall have welded fittings and joints. Other pipe may have screwed or welded fittings. B. Wrap and lay underground pipe in accordance with local gas utility company regulations and specifications. C. Install gas cocks on lines serving boilers, furnaces, duct heaters, and water heaters adjacent to boiler, furnace, or heater on outside of boiler, furnace, or heater cabinet and easily accessible. D. Do not use flexible pipe connections to boilers, furnaces, duct heaters, or hot water heaters. E. Install dirt leg with pipe cap, 6 inches long minimum, on each vertical gas drop to heating equipment. F. Use fittings for changes of direction in pipe and for branch runouts. G. Paint exterior exposed gas piping with grey paint to match gas meter. END OF SECTION 22 1123 NATURAL GAS SYSTEMS 221123-2 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/2/2017 SECTION 22 1313 SOIL, WASTE, & VENT PIPING SYSTEMS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Section 22 05 01 apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Furnish and install soil, waste, and vent piping systems within building and connect with outside utility lines 5 feet out from building where applicable. B. Perform excavation and backfill required by work of this Section. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 BURIED LINES A. ABS-DWV or PVC-DWV plastic waste pipe and fittings as permitted by state and local plumbing code. B. Joint Material: 1. ABS-DWV solvent weld fittings PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Do not caulk threaded work. B. Slope horizontal pipe at 1/4 in/ft. C. Cleanouts: 1. Provide and set full size cleanouts at foot of each riser, and ends of branches from toilets, at points where a change of direction occurs, on exposed and accessible traps, at points where required to remove rust accumulation or other obstructions and as shown on plans. Set screw cap in cleanout with graphite paste. Cleanouts in walls shall be flush and covered with a chrome plated cleanout cover screwed into the cleanout plug. Cleanouts in floors shall be flush using Zurn, Josam, or Wade floor level cleanout fittings. Location of all cleanouts subject to approval of inspector. D. Each fixture and appliance discharging water into sanitary sewer or building sewer lines shall have seal trap in connection with complete venting system so gasses pass freely to atmosphere with no pressure or syphon condition on water seal. E. Vent entire waste system to atmosphere. Discharge 14 inches above roof. Join lines together in fewest practicable number before projecting above roof. Set back vent lines so they will not pierce roof near edge or valley. F. Use torque wrench to obtain proper tension in cinch bands when using hubless cast iron pipe. Butt ends of pipe against centering flange of coupling. G. Flash pipes passing through roof with 16 oz sheet copper flashing fitted snugly around pipes and calk between flashing and pipe with flexible waterproof compound. Flashing base shall be at least 24 inches square. 1. Flashing may be 4 Ib per sq ft lead flashing fitted around pipes and turned down into pipe 1/2 inch with turned edge hammered against pipe wall. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Before piping is covered, conduct tests for leaks and defective work. Notify Architect prior to testing. Correct leaks and defective work. Fill waste and vent system to roof level with water, 10 feet minimum, and show no leaks for two hours. END OF SECTION 22 1313 SOIL, WASTE, & VENT PIPING SYSTEMS 221313-1 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/2/2017 SECTION 22 3420 GAS FIRED STORAGE TYPE WATER HEATERS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Section 22 0501 apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Furnish and install water heater as described in Contract Documents. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Glass lined storage tank, pressure tested and rated for 150 psi wp complete with thermostat, high limit control, gas valve, gas pressure regulator, 100% safety shut-off, and draft diverter. AGA approved. B. 100 Gallon: 199,000 BTU 1. With four year tank warranty. 2. Approved Manufacturers: a. A 0 Smith b. Bradford -White C. Ruud d. State Industries 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Anchoring Components: 1. One inch by 18 ga galvanized steel straps. 2. No. 10 by 2-1/2 inch screws. B. Thermal Expansion Absorbers: 1. Bladder type for use with potable water systems. 2. Acceptable Products: a. Therm -X -Trot ST 25 by Amtrol. b. Equal as approved by Engineer before bidding. C. Mixing Valve: 1. Solid brass construction and CSA 8125 certified. 2. Includes integral check valves and inlet screen. Features advanced paraffin -based actuation technology. 3. Flow of 5.7 GPM with maximum 10 psi (69 kPA) pressure drop. Perform to minimum flow of 0.5 GPM (1.89 LPM) in accordance with ASSE 1016 and 1070. 4. Set for 110 deg F (43 deg C) Service. 5. Class One Quality Standard: Powers LM495. See Section 016200. 6. Acceptable Manufacturers: Leonard, Powers, Sloan, Symmons, and Wafts. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Water heaters shall each have temperature -pressure relief valve sized to match heat input and set to relieve at 120 psi. GAS FIRED STORAGE TYPE WATER HEATERS 223420-1 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/2/2017 B. Install temperature -pressure relief valve on hot water heater and pipe discharge to directly above funnel of floor drain. 3.2 WATER TEMPERATURE A. Contractor shall be responsible to verify and/or change temperature settings on water heaters supplied on this project to meet requirements of Life Safety and Health Department Codes. Any setting above 120 deg. F. shall require warning labels placed on outside of water heaters in conspicuous places indicating water temperature setting and fact that any temperature above 120 deg. F. may be a hazard. END OF SECTION 22 3420 GAS FIRED STORAGE TYPE WATER HEATERS 223420-2 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/2/2017 SECTION 22 3600 WATER SOFTENER PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Section 22 05 01 apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. The purpose of the water softening system will be to reduce the hardness to less than 0.8 mg/L. The system will be a WaterTech Reionator Model RC320-TM2(4) with System Controller, or approved equal, designed to handle a peak flow rate of 282.0 gal/min at a pressure loss not exceeding 25 psi (with 3 of 4 tanks online). The system (4 tanks) will have a softening capacity of not less than 768.0 kilo -grains per regeneration when a salt dosage of 9 lbs/cu. ft. per tank is used. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Before fixtures are ordered, the Contractor shall submit a complete list of plumbing fixtures, giving the catalog number, cut and make, for approval. Fixtures shall not be ordered until this list is approved. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 RESIN TANK A. Each Resonator resin tank will be 24.0 inches in diameter. The sideshell height will be 72.0 inches, sufficient to allow adequate freeboard above the resin bed for proper expansion of the resin during backwashing. Each tank will be designed for: • Max operating pressure: 150 psi Max operating temperature: 120° F B. Tank will be made of FRP filament winding, C. Tank will be NSF & PED (CE) certified D. Tank will be 100% corrosion resistant 2.2 DISTRIBUTOR SYSTEM A. Each softener tank will have an ABS/Polypropylene lower distributor which will disperse water laterally to avoid channeling within the resin bed. It will incorporate fine slot distributors to avoid possible passing of resin to service in the event of plumbing system upset. One layer of gravel will be provided to aid in the even collection of water and make efficient use of the softening capacity of the resin. 2.3 SOFTENING MEDIA A. Each softener tank will be provided with 10.0 cu.ft. of WaterTech Reionator specialty blend of high quality water softening, 10% cross-link resin having a minimum exchange capacity of 24,000 grains/cu.ft., (when regenerated at 10 lbs./per cu.ft. sodium chloride) and chlorine reduction resin. Both resins are regenerated with either sodium or chloride ion. The media shall be solid, of the proper particle size (16 by 30 mesh, U.S. standard screen) and will contain no agglomerates, shells, plates or other shapes that might interfere with the normal function of the water softener. The resin will: WATER SOFTENERS 22 3600 -1 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/2/2017 • Conform to paragraph 21CFR173.25 of the Food Additives Regulations of the US FDA Be certified to NSF/ANSI-61 for material safety 2.4 BRINE SYSTEM A. A combination salt storage and brine tank, measuring at least 24 inches in diameter by 50 inches tall, with cover, will be provided with each resin tank. The tank will be molded of corrosion -proof, high-density polyethylene. B. Each brine tank will be equipped with an elevated salt plate for brine collection, and a chamber to house a brine valve assembly. The brine valve will automatically open to admit brine to the resin tank during education and close automatically to prevent introduction of air into the resin tank. During refill, the brine valve will regulate the flow of treated water into the brine tank, working with the timed refill feature of the control valve; together these components will admit the correct volume of water to the brine tank in accordance with the salt dosage settings on the control valve. The brine valve will include a float -operated safety shut-off valve, as a back-up to the time refill valve on the control, to prevent brine tank overflow. 2.5 AUTOMATIC CONTROLS A. The automatic control valve on each tank will be of top mount design and all -brass construction. Service connections of the control valve will be 2.0 inch pipe size. The control on each tank will be a WaterTech Triton brand fully automatic multi -port control valve operated by a stack and piston system to accomplish regeneration. The multi -port valve will incorporate self-adjusting flow regulators to control the rate of flow and prevent resin loss during backwash, brine -rinse, and brine tank refill positions, regardless of pressure fluctuations between 30 and 100 psig. The control will open and close slowly to prevent noise and hydraulic shock. It will have provisions for bypass of hard water during the regeneration cycle or elimination of the bypass, depending upon the requirements. B. The individual control valves on each tank will be coordinated using a WaterTech System Control, allowing for "stage by flovV' operation as flow demand increases and decreases. The entire system will be sized to accommodate the necessary peak flow for the installation with 3 tanks online and a 4� tank in regeneration or standby as needed. Each control valve will have provisions for individual adjustment of backwash and rinse cycle, and provisions for manually regenerating by means of inlet hydraulic pressure even without the use of electric power. Regeneration will be controlled by the System Control that includes a seven-day calendar clock that permits regeneration at any time of the day or night, any or every day of the week. C. A WaterTech meter will be installed in the outlet (service) pipe of each unit. It will include turbine meter(s) and a solid state control device to permit regeneration on a metered volume basis. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTRUCTIONS A. Complete instructions for the installation, operation, and maintenance of the equipment will be provided in booklet form. All component parts will be easily identified, in exploded views, by individual part numbers. 3.2 SERVICE A. Start-up and subsequent service such as maintenance, repair, and salt delivery will be available as desired from a local authorized independently operated dealer or licensee. 3.3 PRODUCT INTEGRITY A. All major components such as tanks, distributors, controls, front piping assemblies and regenerant systems will all be designed and assembled by a single source for optimum compatibility. The WaterTech System referred to above carries a written limited warranty on materials. Refer to the warranty itself for all information on warranty rights relating to this system. Independently operated WaterTech dealerships have replacement parts and factory authorized service available. Factory authorized service will be available through your local WaterTech dealer so that the equipment can be maintained and serviced as needed. END OF SECTION 22 3600 WATER SOFTENERS 223600-2 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/2/2017 SECTION 22 4001 PLUMBING FIXTURES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Section 22 05 01 apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Furnish and install plumbing fixtures as described in Contract Documents. B. Before fixtures are ordered, the Contractor shall submit a complete list of plumbing fixtures, giving the catalog number, cut and make, for approval. Fixtures shall not be ordered until this list is approved. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Interior exposed pipe, valves, and fixture trim shall be chrome plated. B. Furnish and install the necessary plumbing fixtures in quantity as shown on plans. Provide all necessary valves, chrome plated 17 gauge or cast "P" traps, stops with risers, fittings, and accessories to make the job complete with the fixtures specified on the drawings. Exposed stops to be equal to Brasscraft with compression inlet, chrome plated nipples, cross handles, %turn ball valves and flexible risers. C. Fixtures shall be PROFLO, Kohler, Crane, Briggs, Eljer, American Standard, or an approved equal. Specialties shall be Zurn, Josam, MiFab, J. R. Smith, Wade, or Watts. D. Toilet seat manufacturers shall be Beneke, Church, Olsonite, or Bemis. E. Carrier and wall hydrant manufacturers shall be Smith, Zurn, Wade, Josam, or Watts. F. Stainless steel sink manufacturers shall be Elkay or Just. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install fixtures including traps and accessories with accessible stop or control valve in each hot and cold water branch supply line. B. Mounting — Refer to Architectural Elevations. C. Make fixture floor connections with approved brand of cast iron floor flange, soldered or calked securely to waste pipe. D. Make joints between fixtures and floor flanges tight with approved fixture setting compound or gaskets. E. Caulk between fixtures and wall and floor with white butyl rubber non-absorbent caulking compound. Point edges. F. Cleanouts: Provide and set full size cleanouts at foot of each riser, and ends of branches from toilets, at points where a change of direction occurs, on exposed and accessible traps, at points where required to PLUMBING FIXTURES 224001 -1 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/2/2017 remove rust accumulation or other obstructions and as shown on plans. Set screw cap in cleanout with graphite paste. Location of all cleanouts subject to approval of inspector. G. Traps: Install "P" traps in branch lines from floor drains or where required. Traps installed in connection with threaded pipe shall be recess drainage pattern. Traps installed in connection with cast iron pipe shall be of the same quality and grade as the pipe. Traps installed in connection with fixtures shall have a seal of not less than 2" nor more than 4". Exposed traps shall be chrome plated cast brass or chrome plated 17 gauge tubular type. Provide trap primers as required by Code. 3.2 FIXTURE INSTALLATION A. Provide stop valves and 18" minimum air chambers on all water connections to fixtures. Furnish and install wall carriers for wall mounted fixtures, wood backing, where necessary, to be installed by General Contractor at the direction of this Contractor. Provide exact locations, including proper mounting heights, obtained from details on drawings and from manufacturer's specifications. Provide hudee rims for countertop installations. B. Interior exposed pipe, valves, and fixtures trim shall be chrome plated. C. Complete installation of each fixture including trap and accessories with accessible stop or control valve in each hot and cold water branch supply line. Make fixture floor connections with approved brand of cast iron floor flange, soldered or caulked securely to waste pipe. Make joint between fixture and floor flange tight with approved fixture setting compound or gaskets. D. Polish chrome finish at completion of project. E. Caulk between fixtures and wall and floor with white butyl rubber non-absorbent caulking compound. Paint all edges. F. Install fixtures and fittings as per local codes and manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION 22 4001 END OF DIVISION 22 PLUMBING FIXTURES 224001 -2 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/2/2017 SECTION 23 0501 COMMON HVAC REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.3 SUMMARY A. Furnish labor, materials, and equipment necessary for completion of work as described in Contract Documents. B. It is the intent of these specifications that the systems specified herein are to be complete and operational before being turned over to the owner. During the bidding process, the contractor is to ask questions or call to the engineer's attention any items that are not shown or may be required to make the system complete and operational. Once the project is bid and the contractor has accepted the contract, it is his responsibility to furnish and install all equipment and parts necessary to provide a complete and operational system without additional cost to the owner. C. Furnish and install fire stopping materials to seal penetrations through fire rated structures and draft stops. D. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. General procedures and requirements for HVAC. E. Related Sections: 1. Section 23 0593: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Substitutions: By specific designation and description, standards are established for specialties and equipment. Other makes of specialties and equipment of equal quality will be considered provided such proposed substitutions are submitted to the Architect for his approval, complete with specification data showing how it meets the specifications, at least 5 working days prior to bid opening. A list of approved substitutions will be published as an addendum. 1. Submit a single copy of Manufacturer's catalog data including Manufacturer's complete specification for each proposed substitution. 2. The Architect or Engineer is to be the sole judge as to the quality of any material offered as an equal. B. Product Data, Shop Drawings: Within 30 days after award of contract, submit 10 sets of Manufacturer's catalog data for each manufactured item. 1. Literature shall include enough information to show complete compliance with Contract Document requirements. 2. Mark literature to indicate specific item with applicable data underlined. 3. Information shall include but not be limited to capacities, ratings, type of material used, guarantee, and such dimensions as are necessary to check space requirements. 4. When accepted, submittal shall be an addition to Contract Documents and shall be in equal force. No variation shall be permitted. 5. Even though the submittals have been accepted by the Engineer, it does not relieve the contractor from meeting all of the requirements of the plans and specifications and providing a complete and operational system. C. Drawings of Record: One complete sets of blue line mechanical drawings shall be provided for the purpose of showing a complete picture of the work as actually installed. COMMON HVAC REQUIREMENTS 230501 -1 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/2/2017 1. These drawings shall serve as work progress report sheets. Contractor shall make notations neat and legible therein daily as the work proceeds. 2. The drawings shall be kept at the job at a location designated by the Mechanical Engineer. 3. At completion of the project these "as -built' drawings shall be signed by the Contractor, dated, and returned to the Architect. D. Operating Instructions and Service Manual: The Mechanical Contractor shall prepare 2 copies of an Operation and Maintenance Manual for all mechanical systems and equipment used in this project. Manuals shall be bound in hard -backed binders and the front cover and spine of each binder shall indicate the name and location of the project. Use plastic tab indexes for all sections. Provide a section for each different type of equipment item. The following items shall be included in the manual, together with any other pertinent data. This list is not complete and is to be used as a guide. 1. Provide a master index at the beginning of the manual showing all items included. 2. The first section of the manual shall contain: a. Names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Architect, Mechanical Engineer, Electrical Engineer, General Contractor, Plumbing Contractor, Sheet Metal Contractor, and Temperature Control Contractor. b. List of Suppliers which shall include a complete list of each piece of equipment used with the name, address, and telephone number of vendor. c. General Description of Systems including — 1) Location of all major equipment 2) Description of the various mechanical systems 3) Description of operation and control of the mechanical systems 4) Suggested maintenance schedule d. Copy of contractor's written warranty 3. Provide a copy of approved submittal literature for each piece of equipment. 4. Provide maintenance and operation literature published by the manufacturer for each piece of equipment which includes: oiling, lubrication and greasing data; belt sizes, types and lengths; wiring diagrams; step-by-step procedure to follow in putting each piece of mechanical equipment in operation. 5. Include parts numbers of all replaceable items. 6. Provide control diagram and operation sequence, along with labeling of control piping and instruments to match diagram. 7. Include a valve chart indicating valve locations. E. Include air balance and/or water balance reports. 1.5 SUBMITTALS FOR COMMON HVAC REQUIREMENTS A. Samples: Sealer and gauze proposed for sealing ductwork. B. Quality Assurance / Control: 1. Manufacturer's installation manuals providing detailed instructions on assembly, joint sealing, and system pressure testing for leaks. 2. Specification data on sealer and gauze proposed for sealing ductwork. C. Quality Assurance 1. Requirements: Construction details not specifically called out in Contract Documents shall conform to applicable requirements of SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards. 2. Pre -Installation Conference: Schedule conference immediately before installation of ductwork. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: 1. Perform work in accordance with applicable provisions of local and state Plumbing Code, Gas Ordinances, and adoptions thereof. Provide materials and labor necessary to comply with rules, regulations, and ordinances. 2. In case of differences between building codes, state laws, local ordinances, utility company regulations, and Contract Documents, the most stringent shall govern. Promptly notify Architect in writing of such differences. COMMON HVAC REQUIREMENTS 230501 -2 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/2/2017 B. Applicable Specifications: Referenced specifications, standards, and publications shall be of the issues in effect on date of Advertisement for Bid. 1. "Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Guide" published by the American Society of Heating and Air Conditioning Engineers. 2. "Engineering Standards" published by the Heating, Piping, and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association. 3. "2012 International Building Code", "2012 International Mechanical Code", and "2012 International Fire Code" as published by the International Conference of Building Officials. 4. 2012 Idaho Plumbing Code as published by the International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials. 5. "National Electrical Code" as published by the National Fire Protection Association. 6. "2012 International Energy Conservation Code ". C. Identification: Motor and equipment name plates as well as applicable UL and AGA labels shall be in place when Project is turned over to Owner. 1.7 INSPECTIONS AND PERMITS A. Pay for permits, fees, or charges for inspection or other services. Local and state codes and ordinances must be properly executed without expense to Owner and are considered as minimum requirements. Local and state codes and ordinances do not relieve the Contractor from work shown that exceeds minimum requirements. 1.8 ADDITIONAL WORK: A. Design is based on equipment as described in the drawing equipment schedule. Any change in foundation bases, electrical wiring, conduit connections, piping, controls and openings required by alternate equipment submitted and approved shall be paid for by this division. All work shall be in accordance with the requirements of the applicable sections. PART 2 - PRODUCTS FOR COMMON HVAC REQUIREMENTS A. Finishes, Where Applicable: Colors as selected by Architect. B. Duct Hangers: 1. One inch 25 mm by 18 ga 1.27 mm galvanized steel straps or steel rods as shown on Drawings, and spaced not more than 96 inches 2 400 mm apart. Do not use wire hangers. 2. Attaching screws at trusses shall be 2 inch 50 mm No. 10 round head wood screws. Nails not allowed. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.2 EXAMINATION A. Site Inspection: 1. Examine premises and understand the conditions which may affect performance of work of this Division before submitting proposals for this work. 2. No subsequent allowance for time or money will be considered for any consequence related to failure to examine site conditions. B. Drawings: 1. Mechanical drawings show general arrangement of piping, ductwork, equipment, etc, and do not attempt to show complete details of building construction which affect installation. This Contractor shall refer to architectural, structural, and electrical drawings for additional building detail which affect installation of his work. a. Follow mechanical drawings as closely as actual building construction and work of other trades will permit. b. No extra payments will be allowed where piping and/or ductwork must be offset to avoid other work or where minor changes are necessary to facilitate installation. COMMON HVAC REQUIREMENTS 230501 -3 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/2/2017 C. Everything shown on the mechanical drawings shall be the responsibility of Mechanical Contractor unless specifically noted otherwise. 2. Consider architectural and structural drawings part of this work insofar as these drawings furnish information relating to design and construction of building. These drawings take precedence over mechanical drawings. 3. Because of small scale of mechanical drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, and accessories which may be required. Investigate structural and finish conditions affecting this work and arrange work accordingly, providing such fittings, valves, and accessories required to meet conditions. Do not scale drawings for locations of equipment or piping. Refer to large scale dimensioned drawings for exact locations. C. Insure that items to be furnished ft space available. Make necessary field measurements to ascertain space requirements including those for connections and furnish and install equipment of size and shape so final installation shall suit true intent and meaning of Contract Documents. 1. If approval is received to use other than specified items, responsibility for specified capacities and insuring that items to be furnished will fit space available lies with this Division. 2. If non-specified equipment is used and it will not fit job site conditions, this Contractor assumes responsibility for replacement with items named in Contract Documents. 3.3 PREPARATION A. Cut carefully to minimize necessity for repairs to existing work. Do not cut beams, columns, or trusses. 1. Patch and repair walls, floors, ceilings, and roofs with materials of same quality and appearance as adjacent surfaces unless otherwise shown. Surface finishes shall exactly match existing finishes of same materials. 2. Each Section of this Division shall bear expense of cutting, patching, repairing, and replacing of work of other Sections required because of its fault, error, tardiness, or because of damage done by it. 3. Cutting, patching, repairing, and replacing pavements, sidewalks, roads, and curbs to permit installation of work of this Division is responsibility of Section installing work. 3.4 INSTALLATION A. Arrange pipes, ducts, and equipment to permit ready access to valves, unions, traps, starters, motors, control components, and to clear openings of doors and access panels. 3.5 STORAGE AND PROTECTION OF MATERIALS: A. Provide storage space for storage of materials and assume complete responsibility for losses due to any cause whatsoever. Storage shall not interfere with traffic conditions in any public thoroughfare. B. Protect completed work, work underway, and materials against loss or damage. C. Close pipe openings with caps or plugs during installation. Cover fixtures and equipment and protect against dirt, or injury caused by water, chemical, or mechanical accident. 3.6 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL A. Perform necessary excavation of whatever substance encountered for proper laying of all pipes and underground ducts. 1. Excavated materials not required for fill shall be removed from site as directed by Engineer. 2. Excavation shall be carried low enough to allow a minimum coverage over underground piping of 5'-0" or to be below local frost level. 3. Excess excavation below required level shall be backfilled at Contractor's expense with earth, sand, or gravel as directed by Engineer. Tamp ground thoroughly. 4. Ground adjacent to all excavations shall be graded to preventwater running into excavated areas. B. Backfill pipe trenches and allow for settlement. 1. Backfill shall be mechanically compacted to same density as surrounding undisturbed earth. 2. Cinders shall not be used in backfilling where steel or iron pipe is used. COMMON HVAC REQUIREMENTS 230501 -4 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/2/2017 3. No backfilling shall be done until installation has been approved by the Engineer. 3.7 COOPERATION A. Cooperate with other crafts in coordination of work. Promptly respond when notified that construction is ready for installation of work under Division 23000. Contractor will be held responsible for any delays which might be caused by his negligence or failure to cooperate with the other Contractors or crafts. 3.8 SUPERVISION A. Provide a competent superintendent in charge of the work at all times. Anyone found incompetent shall be removed at once and replaced by someone satisfactory, when requested by the Architect. 3.9 INSTALLATION CHECK: A. An experienced, competent, and authorized representative of the manufacturer or supplier of each item of equipment indicated in the equipment schedule shall visit the project to inspect, check, adjust if necessary, and approve the equipment installation. In each case, the equipment supplier's representative shall be present when the equipment is placed in operation. The equipment supplier's representative shall revisit the project as often as necessary until all trouble is corrected and the equipment installation and operation is satisfactory to the Engineer. B. Each equipment supplier's representative shall furnish to the Owner, through the Engineer, a written report certifying the following: 1. Equipment has been properly installed and lubricated. 2. Equipment is in accurate alignment. 3. Equipment is free from any undue stress imposed by connecting piping or anchor bolts. 4. Equipment has been operated under full load conditions. 5. Equipment operated satisfactorily. C. All costs for this installation check shall be included in the prices quoted by equipment suppliers. 3.10 CLEANING EQUIPMENT AND PREMISES A. Properly lubricate equipment before Owner's acceptance. B. Clean exposed piping, ductwork, equipment, and fixtures. Repair damaged finishes and leave everything in working order. C. Remove stickers from fixtures and adjust flush valves. D. At date of Substantial Completion, air filters shall be new, clean, and approved by Owner's representative. E. Trap elements shall be removed during cleaning and flushing period. Replace trap elements and adjust after cleaning and flushing period. 3.11 TESTS A. No piping work, fixtures, or equipment shall be concealed or covered until they have been inspected and approved by the inspector. Notify inspector when the work is ready for inspection. B. All work shall be completely installed, tested as required by Contract Documents and the city and county ordinances and shall be leak -tight before the inspection is requested. C. Tests shall be repeated to the satisfaction of those making the inspections. D. Water piping shall be flushed out, tested at 100 psi and left under pressure of supply main or a minimum of 40 psi for the balance of the construction period. COMMON HVAC REQUIREMENTS 230501 -5 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/2/2017 3.12 WARRANTEE A. Contractor shall guarantee work under Division 23 to be free from inherent defects for a period of one year from acceptance. 1. Contractor shall repair, revise or replace any and all such leaks, failure or inoperativeness due to defective work, materials, or parts free of charge for a period of one year from final acceptance, provided such defect is not due to carelessness in operation or maintenance. 2. In addition, the Contractor shall furnish all refrigeration emergency repairs, emergency service and all refrigerant required due to defective workmanship, materials, or parts for a period of one year from final acceptance at no cost to the Owner, provided such repairs, service and refrigerant are not caused by lack of proper operation and maintenance. B. In addition to warrantee specified in General Conditions, heating, cooling, and plumbing systems are to be free from noise in operation that may develop from failure to construct system in accordance with Contract Documents. 3.13 SYSTEM START-UP, OWNER'S INSTRUCTIONS A. Off -Season Start-up 1. If Substantial Completion inspection occurs during heating season, schedule spring start-up of cooling systems. If inspection occurs during cooling season, schedule autumn start-up for heating systems. 2. Notify Owner 7 days minimum before scheduled start-up. 3. Time will be allowed to completely service, test, check, and off-season start systems. During allowed time, train Owner's representatives in operation and maintenance of system. 4. At end of off-season start-up, furnish Owner with letter confirming that above work has been satisfactorily completed. B. Owner's Instructions 1. Instruct building maintenance personnel and Owner Representative in operation and maintenance of mechanical systems utilizing Operation & Maintenance Manual when so doing. 2. Minimum instruction periods shall be as follows — a. Mechanical - Four hours. b. Temperature Control - Four hours. C. Refrigeration - Two hours. 3. Instruction periods shall occur after Substantial Completion inspection when systems are properly working and before final payment is made. 4. None of these instructional periods shall overlap another. 3.14 PROTECTION A. Do not run heat pump, air handling units, fan coil units, or other pieces of equipment used for moving supply air without proper air filters installed properly in system. B. The mechanical systems are not designed to be used for temporary construction heat. If any equipment is to be started prior to testing and substantial completion, such equipment will be returned to new condition with full one year warranties, from date of substantial completion after any construction use. This includes, but is not necessarily limited to: Equipment, filters, ductwork, fixtures, etc. 3.15 COMMON HVAC REQUIREMENTS: A. INSTALLATION 1. During installation, protect open ends of ducts by covering with plastic sheet tied in place to prevent entrance of debris and dirt. 2. Make necessary allowances and provisions in installation of sheet metal ducts for structural conditions of building. Revisions in layout and configuration may be allowed, with prior written approval of Architect. Maintain required airflows in suggesting revisions. 3. Hangers And Supports: a. Install pair of hangers close to each transverse joint and elsewhere as required by spacing indicated in table on Drawings. COMMON HVAC REQUIREMENTS 230501 -6 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/2/2017 b. Install upper ends of hanger securely to floor or roof construction above by method shown on Drawings. C. Attach strap hangers to ducts with cadmium -plated screws. Use of pop rivets or other means will not be accepted. d. Where hangers are secured to forms before concrete slabs are poured, cut off flush all nails, strap ends, and other projections after forms are removed. e. Secure vertical ducts passing through floors by extending bracing angles to rest firmly on floors without loose blocking or shimming. Support vertical ducts, which do not pass through floors, by using bands bolted to walls, columns, etc. Size, spacing, and method of attachment to vertical ducts shall be same as specified for hanger bands on horizontal ducts. B. CLEANING 1. Clean interior of duct systems before final completion. END OF SECTION 23 0501 COMMON HVAC REQUIREMENTS 230501 -7 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/2/2017 SECTION 23 0553 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Section 23 05 01 apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Furnish and install identification of equipment and piping as described in Contract Documents. B. Mechanical Contractor shall touch-up equipment where factory paint has been damaged. Repaint entire item where more than 20 percent of the surface is involved. C. Primary painting of walls, ceilings, ductwork, piping and plenums is covered in the general painting section of these Contract Documents. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.2 PAINT A. Benjamin Moore Impervo or equivalent by Paint Manufacturer approved in Section 09 900. B. Use appropriate primer. 2.3 LABELS A. Black Formica with white reveal on engraving. 2.4 CODEDBANDS A. Using colored bands and arrows to indicate supply and return, with colored reflective tape, color code all piping installed in this contract at not more than 20 -foot intervals, at equipment, at walls, etc., in accordance with ANSI Standards. B. Approved Manufacturers: 1. Seton 2. Craftmark 2.5 PIPE IDENTIFICATION A. In addition to the colored bands, stencil with black paint in 1/2 inch high letters a symbol and directional arrow for all fluids handled or use Seaton coded and colored pipe markers and arrows to meet ANSI Standards. 2.6 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A. Provide an engraved plastic plate for each piece of equipment stating the name of the item, symbol number, area served, and capacity. Label all control components with plastic embossed mechanically attached labels. Sample: 1. Supply Fan SF -1 - North Classrooms 2. 10,000 CFM @ 2.5' ID FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230553-1 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/2/2017 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.2 APPLICATION A. Engraved Plates: 1. Identify thermostats and control panels in mechanical rooms, furnaces, boilers and hot water heating specialties, duct furnaces, air handling units, electric duct heaters, and condensing units with following data engraved and fastened to equipment with screws — a. Equipment mark noted on Drawings (i.e,, SF -1) b. Area served (i.e., North Classrooms) c. Capacity (10,000 CFM @ 2.5) B. Stenciling: 1. Locate identifying legends and directional arrows at following points on each piping system — a. Adjacent to each item of equipment and special fitting. b. At point of entry and exit where piping goes through wall. C. On each riser and junction. d. Every 50 feet on long continuous lines. 2. Gas, & Valve Identification — a. Identify specific pipe contents by stenciling pipe with written legend and placing of arrows to indicate direction of flow. C. Painting: 1. Background Color - Provide by continuous painting of piping. Symbol Name Color NG Natural Gas Yellow 2. Identification stenciling and flow arrows shall be following colors for proper contrast: Arrows & ID Stenciling White Black Color Shade of Pipe Red, Grays, & black Yellows, Oranges, Greens, & White END OF SECTION 23 0553 ID FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230553-2 Student Housing BVI I, LLC JHS 1619 5/2/2017 SECTION 23 0593 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Division 23 - Basic Mechanical Requirements and Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods Sections apply to work of this section. 1.2 SUMMARY SCOPE A. This Section includes TAB to produce design objectives for the following: 1. Air Systems. a. Furnaces. b. Exhaust fans. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Agency Data: 1. Submit proof that the proposed testing, adjusting, and balancing agency meets the qualifications specified below. The firm or individuals performing the work herein specified may not be the installing firm. B. Engineer and Technicians Data: 1. Submit proof that the Test and Balance Engineer assigned to supervise the procedures, and the technicians proposed to perform the procedures meet the qualifications specified below. C. Procedures and Agenda: Submit a synopsis of the testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures and agenda proposed to be used for this project. D. Sample Forms: Submit sample forms, if other than those standard forms prepared by the AABC or NEBB are proposed. E. Certified Reports: Submit testing, adjusting, and balancing reports bearing the seal and signature of the Test and Balance Engineer. The reports shall be certified proof that the systems have been tested, adjusted, and balanced in accordance with the referenced standards; are an accurate representation of how the systems have been installed; are a true representation of how the systems are operating at the completion of the testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures; and are an accurate record of all final quantities measured, to establish normal operating values of the systems. Follow the procedures and format specified below. 1. Draft Reports: Upon completion of testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures, prepare draft reports on the approved forms. Draft reports may be hand written, but must be complete, factual, accurate, and legible. Organize and format draft reports in the same manner specified for the final reports. Submit 2 complete sets of draft reports. Only 1 complete set of draft reports will be returned. 2. Final Report: Upon verification and approval of draft reports, prepare final reports, type written, and organized and formatted as specified below. Submit 4 complete sets of final reports. 3. Report Format: Report forms shall be those standard forms prepared by the referenced standard for each respective item and system to be tested, adjusted, and balanced. Bind report forms complete with schematic systems diagrams and other data. Divide the contents of the binder into the below listed divisions, separated by divider tabs: a. General Information and Summary b. Air Systems C. Temperature Control System Verification. F. Report Contents: Provide the following minimum information, forms, and data: TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 230593-1 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/2/2017 1. General information and Summary: Inside cover sheet to identify testing, adjusting, balancing agency, Contractor, Owner, Engineer, and Project. Include addresses and contact names and telephone numbers. Also include a certification sheet containing the seal and name, address, telephone number, and signature of the Certified Test and Balance Engineer. Include in this division a listing of the instrumentation used for the procedures along with the instrument calibration sheet. 2. The remainder of the report shall contain the appropriate forms containing as a minimum, the information indicated on the standard report forms prepared by the AABC or NEBB, for each respective item and system. Prepare a schematic diagram for each item of equipment and system to accompany each respective report form. The report shall contain the following information, and all other data resulting from the testing, adjusting, and balancing work: a. All nameplate and specification data for all air handling equipment and motors. b. Actual metered running amperage for each phase of each motor on all pumps and air handling equipment. c. Actual metered voltage at air handling equipment (phase -to -phase for all phases). d. Fan RPM for each piece of air handling equipment. e. Total actual CFM being handled by each piece of air handling equipment. f. Actual CFM of systems by rooms. 3. Certify that all smoke and fire dampers operate properly and can be reset under actual system operating conditions. G. Calibration Reports: 1. Submit proof that all required instrumentation has been calibrated to tolerances specified in the referenced standards, within a period of six months prior to starting the project. 1.4 CERTIFICATION A. Agency Qualifications: 1. Employ the services of a certified testing, adjusting, and balancing agency meeting the qualifications specified below, to be the single source of responsibility to test, adjust, and balance the building mechanical systems identified above, to produce the design objectives. Services shall include checking installations for conformity to design, measurement, and establishment of the fluid quantities of the mechanical systems as required to meet design specifications, recording and reporting the results, and operation of all systems to demonstrate satisfactory performance to the owner. 2. The testing, adjusting, and balancing agency certified by National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB) or Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) in those testing and balancing disciplines required for this project, and having at least one person certified by NEBB or AABC as a Test and Balance supervisor, and a registered professional mechanical engineer, licensed in the state where the work will be performed. B. Codes and Standard: 1. NEBB: "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems." 2. AABC: "National Standards for Total System Balance." 3. ASHRAE: ASHRAE Handbook, 1984 Systems Volume, Chapter 37, Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Systems Operation: Systems shall be fully operation and clean prior to beginning procedures. 1.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Test, adjust, and balance the air systems before hydronic, steam, and refrigerant systems within +10% to - 5% of contract requirements. B. The report shall be approved by the Engineer. Test and balance shall be performed prior to substantial completion. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 230593-2 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/2/2017 PART 2 - NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.2 PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES FOR AIR SYSTEM BALANCING A. Before operating the system, perform these steps. 1. Obtain design drawings and specifications and become thoroughly acquainted with the design intent. 2. Obtain copies of approved shop drawings of all air handling equipment, outlets (supply, return, and exhaust) and temperature control diagrams. 3. Compare design to installed equipment and field installations. 4. Walk the system from the system air handling equipment to terminal units to determine variations of installation from design. 5. Check filters for cleanliness and to determine if they are the type specified. 6. Check dampers (both volume and fire) for correct and locked position. Check automatic operating and safety controls and devices to determine that they are properly connected, functioning, and at proper operating setpoint. 7. Prepare report test sheets for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and recommended procedures for testing. Prepare a summation of required outlet volumes to permit a cross-check with required fan volumes. 8. Determine best locations in main and branch ductwork for most accurate duct traverses. 9. Place outlet dampers in the full open position. 10. Prepare schematic diagrams of system "As -Built" ductwork and piping layouts to facilitate reporting. 11. Lubricate all motors and bearings. 12. Check fan belt tension. 13. Check fan rotation. 3.3 MEASUREMENTS A. Provide all required instrumentation to obtain proper measurements, calibrated to the tolerances specified in the referenced standards. Instruments shall be properly maintained and protected against damage. B. Provide instruments meeting the specifications of the referenced standards. C. Use only those instruments which have the maximum field measuring accuracy and are best suited to the function being measured. D. Apply instrument as recommended by the manufacturer. E. Use instruments with minimum scale and maximum subdivisions and with scale ranges proper for the value being measured. F. When averaging values, take a sufficient quantity of readings which will result in a repeatability error of less than 5%. When measuring a single point, repeat readings until 2 consecutive identical values are obtained. G. Take all readings with the eye at the level of the indicated value to prevent parallax. H. Use pulsation dampeners where necessary to eliminate error involved in estimating average of rapidly fluctuation readings. I. Take measurements in the system where best suited to the task. 3.4 PERFORMING TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system identified, in accordance with the detailed procedures outlined in the referenced standards. Balancing of the air systems and hydronic systems shall be achieved by adjusting the automatic controls, balancing valves, dampers, air terminal devices, and the fan/motor drives within each system. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 230593-3 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/2/2017 B. Cut insulation, ductwork, and piping for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures. C. Patch insulation, ductwork, and housings, using materials identical to those removed. D. Seal ducts and piping, and test for and repair leaks. E. Seal insulation to re-establish integrity of the vapor barrier. F. Adjust timing relays of environmental equipment motor reduced voltage starters to the optimum time period for the motor to come up to the maximum reduced voltage speed and then transition to the full voltage speed to prevent damage to motor, and to limit starting current spike to the lowest possible and practical. G. Mark equipment settings, including damper control positions, valve indicators, fan speed control levers, and similar controls and devices, to show final settings. Mark with paint or other suitable, permanent identification materials. H. Retest, adjust, and balance systems subsequent to significant system modifications, and resubmit test results. 3.5 RECORD AND REPORT DATA A. Record all data obtained during testing, adjusting, and balancing in accordance with, and on the forms recommended by the referenced standards, and as approved on the sample report forms. B. Prepare report of recommendations for correcting unsatisfactory mechanical performances when system cannot be successfully balanced. C. Report shall be certified and stamped by a registered professional mechanical engineer employed by the agency and licensed in the state where the work will be performed. D. Engineer is to provide a floor plan and test and balance contractor to include the plan in test and balance report and identify actual cfm on drawing or number the diffusers to match report. 3.6 DEMONSTRATION A. If requested, testing, adjusting, and balancing agency shall conduct any or all of the field tests in the presence of the engineer. B. Agency shall include a maximum of one (1) call back to the project within the one year warranty period to make additional adjustments if requested by the engineer. END OF SECTION 23 0593 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 23 0593 -4 Student Housing BVII, LLC JI IS 1619 5/2/2017 SECTION 23 0800 FIRE STOPPING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Section 23 05 01 apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Furnish and install fire stopping as described in Contract Documents. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire stopping material shall meet ASTM E814, E84 and be UL listed. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Material shall be flexible, long lasting, intumescent acrylic seal to accommodate vibration and building movement. B. Caulk simple penetrations with gaps of 1/4" or less with: 1. Dow Corning Fire Stop Sealant 2. Pensi1300 C. Caulk multiple penetrations and/or penetrations with gaps in excess of 1/4" with: 1. Dow Corning Fire Stop Foam 2. Pensi1200 3. IPC flame safe FS -1900 4. Tremco "Tremstop 1A" PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Follow manufacturer's installation instructions explicitly. B. Seal penetrations of ductwork, piping, and other mechanical equipment through one-hour and two-hour rated partitions as shown on Architectural and Mechanical Drawings. C. Install fire stopping material on clean surfaces to assure adherence. END OF SECTION 23 0800 FIRE STOPPING 230800-1 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/2/2017 SECTION 23 3114 LOW-PRESSURE STEEL DUCTWORK PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Section 23 05 01 apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Furnish and install above -grade ductwork and related items as described in Contract Documents. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.2 DUCTS A. Fabricate of zinc -coated lockforming quality steel sheets meeting requirements of ASTM 653A/653M, "Specification for Sheet Steel Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process, Lock Forming Quality", with G 60 coating. B. Use of aluminum, non-metallic, or round ducts is not permitted. [Specification writer: Use of aluminum ducts in areas with high chlorine content (eg.: ventilation for pools, spas, etc.) should be considered on a per job basis.] 2.3 DUCTJOINTS A. Ducts with sides up to and including 36 inches shall be as detailed in the SMACNA manual. B. Duct sizes over 36 inches shall be fabricated using SMACNA T-24 flange joints or pre -fabricated systems as follows: 1. Ducts with sides over 36 inches to 48 inches: _ a. ransverse ductjoint system by Ductmate/25, Nexus, Ward, or WDCI (Lite) (SMACNA "E" or "G" Type connection). 2. Ducts 48 inches & larger: a. Ductmate/35, Nexus, or WDCI (Heavy) (SMACNA "J' Type connection). 3. Approved Manufacturers: a. Ductmate Industries Inc, 10760 Bay Meadows Drive, Sandy, UT 84092 (801) 571-5308 b. Nexus, Exanno Corp, P O Box 729, Buffalo, NY 14206 (716) 849-0545 C. Ward Industries Inc, 1661 Lebanon Church Road, Pittsburg, PA 15236 (800) 466-9374 d. WDCI, P O Box 10868, Pittsburg, PA 15236 (800) 245-3188 2.4 ACCESS DOORS IN DUCTS A. At each manual outside air damper and at each motorized damper, install factory built insulated access door with hinges and sash locks. Locate doors within 6 inches of installed dampers. Construction shall be galvanized sheet metal, 24 ga minimum. B. Fire and smoke damper access doors shall have a minimum clear opening of 12" x 12" or as specified on Drawings to easily service fire or smoke damper. Doors shall be within 6 inches of fire and smoke dampers and in Mechanical Room if possible. C. Identify each door with 1/2" high letters reading "smoke damper' or "fire damper". D. Approved Manufacturers: 1. AirBalance - Fire/Seal #FSA 100 LOW-PRESSURE STEEL DUCTWORK 233114-1 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/2/2017 2. Air Control Products - HAD -10 3. Cesco-Advanced Air - HAD -10 4. Elgen - Model 85 A 5. Kees Inc - ADH -D. 6. Louvers & Dampers - #SMD -G -F 7. Nailor-Hart Industries Inc - Series 0831 B. National Controlled Air Inc - Model AD -FL -1 2.5 FLEXIBLE EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS w 2.7 A. 30 oz closely woven UL approved glass fabric, double coated with neoprene. B. Fire retardant, waterproof, air -tight, resistant to acids and grease, and withstand constant temperatures of 250 deg F. C. Approved Manufacturers: 1. Cain - N-100 2. Duro Dyne - MFN 3. Elgen - ZLN 4. Ventfabrics - Ventglas CONCEALED CEILING DAMPER REGULATORS A. Approved Manufacturers 1. Cain 2. Duro Dyne 3. Metco Inc 4. Vent -Lock - #666 5. Young - #303 VOLUME DAMPERS A. In Main Ducts: 1. 16 gauge galvanized steel, opposed blade type with 3/8 inch pins and end bearings. Blades shall have 1/8 inch clearance all around. 2. Damper shall operate within acoustical duct liner. 3. Provide channel spacer equal to thickness of duct liner. 4. Approved Manufacturers: a. Air Balance - Model AC -2 b. Air Control Products - CD -OB c. American Warming - VC -2 -AA d. Greenheck - VCD-1100 e. NCA, Safe Air f. Vent Products - 5100 B. In Sheet Metal Branch Ducts: 1. Extruded aluminum, opposed blade type. When in open position, shall not extend beyond damper frame. 2. Maximum blade length 12 inches. 3. Damper Regulator shall be concealed type with operation from bottom or with 90 deg miter gear assembly from side. 4. Approved Manufacturers: a. Air Control Products - TCD -OB b. Air Guide - OB c. Arrow - OBDAF-207 d. CESCO - CDA e. Reliable Metals - OBD-RO f. Tuttle & Bailey - A7RDDM g. Safe Air h. Young - 820 -AC LOW-PRESSURE STEEL DUCTWORK 233114-2 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/2/2017 C. Dampers above removable ceiling and in Mechanical Rooms shall have locking quadrant on bottom or side of duct. Otherwise, provide concealed ceiling damper regulator and cover plate. 2.8 MOTORIZED OUTSIDE AIR DAMPERS A. Damper Blades: 1. 18 gauge galvanized steel or equivalent aluminum with replaceable rubber blade edges, 9 inches wide maximum. 2. End seals shall be Flexible metal compression type. 3. Opposed blade type. B. Make provision for damper actuators and actuator linkages to be mounted external of air flow. C. Approved Manufacturers & Models: 1. Air Balance - AC -2 2. American Warming - VC-2-AAVA 3. Arrow - OBDAF-207 4. Greenheck - VCD-2100 5. Honeywell - D641 6. Johnson - D1300 7. Louvers & Dampers - TSD400 8. Ruskin - CD36 or CD60 9. Safe Air - 610 10. Vent Products - 5800 2.9 BACKDRAFT DAMPER A. Backdraft blades shall be nonmetallic and shall be neoprene coated fiberglass. B. Stop shall be galvanized steel screen or expanded metal, 1/2 inch mesh. C. Frame shall be galvanized steel or extruded aluminum alloy. D. Approved Models & Manufacturers: 1. Air Control Products - FBD 2. American Warming - BD -15 3. CESCO -FBD 101 4. Ruskin - NMS2 5. Safe Air 2.10 DUCTHANGERS A. 1"x 18 gauge galvanized steel straps or steel rods as shown on Drawings, and spaced not more than 8 feet apart. Do not use wire hangers. B. Attaching screws at trusses shall be 1-1/2 inch No. 10 round head wood screws. Nails not allowed. 2.11 DUCT SEALER A. Cain - Duct Butter or Butter Tak B. Design Polymerics - DP 1010 C. DSC - Stretch Coat D. Duro Dyne - S2 E. Hardcast - #601 Iron -Grip or Peel -N -Seal Tape 1. Kingco - 15-325 LOW-PRESSURE STEEL DUCTWORK 233114-3 Student Housing BVI I, LLC JHS 1619 5/2/2017 2. Mon -Eco - 44-41 3. Trans -Continental Equipment Cc - Multipurpose Duct Sealant 4. United - Sheet Metal duct -sealer PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Ducts: 1. Straight and smooth on inside with joints neatly finished unless otherwise directed. 2. Duct panels through 48 inch dimension having acoustic duct liner need not be crossbroken or beaded. 3. Crossbreak unlined ducts and duct panels larger than 48 inch or bead 12 inches on center. 4. Securely anchor ducts to building structure with specified duct hangers attached with screws. Do not hang more than one duct from a duct hanger. 5. Brace and install ducts so they shall be free of vibration under all conditions of operation. 6. Ducts shall not bear on top of structural members. 7. Make duct take -offs to branches, registers, grilles, and diffusers as detailed on Drawings. 8. Ducts shall be large enough to accommodate inside acoustic duct liner. Dimensions shown on Drawings are net clear inside dimensions after duct liner has been installed. 9. Properly flash where ducts protrude above roof. 10. Install internal ends of slip joints in direction of flow. Make joints air tight using specified duct sealer. 11. Cover horizontal and longitudinal joints on exterior ducts with two layers of Hardcast tape installed with Hardcast HC -20 adhesive according to Manufacturer's recommendations. 12. Paint ductwork visible through registers, grilles, and diffusers flat black. B. Install flexible inlet and outlet duct connections to each furnace, fan, fan coil unit, and air handling unit. C. Install concealed ceiling damper regulators. 1. Paint cover plates to match ceiling tile. 2. Damper regulators will not be required for dampers located directly above removable ceilings or in Mechanical Rooms. D. Provide each take -off with an adjustable volume damper to balance that branch. 1. Anchor dampers securely to duct. 2. Install dampers in main ducts within insulation. 3. Dampers in branch ducts shall ft against sheet metal walls, bottom and top of duct, and be securely fastened. Cut duct liner to allow damper to fit against sheet metal. 4. Where concealed ceiling damper regulators are installed, provide a cover plate. E. Install grilles, registers, and diffusers. Level floor registers and anchor securely into floor. F. Air Turns: 1. Permanently installed, consisting of single thickness curved metal blades with one inch straight trailing edge to permit air to make abrupt turn without appreciable turbulence, in 90 degree elbows of above ground supply and return ductwork. 2. 4-1/2 inch wide minimum vane rail. Do not use junior vane rails. 3. Double thickness vanes not acceptable. 4. Quiet and free from vibration when system is in operation. See SMACNA Manual G. Install motorized dampers END OF SECTION 23 3114 LOW-PRESSURE STEEL DUCTWORK 233114-4 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/2/2017 SECTION 23 3400 EXHAUSTFANS PART1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Section 23 05 01 apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Furnish and install exhaust fans as described in Contract Documents. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCES A. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: 1. Bear AMCA seal and UL label. 1 PART 2 -PRODUCTS l 2.2 CEILING MOUNTED EXHAUST FANS A. Acoustically insulated housings. B. Sound level rating of 4.6 sones maximum for fan RPM and CFM listed on Drawings. C. Include chatterproof integral back -draft damper with no metal to metal contact. D. True centrifugal wheels. E. Entire fan, motor, and wheel assembly shall be easily removable without disturbing housing. - F. Suitably ground motors and mount on rubber -in shear vibration isolators. G. Provide wall or roof cap, as required. H. Fire Dampers: Provide each Fan with Ceiling Radiation Fire Damper where the Fan/Duct penetrates the Rated Floor/Ceiling Assembly. I. Approved Manufacturers: 1. Cook -Gemini 2. Greenheck Sp 3. Pace 4. Penn Zephyr PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Anchor fan units securely to structure or curb. END OF SECTION 23 3400 EXHAUST FANS 233400-1 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/2/2017 SECTION 23 3713 AIR OUTLETS &INLETS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Section 23 05 01 apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Furnish and install wall supply registers, transfer grilles, return air grilles, soffit grilles, ceiling diffusers, louvers connected to ductwork, and registers as described in Contract Documents. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GRILLES & REGISTERS A. Approved Manufacturers 1. Accord 2. Price 3. Anemostat 4. Krueger 5. Titus 6. Tuttle & Bailey 2.2 LOUVERS B. Extruded aluminum, with blades welded or screwed into frames and 112 inch mesh 16 gauge aluminum bird screen. C. Frames shall have mitered corners. D. Louvers shall be recessed, flanged, stationary, or removable as noted on Drawings. E. Approved Manufacturers 1. Airolite 2. American Warming 3. Arrow 4. Industrial Louvers 5. Ruskin 6. Vent Products 2.3 LOUVERED PENTHOUSES: 1. Fabricated from (0.081 inch 2.15 mm) extruded aluminum. a. All welded construction. b. Screws or rivets will not be allowed. 2. Blades: a. Horizontal at 45 degree angle with return bends at upper edges. b. Welded, mitered corners for continuous blade effect. 3. Bird Screens: 1/2 inch (13 mm) square mesh 16 ga (1.6 mm) aluminum in extruded aluminum, rewirable frames on interior of louvers. 4. Penthouse Finish: Clear anodized aluminum. 5. Curbs: a. Extruded aluminum, insulated, factory -fabricated curb. b. Insulation: Minimum 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) thick, 3 Ib 48 kg per cubic m density fiber glass. AIR OUTLETS & INLETS 233713-1 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/2/2017 C. Curb Extension: 8 inches (200 mm) above finished roof level. 6. Provide automatic back draft damper on Relief Air Penthouses. Provide motorized damper where indicated on Drawings. 7. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 016200 for definitions of Categories: a. Air -Rite Manufacturing: Model LPE-1. b. Breidert: Model RLX. C. Carnes: GLAB. d. Cook: Type TRE. e. United Enertech: Model PFL-D-4. f. Vent Products: Model 7100. 2.4 SPIN -IN FITTINGS F. Low pressure round take -offs to diffusers shall be made with spin -in fittings. They shall incorporate a manual balancing damper. The damper shall be spring loaded and a positive locking wing nut shall secure the damper position. G. Approved Manufacturers: 1. Sheet metal fittings: Genflex DB -1 DEL, Hercules PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Anchor securely into openings. B. Install with screws to match color and finish of grilles and registers. C. Touch-up any scratched finish surfaces. D. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. E. Check location of outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to conform with architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement. F. Install diffusers to ductwork with air tight connection. G. Provide balancing dampers on duct take -off to diffusers, and grilles and registers, despite whether dampers are specified as part of the diffuser, or grille and register assembly. H. Paint ductwork visible behind air outlets and inlets matte black. Refer to Section 09 90 00. END OF SECTION 23 3713 AIR OUTLETS & INLETS 233713-2 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/2/2017 SECTION 23 7400 PACKAGED HVAC SYSTEM PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Gas heating/ electric cooling packaged units. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 15050 - Common Work Results for HVAC. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ANSI/AHRI 390: Performance Rating of Single Package Vertical Air -Conditioners and Heat Pumps. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 23 0501. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation methods. I C. Shop Drawings and Wiring Schematics: Provide detailed physical layout and wiring schematics for installation. j 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Minimum 5 year experience manufacturing similar products. B. Installer Qualifications: Minimum 2 year experience installing similar products. 1.6 PRE -INSTALLATION MEETINGS V I A. Convene minimum two weeks prior to starting work of this section. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging bearing the brand name and manufacturer's identification until ready for installation. B. Handle materials as recommended by manufacturer to avoid damage. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside - manufacturer's recommended limits. PACKAGED HVAC SYSTEM 237400-1 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/2/2017 1.9 SEQUENCING A. PART 2 Ensure that products of this section are supplied to affected trades in time to prevent interruption of construction progress. PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS Acceptable Manufacturer: Magic -Pak®. Approved equal. Substitutions: by approval only. Requests for substitutions will be considered. 2.2 GAS HEATING/ ELECTRIC COOLING SINGLE PACKAGE VERTICAL UNITS A. Model Units: Gas Heating / Electric Cooling Single Package Vertical Units. 1. Capacity: a. See drawing schedule. 2. Construction: a. Certified ANSI/AHRI 390-2003: Performance Rating of Single Package Vertical Air - Conditioners and Heat Pumps. b. Up to 10.6 EER cooling efficiency. C. Completely self-contained heating and cooling package. 1) No outside condensing unit. 2) No external refrigerant lines. 3) No separate cooling coil. 4) No separate venting system. 5) No additional drain pan required d. Pre -wired and pre -charged. e. Individually metered and controlled. f. Easy service access. g. Louver color options to match building facade. h. Internal vent system (direct vent). 3. Refrigerant System: a. R41 0 -A Refrigerant. b. Rifled copper tubing with lanced fin coils. 4. Heat Exchanger: a. Standard aluminized steel tubular heat exchanger. 5. Cabinet: a. Galvanized steel cabinet material. b. Fully insulated cabinet for quiet operation. C. Wall sleeve as scheduled or indicated. d. Decorative extruded aluminum louver as scheduled or indicated. 6. Blower: a. Four -speed permanently lubricated motor for low maintenance, maximum efficiency and wide airflow range. b. PSC permanently lubricated motor for low maintenance and maximum efficiency. C. Dynamically balanced blowerwith resilient motor mounts for smooth and quiet operation. d. Internal washable filter. 7. Controls: a. Color coded wiring for easy service. b. Fuse protection on 24V circuit. 6. Installation: a. Easy to install and service. b. External utility connections for gas and high and low voltage lines. C. Louver mounts flush to outside wall. 9. Warranty: a. 5 year limited warranty on all parts. PACKAGED HVAC SYSTEM 237400-2 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/2/2017 b. 10 year warranty on aluminized heat exchanger: 10. Provide with 7 Day Programmable Thermostat. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin installation until wall openings and rough -in have been properly prepared. B. If preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare conditions using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the operation under the project conditions. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Test for proper operation and adjust as required until satisfactory results are obtained. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products until completion of project. B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 23 7400 PACKAGED HVAC SYSTEM 237400-3 Student Housing BVII, LLC JHS 1619 5/2/2017 SECTION 23 8316 WALL HEATER PARTI- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Section 23 05 01 apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Furnish and install wall heaters as described in Contract Documents. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Units shall be UL listed and comply with NEC. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Fan type for recess mounting in wall, or with Surface Mfd — Cabinet as per Schedule. B. 20 gauge minimum sheet metal casing. i C. Heating element shall be encased in steel finned casting and protected by thermal switch. D. Fan motor shall be heavy duty enclosed and permanently lubricated. I E. Fan shall be precision balanced and fan -motor assembly mounted to be vibration free. F. Units shall be controlled automatically by integral thermostat when heater is in "ON" position. G. Heater shall have built-in fan delay. H. Finish - Baked -on enamel. I I. Approved Manufacturers: 1. Q' Mark AWH4000 or equal by 2. Berko 3. Thermador 4. Markel 5. King END OF SECTION 23 8316 END OF DIVISION 23 WALL HEATERS 238316-1 I m